IntroductionWelcome| 00:00 | Welcome to Acrobat 9 Creating Forms.
My name is Brian Wood and I'll be your host.
| | 00:05 | Acrobat 9 is a really exciting release for forms
| | 00:08 | simply because they have completely revamped
how forms arevdone in Acrobat, made it a lot easier
| | 00:13 | and LiveCycle Designer on the Windows platform
| | 00:15 | has a lot of new additions as well.
| | 00:17 | We're going to talk about how to create forms, how to add fields,
how to work with things like distributing the files.
| | 00:23 | So, join me and we will take a look at exactly
how you can get setup with forms in Acrobat.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using the example files| 00:01 | If you are a premium member of the
lynda.com Online Training Library
| | 00:04 | or if you watch this tutorial on a disk, you have
access to the exercise files used throughout this title.
| | 00:09 | Exercise files for this title
are typically arranged by chapter
| | 00:14 | and within each chapter, we have the
PDFs for the files that we work with.
| | 00:17 | Now, what I've done is I've actually arranged them so that if you
jump in at a certain point throughout the videos and let's say you just
| | 00:23 | want to learn how to create a radio button,
| | 00:25 | a lot of times I create a PDF just
for you to start at that section.
| | 00:29 | If you're a monthly or annual subscriber to lynda.com,
you can follow along with your own files.
| | 00:34 | So let's get started.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
1. Creating Acrobat Forms (Acrobat Pro Only)Examining a completed form| 00:01 | Acrobat forms can be very, very exciting.
| | 00:03 | There's a lot of great things we can do with these and
there's a lot of different ways we can create them.
| | 00:08 | A form in Acrobat typically starts its life
| | 00:11 | from another program meaning you start
InDesign, Word, Illustrator, it does not matter.
| | 00:16 | You create a design that takes the form, you take the form
into Acrobat, then you start to add the interactivity.
| | 00:22 | By interactivity, I mean you add the popup menus,
you add the text fields, the quantity fields,
| | 00:27 | also sorts of things you need to make it so that
your user can enter the data and get it back to you.
| | 00:32 | I have got form final.pdf opened right here just to give
you an idea of some of the types of fields we can create
| | 00:38 | and this isn't actually all of them
but there are a good deal out here.
| | 00:41 | You can go out and interact, and one of the things
I want you to notice is when you open a form,
| | 00:46 | forms can be opened in reader or full version of Acrobat.
| | 00:49 | A lot of times, in the newer versions of Acrobat, you
will notice a purple bar at the very top or some kind
| | 00:54 | of bar that tells you "fill out the form."
| | 00:56 | It's letting you know that there
are interactive fields on this page.
| | 01:00 | Now by default, typically, the fields
are going to be highlighted.
| | 01:03 | If you click the Highlight Field's button here,
| | 01:05 | what that does if you click it several
time, it turns them on and turns them off.
| | 01:10 | So, make sure that they are on, you
will see like a blue highlight out here.
| | 01:13 | Those are all the fields that you can interact with.
| | 01:16 | It's a great thing that Acrobat does this as well as Reader
does this simply because if you have a long document,
| | 01:22 | like let's say a contract, and the only fillable
form is a signature or a date or something like that
| | 01:26 | and it's at the very end on page 50, you
don't want to have to take your cursor
| | 01:30 | and move around and see where you see a form.
| | 01:32 | So, highlighting fields could be very effective.
| | 01:35 | You will also notice that some of the fields out
here what look like fields are not highlighted.
| | 01:40 | Acrobat can have fields that are interactive,
fields that are hidden, fields that are required,
| | 01:45 | fields that are locked where you cannot interact with them.
| | 01:48 | There's a lot of different types of fields we can create.
| | 01:51 | Now, there are several different
types of forms we can create as well.
| | 01:55 | Acrobat Standard, Pro and Pro Extended allows
you to create what's called an AcroForm.
| | 01:59 | An AcroForm is taking a design typically from somewhere
else and then just adding interactivity like we see here.
| | 02:07 | You also have LiveCycle forms or LiveCycle Designer forms.
| | 02:11 | LiveCycle Designer is a program that comes on
the Windows platform only on Pro and Pro Extended
| | 02:17 | and it's an XML-based form , which allows you
to create a form somewhat similarly to Acrobat
| | 02:23 | but can be a little bit easier at times because they have
a series of fields that you can just drag on the page.
| | 02:29 | We've got a lot more features as far
as trying to connect with database,
| | 02:32 | sending that data off as XML, all
sorts of different things we can do.
| | 02:36 | So, Acrobat creates very effective but sometimes a little
bit simpler forms, whereas LiveCycle Designer tends
| | 02:42 | to create a little bit more complex forms in some cases.
| | 02:46 | Now, when you create a form, you can
distribute it in a lot of different ways.
| | 02:50 | So, as we go out here and we start, if you
want to just start trying to fill some things
| | 02:54 | out here, you will notice you can do that.
| | 02:56 | When we interact with forms, we can have it where we
email this to somebody and they simply print it out,
| | 03:02 | they fill it up by hand and they fax it back to us.
| | 03:04 | And that's the simplest way to do it.
| | 03:06 | Another way we can do it is we can have the
interactive forms out here in the interactive fields.
| | 03:10 | You can email this to somebody or give it to
somebody, could be on a website as well or weblink.
| | 03:14 | When they open it, they go out and
they start filling out the fields.
| | 03:18 | They can then print it and fax it back.
| | 03:20 | The other way you can do it.
| | 03:21 | You can have somebody fill this out
and you can have a Submit button.
| | 03:24 | So Submit button in its simplest form allows
you to email the data back to someone.
| | 03:29 | If you take a look there, it's sent
the data to brian@evolveseattle.com.
| | 03:33 | So, if you were to click this, what it would do is open up
your email software, it would ask you in certain versions
| | 03:37 | of Acrobat do you have Hotmail
or Gmail or something like that
| | 03:41 | or do you have Outlook if you can't
find an e-mail application.
| | 03:44 | It then creates an e-mail, emails the PDF back or however
you told it to submit the data back and we will talk
| | 03:50 | about that later, and then you get the actual data back.
| | 03:53 | The final way that we can do this is to click
Submit and allow it to submit via server.
| | 03:58 | You can have an Acrobat form or a LiveCycle form created
LiveCycle Designer, you can post it on a website
| | 04:04 | or email to someone, making click Submit and it
can be treated like an HTML form where it goes
| | 04:10 | through your server or you can send it to a database.
| | 04:12 | There's a lot of things you can
do with increasing complexity.
| | 04:15 | So, I want to just show you this.
| | 04:17 | I have got a web form.
| | 04:18 | I am going to go out to the browser here.
| | 04:20 | I am in Internet Explorer right now.
| | 04:22 | I have got a web form here.
| | 04:24 | If you look, it's just a simple webpage.
| | 04:26 | This is my company.
| | 04:27 | You are going to see click to fill out our form.
| | 04:29 | I click that and what I have done is I have
actually posted that PDF up on a web server.
| | 04:34 | So this is live in a website, you will see this.
| | 04:36 | There's a form right there.
| | 04:38 | As somebody goes and fills this thing out and what's really
cool now is that in later versions of Safari with Acrobat 9
| | 04:44 | on the Mac side, you can now open a PDF in Safari.
| | 04:48 | If somebody does click on that link and their
browser doesn't support opening the PDF,
| | 04:52 | what it will do is it will open in Reader or
full version of Acrobat on their hard drive
| | 04:57 | and they can still interact or fill
out the form and then submit it.
| | 05:00 | You will notice there's a Submit button here.
| | 05:02 | What I have done is I have actually sent this to our
CGI bin , which is basically a little script waiting.
| | 05:07 | This is how our HTML or simple HTML forms work.
| | 05:10 | When I click Submit, it will submit the data.
| | 05:13 | I didn't make anything necessary
here or required I should say.
| | 05:15 | And what it does it interacts with my server, sends the
data back and it says "thank you for filling out the form."
| | 05:23 | So, this is a little bit further down the road here
but you can get Acrobat forms to be filled out on a website
| | 05:29 | and have it used in your site the way
you actually would with HTML forms.
| | 05:33 | Now, just to show you what I would receive on the other
end, this is probably the simplest thing we can do here.
| | 05:37 | But I will open up Outlook, I will give you an
idea of what I have got back in return here.
| | 05:41 | It may ask me a few questions about
my archiving but that's fun.
| | 05:45 | So this is what I would receive in return.
| | 05:47 | Your feedback form is submitted on a certain date and
here are the form field names and we will talk about that
| | 05:52 | in the next few videos here as well as
what they typed in or what they chose.
| | 05:57 | So, this is the simplest way to be able to get
this data back using what's called a CGI bin
| | 06:02 | and we will discuss that in a later video.
| | 06:04 | Let me go back over to Acrobat here, form
final.pdf of how you can work with forms,
| | 06:09 | what forms are, the different ways to distribute them.
| | 06:12 | I never talked about this but Acrobat has a way to
distribute built-in and we will see that in later video just
| | 06:17 | to give you an idea of what you can do with forms.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Starting a form with the Form wizard| 00:01 | We will take a look at just how to start
a form using the Form Wizard in Acrobat 9.
| | 00:06 | Form Wizard is available on Mac and Windows
as well as Standard Pro - Pro Extended.
| | 00:10 | When you go to create a form in
Acrobat a lot of times like I mentioned
| | 00:14 | in previous video you started with a design somewhere else.
| | 00:17 | It could be Word, it could be InDesign,
it could Illustrator wherever.
| | 00:21 | You make a PDF out of that program
then you can bring it in here.
| | 00:24 | You can open it up and start adding your form fields.
| | 00:27 | Another way you can do this especially
on the Windows platform.
| | 00:30 | We will talk about the differences
here between Windows and Mac.
| | 00:33 | Literally take a Word Document, InDesign file
and things like that, not turn it into a PDF
| | 00:38 | and from Acrobat have it convert to
PDF and then start the form process.
| | 00:43 | I have got form recognized start that PDF opened
right now and if you look out here you are going to see
| | 00:48 | that there's a bunch of lines going on
where things are going to be located.
| | 00:51 | They are going to see boxes all sorts of things.
| | 00:54 | This was created in InDesign.
| | 00:55 | Now what we are going to do is we are going to run
through the process on how to start a form using the Wizard
| | 01:00 | and then I am going to talk a little bit about design.
| | 01:02 | So come on up to the Forms task button.
| | 01:05 | You will see Start Form Wizard, Add or Edit fields,
Distribute form, Track forms a bunch of different things in here.
| | 01:12 | The start form wizard is when you want to create
a form from an existing PDF file or from something
| | 01:18 | that hasn't been turned into a PDF
file, native file like a Word Document,
| | 01:21 | an image, an InDesign file that sort of thing.
| | 01:24 | Add or Edit fields is when you want to go out and
either manually add fields after you've opened the PDF file
| | 01:30 | or for an existing PDF file have it
run Form Field Recognition for you.
| | 01:35 | Form Field Recognition is having it try
and locate where the form field should be
| | 01:40 | on the page and this can be very, very useful.
| | 01:42 | We are going to use the form wizard
so click Start Form Wizard.
| | 01:46 | Now this dialog box Create or Edit Form is
going to be a little different depending
| | 01:50 | on both your version of Acrobat as well as the platforms.
| | 01:54 | I am on Windows.
| | 01:55 | I am in Pro Extended right now.
| | 01:57 | If you are on Mac you will look a little different.
| | 02:00 | I want to point things out here.
| | 02:01 | On Mac you will only see two different
options in here as well as if you are on standard
| | 02:06 | on the Windows platform you will see on Windows Pro
and Pro Extended an existing electronic document
| | 02:11 | so what you can do is you can take an existing
PDF, Word Document, Excel just a list of probably
| | 02:17 | about 50 different file formats and that's
being kind of conservative and convert it to PDF
| | 02:23 | and let it what's called recognize the form fields for you.
| | 02:26 | Now if you are on Mac it's going to say
something like start with the PDF document.
| | 02:30 | If you choose this option here and you click Next on Windows
it will let you go out and find and use the existing file
| | 02:37 | that we have open right now or go find
another file and there's a lot of file types.
| | 02:42 | On Mac it will say start with PDF and if you click Next
what it's going to do is going to say OK we can either start
| | 02:47 | with the PDF you already have opened and run forms
on that or create forms on that or we can create it
| | 02:52 | from an InDesign file, a JIFF,
a JPEG, different file formats.
| | 02:57 | You will also see a paper form.
| | 02:59 | All versions, all platforms should have
this and that allows you to scan a form.
| | 03:03 | Maybe you have got a word form.
| | 03:04 | I have done this a lot of times.
| | 03:05 | You have got a form that you have already printed out.
| | 03:08 | It's maybe in your records kind of thing and you
want to be able to turn it into a digital form.
| | 03:12 | You can put it on your scanner, hook your scanner up.
| | 03:14 | Make sure it's connected.
| | 03:15 | Say a paper form it will try and
go out and recognize your scanner
| | 03:19 | and you can scan it directly in
here and recognize the form fields.
| | 03:23 | We will talk about that in just a few minutes.
| | 03:24 | No existing form.
| | 03:25 | You are only going to see this on Windows.
| | 03:27 | You are going to see this in Pro and Pro Extended
because Pro and Pro Extended on the Windows platform come
| | 03:32 | with Life Cycle Designer , which is a separate application.
| | 03:35 | You basically get for I guess you could say free and it
allows you to go over there and either take an existing PDF
| | 03:41 | or if you look right here it says from scratch
| | 03:43 | or from a template it has templates
already pre-built that you can use.
| | 03:47 | I am going to use an existing electronic
document on Mac it will say start with PDF.
| | 03:51 | Click Next.
| | 03:53 | It can ask you.
| | 03:53 | What you want to do?
| | 03:54 | Do you want to use the current
document open that you have out here
| | 03:56 | or do you want to import a file from the file system.
| | 03:59 | We are going to use the document that's already
open right now otherwise you can just go browse for it.
| | 04:03 | If you choose import a file from
file system you could go find it
| | 04:07 | and it will tell you all the file types you can pull from.
| | 04:10 | Now like I said before on Windows we have
the ability to take an office document,
| | 04:15 | convert it to PDF as well as lot of other file formats.
| | 04:18 | On Mac we don't have as many file formats
but that's OK you can take your PDF files
| | 04:22 | and do the same so choose use the current document.
| | 04:26 | Click next.
| | 04:27 | Now when you open up a file and use that what's called
a Form Wizard to create form it takes your document.
| | 04:34 | If it's an original file like let's say InDesign
file or Word Document and you have browsed for it
| | 04:38 | and you found it it's going to convert it to PDF for you.
| | 04:41 | It's going to open it in here and it's going
to try and run Form Field Recognition,
| | 04:45 | which means wherever it thinks there should be a field if
your design is designed in certain way it will make a field.
| | 04:52 | If you look out here you are going to see this
dialog box "Welcome to Form Editing mode."
| | 04:56 | Now new in Acrobat 9 you have got
something called Form Editing mode.
| | 04:59 | Form Editing mode means you get the run of the mill
here you can go in and do whatever you want add fields,
| | 05:05 | edit fields without having to choose tools and this
is very different from previous versions of Acrobat,
| | 05:10 | this is great, you are going to see this.
| | 05:12 | If you look at this dialog, it's going to tell you
| | 05:15 | that during creation Acrobat may have missed
some fields or created extraneous fields.
| | 05:20 | So, it recognizes where they should go, it's not going to
be a perfect job everything, but it is still incredible.
| | 05:26 | You have to validate that the fields are correct.
| | 05:28 | If they are not named the correct thing you want
to name them and it tells you how do it right here.
| | 05:32 | You have got a toolbar, you can add more fields
you can also right-click to edit or delete fields.
| | 05:37 | Down here it's going to give you
description of what's going on,
| | 05:40 | so you are going to see these black
boxes with the name in the middle.
| | 05:43 | The black box is the field itself that's the
fillible part that somebody can interact with
| | 05:47 | and the name in the middle is the form field name.
| | 05:50 | Form field names are very important when you deal with
forms in Acrobat and forms just about anywhere else,
| | 05:56 | simply because if you decide to take this data later on
and let's say you name all your form fields 1, 2, 3, 4,
| | 06:03 | 5 you are going to look at the data, it's going
| | 06:06 | to literally tell you Form Field 1 had
Brian in it, that's the data it had.
| | 06:11 | So, if you don't know what one
means, it's going to be hard to tell.
| | 06:14 | OK so this is just telling you what's going on,
if you click OK, take a look out here you will see
| | 06:18 | that it did create these form fields for us automatically.
| | 06:20 | Now look on the left side over here and
you will see the field's navigation panel.
| | 06:24 | You will also notice all the other navigation panels
as you say have gone away that's because you are
| | 06:29 | in Form Editing mode, look up top, you
will notice you have your menu still
| | 06:33 | but all the tool bars you had before
are gone because you are in this mode.
| | 06:36 | Far left over here you will see this arrow, this allows
you to go in and select any other fields out here,
| | 06:42 | you can edit them and you will see right
double click to edit it, you can rename it,
| | 06:46 | there's a lot of things we can do with this.
| | 06:47 | You are going to see Add New Field button, click Add
New Field, this allows you to simply add a new field,
| | 06:52 | if you choose one of these and you will see
all the different kinds we can add here,
| | 06:56 | just like an HTML form you can click on that go out to
the page and click on the page, that's a big difference
| | 07:01 | between previous versions, very useful,
you can preview the form, click Preview.
| | 07:05 | What that does as it takes it out here and
shows you kind of what the end user might see.
| | 07:09 | So you will see it right here it's highlighting all the
fields once again, we have got that purple bar there,
| | 07:13 | if you want to click highlight fields to hide those, it
just shows you what the form looks like, if you go out there
| | 07:18 | and put your cursor somewhere, you can
interact with this now and try it out.
| | 07:22 | You will also notice that we have a Submit Form
button, depending on how you send this to someone else,
| | 07:27 | they will see this button and we are
going to talk about that in a later video.
| | 07:31 | You will also notice that you can zoom
in, you can go to different pages,
| | 07:35 | your form can have more than one page, which is incredible.
| | 07:38 | If you click Edit Layout again, you
will notice that button has changed.
| | 07:41 | It will take you back where you were,
so it will show you the Preview button.
| | 07:44 | You toggle between editing it and previewing it.
| | 07:46 | If you look to the far right, you
will notice two more buttons.
| | 07:49 | Distribute Form is when you are all done you get the form
ready to go, you think it's good, you click Distribute Form.
| | 07:54 | Acrobat has a distribution method for you to
to be able to send this out using a little wizard
| | 07:58 | and what it does it takes the PDF and allows
you to email it through group of people.
| | 08:03 | So, it isn't going to put it on a website
necessarily, so people can click on it and open it,
| | 08:07 | but it will email it to people, they can fill it out
and then what you can do is track their progress.
| | 08:12 | You can track who has sent you data back,
whether or not they sent you data back,
| | 08:16 | what time you sent it all sorts of different information.
| | 08:18 | So, that's one way that Acrobat tries to
make it easy on you to distribute the form.
| | 08:22 | You will also notice Close Form Editing.
| | 08:24 | If you go through and you start editing the fields and
you realize, you are like well I think I am done, that's it.
| | 08:29 | Get it out of here maybe email it or
save it or do something like that,
| | 08:32 | click Close Form Editing, just to see what happens here.
| | 08:35 | It will take you back into the regular
Acrobat, you will see it out here,
| | 08:39 | they have all of your toolbars,
all your navigation panels back.
| | 08:41 | If you want to edit the form again,
there's a couple of ways to do this,
| | 08:45 | but I typically go to the Forms task button
you will see Add or Edit Fields click on that,
| | 08:50 | it will time to take you back in, it will say before
creating the form changes you made need to be saved,
| | 08:55 | if you like to save click yes, just go ahead and save it.
| | 08:57 | It can ask you where you want to put it and I
will put it on my desktop just so I don't mess
| | 09:01 | with the original and it takes you into editing mode.
| | 09:04 | Now we are going to go through we are going to
doing a lot of editing to fields things like that.
| | 09:09 | We are going to talk about that but I want to just take
a second here and talk about how you can make it easier
| | 09:14 | on yourself to have it recognize these fields and
have it do it automatically but this didn't just happen.
| | 09:20 | There are some things I did it to form to have
it recognize the fields a little bit easier.
| | 09:23 | I will zoom in a little bit.
| | 09:25 | What I would like you to do is Preview click
on the Preview button up there in the toolbars.
| | 09:30 | It will show you what it looks like as a final form here.
| | 09:33 | Now the way the recognizing works I
am using my scroll wheel to go down.
| | 09:37 | It looks for a bit of text and some kind of box or line
some kind of indicator saying here is where a form goes.
| | 09:44 | Now in its simplest form you can have like first
name and some black line of some line after it.
| | 09:49 | You can create that at any program you want so we can
do that InDesign Illustrator, Word doesn't matter.
| | 09:54 | If you want to create like checkboxes let's scroll
down here you'll see Mastercard, Visa, Amex, Discover.
| | 10:02 | If you put a word and then a nice little box after it of some kind
it will consider that to be a checkbox, it will recognize it
| | 10:09 | and it will draw little checkbox there for
you so if you click in that you will see.
| | 10:12 | If you come down to the lower left down here you
will see are you a supplier you will see Yes or No.
| | 10:16 | If you have the words Yes, No out
there in a box to the right typically
| | 10:21 | to the right it could be a little off up or down.
| | 10:24 | It will turn that into what's called
a Radio Button by default.
| | 10:27 | So the Radio Button is mutually exclusive,
which means you can only click on one Yes or No.
| | 10:31 | If you have the words Signature or I believe Sign will
work as well there's a couple of different things you can do
| | 10:37 | and you have a line next to that text, it will turn
it into a Signature field so you can click the Sign.
| | 10:42 | Now I have tried doing things like Pop-up
Menus, Combo Boxes things like that
| | 10:46 | and I didn't have it extreme success with those.
| | 10:49 | So these are some helpful hints that you can use.
| | 10:51 | What I would like you to do is click Close Form
Editing and that will get you out of there.
| | 10:57 | You will be able to see all the different fields
all the different toolbars and navigation panels,
| | 11:01 | click Show One page at a time to see the whole form.
| | 11:04 | Now I want to show you a trick that I pulled here
| | 11:06 | and this is something I learned along the
way from a bunch of different websites.
| | 11:10 | If you look in the left hand side over here you
will see that we have the ability to look at layers.
| | 11:15 | If you don't see the Layers Navigation tab here you can
right-click over here and you will see Layers click Layers,
| | 11:21 | Ctrl click on Mac, it will open up your Layers.
| | 11:25 | Now Acrobat 6 and later allows you to
create what's called a Layered File.
| | 11:29 | This is going to work effectively in programs
that have Layers like InDesign or Illustrator.
| | 11:33 | If you come over here and click on the Plus you
will notice that I have got some Layers over here.
| | 11:38 | What I have done is I have drawn these
lines to indicate where fields should be.
| | 11:43 | Now in my design I don't want those lines
and I don't want those boxes out there.
| | 11:47 | So I drew them I put them on one layer, and then if I come over
to the left here you can actually turn off all those lines
| | 11:54 | and I put them on a layer called Remove and they are
all gone but I still have my Form Field out there.
| | 11:58 | They would just use to actually create the Form Fields.
| | 12:01 | Some programs don't have layers it can be a little bit more
difficult so you just you get by you do what you need to do.
| | 12:07 | But being able to have a Layered File if you are in InDesign
if you are in Illustrator if you Save As from Illustrator
| | 12:13 | as a PDF or if you export from InDesign let say for instance
| | 12:16 | if your file is already layered meaning you have got all
this lines in a separate layer you would then Export
| | 12:22 | or Save As in Acrobat 6 or later PDF and tell it to
preserve the layers, this little checkbox and to Save
| | 12:28 | As from Illustrator or the Export from InDesign.
| | 12:30 | And then when you get in here you let it run the
Form Fields let it recognize them and you turn off
| | 12:36 | that layer and you got yourself your design.
| | 12:38 | This is being able to start with the Form Wizard, Form
Wizard Auto recognizes Form Fields the best way it can.
| | 12:44 | Sometimes it won't recognize anything I have had that happen
before because it's just too vague, it can't figure it out.
| | 12:49 | So that's a way to get started with the form running through
the Form Wizard make it easy on yourself you can start
| | 12:55 | to design somewhere else bring it in, open it
up let it recognize the Form Fields for you.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Detecting form fields from a PDF| 00:01 | If you have a PDF you've already created,
| | 00:04 | you can have Acrobat recognize the form
fields where it thinks they should be.
| | 00:09 | So in this video we will take a look at
how to open up a PDF, work with a PDF
| | 00:14 | and have it recognize the form fields,
but doing it a little bit more manually.
| | 00:19 | I have got Form Recognize Start.PDF open right now.
| | 00:22 | And if you have a PDF, you open it up,
you just want to start adding form fields.
| | 00:27 | If you click the Forms task button up
top, you will see Add or Edit Fields.
| | 00:33 | Choose Add or Edit Fields and what it does
is it says, "Do you want Acrobat to try
| | 00:39 | and automatically detect the form fields for you?"
| | 00:41 | This gives you a choice.
| | 00:42 | If you use the wizard, like we did in the
previous video, doesn't give you a choice.
| | 00:47 | It just goes through and detects
and sometimes that can be annoying.
| | 00:49 | It's too much work to redo or undo
what Acrobat did in certain forms.
| | 00:53 | So in this case you get a choice.
| | 00:55 | If you choose No it's not going to do anything, it's going
to open up the Form Editing mode, allow you to start working
| | 01:01 | on the form but you have to manually
go out and create your fields.
| | 01:04 | Clicking Yes will auto detect the form fields very
similar to starting with the form field wizard.
| | 01:10 | We are going to click Yes.
| | 01:11 | I want to see what it does, give it a try.
| | 01:13 | It will run through, it will say
Welcome to Form Editing mode.
| | 01:19 | Take a look at this dialog box.
| | 01:20 | It's going to try and help you out,
let you know what happened here.
| | 01:22 | It did recognize form fields.
| | 01:25 | Told you that Acrobat may have missed some or
may have made some where they shouldn't be.
| | 01:29 | You have to check the fields and make sure they are all
correctly named because like we said in previous videos,
| | 01:34 | the name of the field is very important
and you can see it right in the middle.
| | 01:36 | And you have to make sure it's going
to function the way you want it to.
| | 01:39 | So click OK, take a look.
| | 01:42 | You will see all the form fields it created.
| | 01:43 | They may not be perfect, you may not have wanted
them to create certain ones but we gave it a try.
| | 01:49 | We are now in Form Editing mode, which
means all our toolbars have gone away,
| | 01:53 | all the navigation panels have gone away
except for a fields navigation panel.
| | 01:57 | And if you have created forms in previous versions,
this is very different but it's very helpful.
| | 02:01 | So just to take a look out here, you can
see, like I said, all the form fields.
| | 02:05 | Just take your cursor, run around,
you will see them all out here.
| | 02:08 | This is now interactive.
| | 02:09 | So we could technically send this to somebody,
they could click, type in information, fill it out,
| | 02:14 | but it may not work the way we want it to.
| | 02:17 | Matter of fact look down here where it
says GrunbyteInc.com at the very bottom.
| | 02:21 | I don't know what this is.
| | 02:22 | This shouldn't be here.
| | 02:23 | It created some form field that I don't want.
| | 02:26 | So what our job to do now is our
job is to go out and try and edit this.
| | 02:30 | Try and delete, rename, figure out what the form fields are
doing and that's what we are going to do in the next video.
| | 02:36 | So leave this form open so we can go through and fix
the fields, change them, do what we need to do to them.
| | 02:41 | This is just a great way to get started so
you don't have to do all the heavy-lifting.
| | 02:46 | Let Acrobat do some of that for you.
| | 02:48 | As long as the design is set up correctly, it can go through
and recognize fields and make it a little bit easier on you.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Editing form fields| 00:03 | Once the form has been opened and the fields have
been recognized, we are going to go through now
| | 00:08 | and edit the different fields out there by renaming,
deleting and checking the properties on these.
| | 00:13 | The thing about Acrobat is if you use the Form
Wizard or if you use the Add or Edit Fields option
| | 00:18 | and it recognizes the fields for you, if you let it do
that, it will go through and do a pretty good job depending
| | 00:24 | on your design, like I keep saying throughout these videos.
| | 00:27 | Sometimes it won't.
| | 00:28 | If you look at the page I have got opened, Form
Recognize Start, and if you are just joining us here,
| | 00:33 | you can open Form Recognize Edit and if you open up
Form Recognize Edit, you need to go to the Forms Menu
| | 00:39 | and you will see second in command here, you will see
Add or Edit fields, you need to click on that to get
| | 00:44 | where we are right now, because we are in Form Editing mode.
| | 00:48 | So what's in Form Editing mode?
| | 00:50 | You look at the Form itself, you are going to see
at the very bottom, I mentioned in the last video
| | 00:53 | that when we recognize as it created some
wacky field down here that we don't need.
| | 00:58 | Now in Form Editing mode, we can go out and select, delete,
edit the properties on, do all sorts of different things.
| | 01:04 | I want to first draw your attention over to left side of
this screen, you will see the Fields Navigation Panel,
| | 01:10 | this is something that was used to be kind of hidden in
Acrobat, you could go, see all the fields on the page,
| | 01:15 | but now they immediately open this up, which I applaud, I
think it's great, because it allows you to see them all.
| | 01:21 | These are all the interactive fields
in the page, they recognize.
| | 01:24 | If you look over here, you are going to see they are sorted
by page number, if you click on the minus or the plus there,
| | 01:29 | you will see that you can open and close this.
| | 01:31 | If there were multiple pages, you could just open
one page and see all the fields that are on that page.
| | 01:37 | You will notice that, you will see to the left here a
little icon, which tells you what type of field it is,
| | 01:41 | this is the text field icon and to the right
of that you will see the name in the field.
| | 01:46 | Now if you click, let's say on first name here, just click
once on it, look out in the page out there in your PDF,
| | 01:52 | what happens here is it shows you , which field that one
is, so it will highlight it out here in the page for you.
| | 01:58 | Every time you click in a field, it just
goes through and highlights it out there.
| | 02:02 | Now these fields right now in this Fields
Navigation Panel are shown in tab order.
| | 02:07 | When somebody goes out there, put the cursor in the
first field, and they press the tab key several times,
| | 02:12 | which I am sure you have probably done in the form in
the web, it will go to the next field and it will do it
| | 02:17 | in a certain order, so this is called Tab Order and
in a later video, we will show how to change that.
| | 02:22 | If you scroll down a little bit in the Fields
Navigation Panel, down towards the bottom,
| | 02:26 | you will probably see some checkmarks or checkboxes,
| | 02:29 | you will also see a little circle button
here, these are your radio buttons.
| | 02:33 | You will see a little x field right
here, which is your signature field.
| | 02:36 | These are all different type of form
fields and it is a great thing to see,
| | 02:39 | because you can tell exactly, which one is, which.
| | 02:42 | So for instance, click on the little field to
the left of signature there over navigation panel
| | 02:46 | and it highlights it on the page for you.
| | 02:48 | Now if we want to, let's say, we need to do something like
this, you need to rename some of these fields, for instance,
| | 02:53 | scrolling up in the navigation panel here, I will see that
we have got the number one field, what does that mean?
| | 02:59 | Lot of that's been recognized, it's
like OK I'll just put a number on it.
| | 03:02 | If you click on the field there, you will
notice it is actually highlighting quantity 1,
| | 03:07 | now the reason why it did this is because there
wasn't really any text around the lines here,
| | 03:12 | we are at recognized fields, so a lot
of times it just kind of numbers them.
| | 03:17 | So it's our job to go in and rename these, so that they make
sense, so when you get this data you can tell what it means.
| | 03:22 | Acrobat allows you to do this in several different ways.
| | 03:24 | I now think the easiest way to do this is if you look
into the Fields Navigation Panel, come up to the number,
| | 03:30 | if you double click on it slowly or if you want to right
click, or Ctrl click on Mac, you will see Rename field.
| | 03:37 | We are going to rename this.
| | 03:38 | Now when you name fields, I am kind of old school and I do
a lot of web developing, so I tend to keep things as simple
| | 03:43 | as I can, I don't go into you know 40-word descriptions.
| | 03:47 | So I usually call it like Quan 1 for
Quantity 1 or Qty 1, something like that.
| | 03:53 | And my way of thinking for naming fields is, I tend
not to put spaces in the names like you are going
| | 03:58 | to see the Acrobat does automatically
here, some programs don't like it.
| | 04:02 | So I tend to use underscores or something like that.
| | 04:05 | You don't want to use a lot of different crazy
characters like exclamation points or things like that,
| | 04:09 | so you can use numbers, upper case, lower case,
| | 04:11 | and I try and keep mine lower case once
again, it's just a web habit I have.
| | 04:14 | So we are going to go through and
try and rename all of these.
| | 04:17 | So you just click twice slowly if you want to do that or
right-click or Ctrl click and it will just rename all these.
| | 04:24 | And this may seem kind of like a pain, but if you have
done this in previous versions, this is a lot easier.
| | 04:31 | You could also if you want to, you can copy-paste, so
if you come back to one of these, you could copy that.
| | 04:37 | Come back to the next field, slowly
double click on it and the paste
| | 04:40 | and then just rename it Quantity
5 or something like that.
| | 04:44 | So it allows you do that pretty easily.
| | 04:45 | So we can rename fields, it's not too bad, also
what we can do is we can delete fields
| | 04:49 | that are not necessary.
| | 04:50 | So come on out to the PDF, the page itself.
| | 04:53 | You are going to once again see that GrunbyteInc.com.
| | 04:56 | Click on that and that will select the field on the page.
| | 04:59 | It will also select the field in the
field's navigation panel to the left.
| | 05:02 | Now if you want to delete this field,
couple of ways you can do this.
| | 05:05 | First instinct might be to hit like Delete or
Backspace or something like that and that is correct.
| | 05:11 | Another way you can do this is either you are going to do a
lot of right-click or Ctrl click on the field itself either
| | 05:16 | on the page or in the fields navigation panel, and you
will see we have got a lot of features out here we can do.
| | 05:21 | We can cut these, copy them, delete them, all
sorts of things, so anyway you want to do it.
| | 05:25 | I will press Delete here and I will get rid of it.
| | 05:27 | It will also get rid of from the list over
there, telling us we don't have it anymore.
| | 05:31 | So we can change the names, we can delete,
we can add; we will see that in later videos.
| | 05:36 | We can also move or resize fields pretty easily out here.
| | 05:40 | One of the fields that was created
is definitely not the correct size,
| | 05:44 | if you look where it says "any product suggestions"
right here I have got this field called Undefined,
| | 05:49 | Acrobat got a little confused, it made a field, which
I applaud, but the text was too far away from a line,
| | 05:55 | I had a line drawn out here and it was
too far away for it to name the field.
| | 05:59 | One thing I want you to notice is that when it
recognizes fields for you, it does this automatically,
| | 06:04 | the text to the left or above sometimes below not quite
as often, it will name the field exactly the text it sees,
| | 06:12 | which can be very helpful sometimes it's not what you want.
| | 06:15 | Like for instance, the tax field over here, if
you click on that field, you will see the name,
| | 06:20 | it's kind of hard to see it out here, but if you go to
the navigation panel, you will see the name of the field,
| | 06:24 | is tax 875, because that's what
it tried to pick up from the left.
| | 06:27 | I am not going to need my field tax
875, I might actually just name it Tax,
| | 06:31 | so we could change that name if we wanted to.
| | 06:34 | My point here is this, click Undefined, we need
to change that name, if you don't like doing it
| | 06:40 | over the navigation panel over there, you
can also right-click directly on the field
| | 06:44 | or Ctrl click on Mac and you will see Rename field.
| | 06:47 | Choose Rename field and it comes up
with this nice little tool-tip box,
| | 06:51 | you can see its little tip and we can just name this.
| | 06:53 | We will call this Suggest.
| | 06:55 | Now when you rename fields this way, press Enter or Return
to accept it, it will change it and if you look out here
| | 07:01 | in the navigation panel on the left,
it automatically changes it over there.
| | 07:05 | Now when you are done, you can just click somewhere else,
| | 07:07 | there is a lot of other information we
will look at in later videos, but not now.
| | 07:10 | So if we click somewhere else that will go away.
| | 07:13 | Now the field is too small.
| | 07:14 | I want to make it so that they can type in
lots of suggestions, hopefully good ones,
| | 07:18 | click on the field on the page, we don't have to
select the tools, this is the best part about it.
| | 07:22 | And you will notice all these little bounding points, so
what I am going to do is zoom-in a bit so you can see this,
| | 07:26 | you are going to see a plus and minus up top up zoom in.
| | 07:30 | I'll use my scroll wheel to scroll down a bit on my
mouse, you can also use the scrollbar to the right.
| | 07:36 | And we can resize these fields to move them.
| | 07:38 | So suppose I want to move it up just a little bit,
any where in the middle, you can click and drag,
| | 07:42 | move these fields around, it will just
kind of move it whereever you want to go.
| | 07:47 | If you want to resize the field, you will see these little
points, these little bounding points, you can come to a corner
| | 07:51 | or a side, click and drag, I will
just make it little bit taller.
| | 07:54 | This is so much better, because you get to see what it
looks like, it's a nice smooth little transition here
| | 07:59 | and once you let go, it should resize it for you.
| | 08:02 | So we can resize fields pretty easily.
| | 08:05 | We can also copy paste fields.
| | 08:07 | We can change the properties and
a lot of things we can do here.
| | 08:10 | So we have renamed it, we have resized
it, we have also deleted some fields.
| | 08:14 | If you want to, we can also change the
properties on fields, this can be done either
| | 08:18 | in the fields navigation panel
to the left or out in the PDF.
| | 08:23 | For the Suggest field, what I would
like to do is I just want
| | 08:25 | to do a few little things, I am
not going to get too far into this.
| | 08:28 | If you want to learn more about
working with the field properties,
| | 08:31 | you can go to each video and see
the different types of fields.
| | 08:34 | For instance, come to the Suggest field here, right
click or Ctrl click on Mac, you will see the properties.
| | 08:40 | You will also notice the shortcut there.
| | 08:41 | If you work with lot of forms, you
might want to use that shortcut.
| | 08:44 | Go to Properties, it should open
up the Properties dialog box.
| | 08:48 | Another quick tip here is, if you want to, I am
going to move this dialog box out of the way,
| | 08:52 | it might get a little jarring here and I'll move it out
of the way, the field itself if you want to go
| | 08:56 | to the Properties you can also double click
on it, that will go to the Properties.
| | 08:59 | I really try and avoid doing that because if you
double click on a field, it will move it sometimes,
| | 09:03 | and if you got all these fields lined up
perfectly, it can be kind of headache.
| | 09:08 | Every field has properties, every type
of field has its own type of properties,
| | 09:13 | so this is a text field has text field properties.
| | 09:16 | I just want to mention this simply because
if you need to get in here, you can.
| | 09:19 | You are going to notice there are
tons of tabs up at the top,
| | 09:22 | these are the different things
you can change about the field.
| | 09:24 | What I usually do when I am work in fields and I'll
mention this in a later video is I start from the left,
| | 09:29 | work my way to the right and change
anything I need to about the field.
| | 09:33 | You will notice here on the General tab, we have the
name, the name is what we have been changing so far,
| | 09:38 | this is probably the long-winded way of trying
to change name, but you can do it here.
| | 09:43 | You have got Appearance, you can change.
| | 09:44 | You can change what it looks
like, the border or the color of the fill
| | 09:48 | We have certain options and just I wanted to take you
in here just to show you this for this kind of field,
| | 09:52 | this is a big field, I will pull the
dialog box up, you can see the whole thing.
| | 09:56 | I want to make it so it's multiple line,
so you can make it multiple line.
| | 09:59 | So there's a lot of ways we can change
fields, the properties of fields,
| | 10:03 | and like I said if you want a little more
information, go to the video that talks
| | 10:06 | about a specific type of field, so you will see those.
| | 10:09 | For right now just click Close, I made a
multiline, to test it out this is going
| | 10:14 | to be something here you are going to notice here.
| | 10:15 | We are going to see that the text is going
to be huge, you can click the Preview button,
| | 10:18 | you are going to see the field out there.
| | 10:20 | If you click inside by Default, what is going to
happen here is most fields have a certain size of text,
| | 10:25 | so if you start typing in, "no" or something
like that we can change the font size,
| | 10:31 | you can change also the things about the field.
| | 10:33 | So once the PDF has the Form fields recognized, we can go
right into editing layout, you can go right into working
| | 10:39 | with the fields themselves by changing the names, changing
properties, editing, adding, which we haven't looked
| | 10:45 | at yet, but we will in videos coming up.
| | 10:47 | So I wanted to give you just a nice heads
up on how this works once you create it,
| | 10:51 | once you it recognizes it what you can do to help
yourself to make it a better experience for your end user.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating form fields from scratch| 00:01 | There may be times where you have a PDF file or some kind
of a file and you want to create the form fields yourself.
| | 00:08 | This is because either the Auto Detect or the
Recognize did not work, didn't do such a hot job.
| | 00:13 | We want to be able to add them ourselves.
| | 00:15 | We can add form fields pretty easily.
| | 00:16 | So we will take a look at how to
add form fields from scratch.
| | 00:19 | Give you an idea of how to set up things like your
grids, your guides, how to align these form fields up
| | 00:25 | and some of the best practices
when working with form fields.
| | 00:28 | To learn how to do each individual type of
field, you are going to go to that video on it.
| | 00:33 | So, I have got formstart.pdf opened like I said.
| | 00:36 | Make sure you can see your navigation
panel on left-hand side over here.
| | 00:40 | Come up under the Forms button up here and
you will see we have got Add or Edit Fields.
| | 00:44 | So, this was created in InDesign.
| | 00:46 | It could have been any program, Word, etc. I just figured I
would jazz it up a little more, make it look a little better.
| | 00:51 | Convert it to PDF, open in Acrobat and
we are going to add some fields now.
| | 00:56 | If you want to do, just click Add or Edit Fields.
| | 00:59 | It's going to ask you if you wanted
to Auto Detect form fields for you.
| | 01:03 | If you want to try, click yes.
| | 01:05 | It may not do a good job.
| | 01:07 | You may have to delete and do more
work than you would have otherwise.
| | 01:10 | But in this case, I know it's not going to do a great job.
| | 01:12 | So we are going to click No.
| | 01:15 | So what it does it takes us into Form Editing mode.
| | 01:18 | If you look up top, you will see
all the toolbars are gone except
| | 01:21 | for a single toolbar here with some tools on it for forms.
| | 01:24 | Left-hand side, we will see the Fields navigation panel
is the only one out there because it really wants you
| | 01:29 | to singularly focus on what you are doing here.
| | 01:32 | You should see the rulers pop out here.
| | 01:34 | If you don't, I will show you how to turn those on.
| | 01:36 | You will also see the buttons up top here, distribute form,
| | 01:39 | which is when you are done how to give it to
other people and close Form Editing.
| | 01:42 | When you are done editing, you
can simply close Form Editing.
| | 01:45 | So, just to try this, why don't you click
Close Form Editing, it will take you out,
| | 01:49 | show you exactly what we saw a minute ago.
| | 01:52 | To edit again, click on the Forms button, Add or
Edit Fields, it will try and Auto Detect again,
| | 01:56 | just say No and we will come right back
in, so nice easy way to get in here.
| | 02:01 | Now, once you are in here, we need
to start setting a few things up.
| | 02:04 | I would like to zoom in a bit.
| | 02:05 | You will notice up here that we
have a plus and minus to zoom in.
| | 02:08 | You can also type in a value.
| | 02:10 | To choose the plus there, click a little bit in and I
will use the scroll wheel of my mouse to scroll down.
| | 02:15 | You can also use a scroll bar in the right.
| | 02:17 | And we will start adding some fields.
| | 02:18 | Now, the rulers are going to help us out.
| | 02:20 | You will notice this up here.
| | 02:21 | The rulers are turned on like coming up
to the View menu and you will see rulers.
| | 02:26 | So, if you don't see them, you can turn them on right now.
| | 02:28 | You can tell they are on because you can
see them and there's a checkmark over here.
| | 02:32 | Now, when I work with forms, a lot of times,
I'd like to be able to line fields up,
| | 02:36 | make it easy on myself so they look
nice and pretty, they are all lined up.
| | 02:40 | We can use what's called a grid
in here or you can use guides.
| | 02:44 | I will show you the grid, I am
not a big fan but you can use it,
| | 02:47 | and I will show you guides, guides
are more of what I tend to do.
| | 02:50 | If you come out to the page anywhere, if
you either right-click or Control-click,
| | 02:54 | you will see a bunch of things in the Context menu here.
| | 02:58 | This is something new in Acrobat 9.
| | 03:00 | You can now just pick a field and go
to town, start putting it on the page.
| | 03:04 | We will look at those in videos coming up.
| | 03:06 | You will see show tab numbers, grid, all sorts of things.
| | 03:10 | Click Grid, that will turn the grid on for you.
| | 03:13 | What this does, it's like ruler line
paper out there so you can line things up.
| | 03:18 | The thing about the grid that, that I kind of don't like, is
that suppose I want to line my form fields up right here.
| | 03:24 | There's no line so I'd have to do it to the left or to the
right to be able to snap or line my fields up to the grid.
| | 03:30 | Now, just because the grid is out here also does not
mean that objects are going to what's called snap to it.
| | 03:35 | It's just a visual reference.
| | 03:36 | If you want, when you place fields out here for objects to
snap they're called, which means hit one of these lines
| | 03:42 | and pull into it, you have got to turn that on.
| | 03:45 | Come under the View menu, you will see Snap to
Grid, you turn that on when you place a field.
| | 03:50 | Anytime you get the field near one of these lines,
it will suck it to it and stick it on the line.
| | 03:55 | Now, if you use the Grid, you want to use the
Grid, you may want to change its appearance.
| | 04:00 | To do that, we can use some preferences.
| | 04:03 | Come under the Edit menu on Windows, you can come
under Acrobat on Mac, and you will see Preferences.
| | 04:09 | Take a look in there at the very bottom of the categories
in the left hand side, you will see Units and Guides.
| | 04:14 | If you want to for the Layout Grid, you can change the width
between the lines, which is you know one inch is pretty big.
| | 04:20 | You can change the offset, offset means how far is it
from the left edge of the page or the top edge of the page
| | 04:26 | and that can be good if you have got a form that's maybe
in the lower right corner, it's a small form on a big page.
| | 04:31 | If you want to change the subdivisions, this is what I
tend to do, you can increase them so you have more lines
| | 04:37 | between each one, so I usually do like 10, it's a lot and it
gets kind of crazy, but you can also change your grid color.
| | 04:44 | So I tend to change the width between the lines and the
subdivisions, just to see what it looks like click OK.
| | 04:50 | And you get a lot more flexibility here, so when you put
a field out there, it's going to let you literally snap
| | 04:56 | to any one of these lines, it will just pull it to it.
| | 04:58 | And like I said, I don't tend to use
the grid, so what we are going to do is,
| | 05:01 | we are going to turn this thing
off if you want to use it, use it.
| | 05:03 | So either right-click or Ctrl click on the page, you will
see grids have got a checkmark, we are going to turn it off.
| | 05:10 | Now the thing about the grid is just because it's
off, doesn't mean you are going to snap things to it.
| | 05:14 | You need to tell it not to snap to the grid.
| | 05:17 | So come under View, you will see Snap To Grid, turn that
off as well, you will see the shortcuts at the right.
| | 05:22 | The way I typically work with fields is I work with Guides,
| | 05:25 | like I said you do what you want to
do, but that's what I tend to do.
| | 05:27 | If you come under View, you will see
Guides, we have to turn them on first
| | 05:31 | so that we can actually see them, so turn on the guides.
| | 05:33 | You have to have your Rulers showing,
you will see the Rulers out here already.
| | 05:36 | If you want to put a guide on the page, come to the vertical
or horizontal ruler, you will see two rulers and if I want
| | 05:43 | to put a vertical guide, I am going to go to the vertical
ruler, I will click, pull down, pull away from the ruler,
| | 05:48 | drag it out here and I want my form fields to
line up right here, let's say, in their left edge,
| | 05:53 | so let go, it should put the guide out there.
| | 05:56 | And with guides what you can do is you can delete
them, you can move them all sorts of things,
| | 05:59 | they are just there to help you line up form fields.
| | 06:03 | These won't print, so you won't actually see these when
you save the PDF file and send it out to somebody else.
| | 06:08 | I usually will get rid of them anyway because
they are not turned on by default, which is good.
| | 06:12 | If you want to move the guide, once you place it out
here, you can click on it, you will see your arrow change
| | 06:17 | and drag it left or right, you
can reposition it if you want to.
| | 06:20 | If you want to delete it, there's
a couple ways you can do this.
| | 06:24 | If you click on the guide, it will turn a different
color, press delete that will get rid of it.
| | 06:30 | Another way to do this, click on the Vertical Ruler, hold
down, pull away from the Vertical Rulers set another guide,
| | 06:35 | so click on the vertical ruler, hold
down, drag out, put it just at the right
| | 06:40 | at the address line 1, address line 2 and release.
| | 06:43 | So you got yourself a guide out there now.
| | 06:45 | Now if you want to place field out here what
I typically do is click to deselect somewhere,
| | 06:49 | that way the guide is no longer selected.
| | 06:51 | As we start to place fields looking on the left
here you will see the Fields Navigation Panel,
| | 06:56 | they will start to show up over here.
| | 06:57 | So our job is to decide what kind of field
to place and then get them on the page.
| | 07:02 | Right now we have got a place that's called text field.
| | 07:05 | To place the field out here, there's
a couple ways to get to the tools.
| | 07:08 | One of the ways comes right up
here where it says Add New Field.
| | 07:11 | Click on the button and you will see all
the different types of fields we can create.
| | 07:15 | I will just quickly run through these just
so I give you an idea what these are all for.
| | 07:19 | Text field is for your name, things like
that, you want to type something in the text.
| | 07:24 | Text fields can also be for numbers,
you can make them a number or a price.
| | 07:29 | Checkbox is for a whole array of things you
want to choose like MasterCard, Visa, AmEx.
| | 07:34 | Radio buttons are typically Yes/No questions, you
can only click on one of them, it only selects one.
| | 07:39 | List box is usually a big box full of options,
things like, let's say you want to ask somebody,
| | 07:45 | what their operating system is and if they have multiple,
you can say Mac Windows, UNIX etc. They will see them all
| | 07:51 | in this big box and they can click on more than one,
that's the idea, so you can select more than one.
| | 07:56 | Combo box a lot of people think of as a pop-up menu
| | 07:59 | or a drop down menu whatever you
want to call it, that's pretty great.
| | 08:02 | You can usually only choose one option in that menu.
| | 08:05 | A button, it's going to be a Submit button of you know
Print button, Reset button and such type of things.
| | 08:10 | Digital things here if you want to sign this document,
make sure that it is in fact you and it hasn't changed
| | 08:16 | as well Barcodes, barcodes allow you to barcode
the page using the USPS Barcodes all sorts
| | 08:21 | of things for mailing or retrieving data.
| | 08:26 | Now when you work with these, your job here is to
click on one, so click on text field for instance,
| | 08:30 | come out to the page now if you have worked in previous
version, it's going to be a little different.
| | 08:35 | You do not have to click and drag, if you notice,
look at your cursor, you will see this nice big field
| | 08:39 | and it's got these little cross hairs running
vertically and horizontally as blue lines.
| | 08:43 | Bring your cursor close to your Guide
and it should kind of snap in your guide.
| | 08:47 | We want to place that field
right there, so simply click.
| | 08:51 | What that does, it placed the field out there,
you don't have to draw it, we can change it though
| | 08:56 | and it immediately comes into what's called Field
Name, so we are going to change the Field Name.
| | 09:00 | Like I said before, I usually do lower case, try to do very
little spacing, you can use numbers and things like that,
| | 09:07 | but you know try and keep it as simple as possible.
| | 09:09 | We have the ability to also make this a required field
choose Required Field, that means that if somebody fills
| | 09:15 | up this form and they hit Submit, it's going to come up with
a dialog box that says "you need to fill this field out."
| | 09:20 | And Show All Properties will take
us to the properties for these.
| | 09:23 | I am not going to go into this one right now, simply because
if you want to see the individual fields and how they work,
| | 09:29 | go to that video, you will see that later.
| | 09:31 | But we got the field out here now.
| | 09:33 | Couple of other things we can do.
| | 09:34 | Once the field is out there, if you
come out, you can actually resize this,
| | 09:38 | so I think it's a little too wide if you look at it.
| | 09:40 | Come to a corner, click and drag or the side it
doesn't matter and you can size it the way you want to.
| | 09:45 | You can move it, click in the middle here you
can move it up and down, if you want to do that.
| | 09:49 | We can also delete it, we can do
anything we need to do to it.
| | 09:52 | Once you have added this field, we want to add
just a few more, so come back up to Add New Field,
| | 09:58 | once again we can choose a type of field we want.
| | 10:00 | Now if you don't like coming up to this button up here,
sometimes this gets a little monotonous and it's also a couple
| | 10:06 | of extra clicks, you will notice
right here Show Tools on toolbar,
| | 10:10 | choose that and what it does, it
puts them all right up here.
| | 10:13 | Once you learn what all these are, you can simply click
on it, so click on the text field which is the first one,
| | 10:19 | notice that it deselects that field
that you have on the page right now,
| | 10:22 | because you are about ready to create a new one.
| | 10:24 | Come out to the page, once again you will see the old
familiar cross hairs and the box, come to your guide,
| | 10:30 | get it about where you want it and click.
| | 10:32 | This doesn't have to be perfect.
| | 10:33 | Once again we can name this, I will call this
LastName, I leave no spaces, I will make this required
| | 10:38 | by choosing Required and I will
make it a little bit smaller.
| | 10:41 | So usually that last name is a little bit bigger than
first name, so just let that one will be a little bit bigger.
| | 10:45 | Other ways, we can do this, if you want to create a
different type of field, you can also come out to your page,
| | 10:51 | right-click or Ctrl click roughly where you want the
field and you can choose the type of field tool you want.
| | 10:56 | So if you want to do in our text field, we can choose
Text Field, it will immediately go into that cross hairs
| | 11:01 | and box, and you can place it where you want to.
| | 11:03 | Now there's another way to do this, there's a
little bit faster way, if you notice up top,
| | 11:08 | you will see that you've got all you form fields now, you are
going to notice an option here called Key Tool Selected,
| | 11:14 | choose Key Tool Selected, click on the field we want,
which is the Text Field, click on the Text Field Tool,
| | 11:18 | Comne on out here to your cross hairs,
Now it's going to act a little differently.
| | 11:22 | So suppose we need to put three
more company address, address.
| | 11:26 | Let it snap over to the guide, simply click to
place it, move your cursor away and it's going
| | 11:31 | to let you just keep clicking here to place multiple fields.
| | 11:34 | The thing about this is it's not going to have you name the
fields right away, so you have to remember to name fields,
| | 11:41 | because otherwise if you get this data later on and you
are looking at this email and it says Text 14 Evolve
| | 11:47 | or something like that, you might be like well what is that.
| | 11:49 | So click to set the field, move your cursor
down a little bit, click to set it again.
| | 11:55 | Once you are done, we have got all our
fields and I want to go and start editing.
| | 11:59 | We are going to go over to this Selection Tool the black
arrow, click on the Selection Tool, what we can then do is come
| | 12:04 | out here and move your cursor around as you
click on these fields, we can then resize,
| | 12:09 | so I want to resize that one from the side.
| | 12:11 | If you want to rename it, we can right-click or
Ctrl click, there are several ways to do this.
| | 12:17 | You will see Rename field, it will pop up that
familiar little yellow box and I can call this Company
| | 12:22 | and usually what I do is I will press Enter
or Return that will kind of accept it,
| | 12:25 | you can then move on to the next field
and click on the Field and start working.
| | 12:28 | So I will click somewhere to stop
that and go ahead and start to rename.
| | 12:31 | So when you start working with fields, like I said we
are not going too far into the types of fields and things
| | 12:37 | like that, but this is a nice easy way to
get started by putting them on the page.
| | 12:41 | Now another way, you can place a field, I want to show you
this, come to the address line 2 and suppose that we want
| | 12:46 | to try something a little different here.
| | 12:48 | Click on that field and press Delete or
Backspace, that should get rid of it.
| | 12:52 | Come back up to the Text Field Tool, select
that, bring your cursor back out to your page
| | 12:57 | and so far what we have been doing
is just clicking and letting it go.
| | 13:00 | What you can also do is if you click hold
down and pull away, you can draw the field.
| | 13:05 | This is what you used to have to do.
| | 13:07 | So I want to get it roughly the size I want.
| | 13:10 | Once you see how big it is, you can release your mouse,
it will go out and it will let you draw another one.
| | 13:16 | The reason why it's going to just out to
another one, because we have Key Tool Selected.
| | 13:20 | If you turn Key Tool Selected off, the next time
you draw a text field, it will automatically ask you
| | 13:25 | for the field name and whether or not it's required.
| | 13:28 | These are ways to draw here, now if you don't
want to see the forms tools out here anymore,
| | 13:32 | you can click on this arrow right
here, which will hide them,
| | 13:34 | and coming back to the button there I mean you
click on the button, you can start working.
| | 13:38 | So I wanted to give you an idea of how to set
fields out here, how to work with guides and grids,
| | 13:44 | just a little bit kind of get your rolling.
| | 13:45 | Next thing, we are going to do is we are going to start to
actually work with specific fields in the later videos here,
| | 13:51 | talking about text fields and get to going with how
each one of these works separately from the other ones.
| | 13:56 | Keep this open and we are going to start to add some
text fields over by the item name 1, item name 2 and etc.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating text fields| 00:01 | There are many different types of Form
Fields that you can create in Acrobat.
| | 00:05 | We are going to take a look at
how to create text fields now.
| | 00:08 | If you are just joining us, you can open up Forms
Start Add and you will be exactly where we are.
| | 00:13 | When you open up that form, you want to make sure
that you choose the Forms menu up top and choose Add
| | 00:19 | or Edit Fields to get into the Form Editing mode here.
| | 00:23 | It may ask you to autodetect fields, if it does,
say no and you will be right where we are.
| | 00:29 | OK we are going to start to add some text fields.
| | 00:31 | We did it just a little bit in the previous
video but now we are going to take a look
| | 00:33 | at all the properties and things you can do with text field.
| | 00:36 | So what I am going to do is zoom out a
little bit by clicking the (-) sign here.
| | 00:40 | You will see the item name 1, item name 2,
what I would first like to do is I would
| | 00:44 | like to place a guide out here so we can line up our fields.
| | 00:47 | So making sure that rulers are showing
here under View, you will see View Rulers
| | 00:52 | there's a checkmark there and you will see them on the page.
| | 00:54 | We are going to make a vertical guide so click hold
down from the Vertical Ruler, click and drag out,
| | 00:59 | pull it to item name 1, item name 2
etc just to the right there and release.
| | 01:04 | Now we have got our guides showing right now, what we
are going to do is we are going to place a text field.
| | 01:08 | So I will zoom in a little bit so I can see this
area right up here a little bit more clearly,
| | 01:13 | click on the (+) sign here and I will use the scrollbar
to move over a little bit and also use the spacebar.
| | 01:18 | Text fields allow you to do things like type in the
description, type in a name; it also allows you to type
| | 01:24 | in a value a total, a quantity, a price that sort of thing.
| | 01:28 | To add our fields, come up to Add New
Field, you will see the text field.
| | 01:31 | If you want to get a little different feel for how
to add fields, I would go back to the previous video,
| | 01:36 | which talks about creating four fields from scratch.
| | 01:39 | Choose text field, come out to the
page, click, it will place it out there
| | 01:44 | and we are just going to give this a name.
| | 01:45 | So we call this item 1.
| | 01:47 | Lot of times I will press Enter Return.
| | 01:49 | I am not going to make this required, you can make
all fields required but you have really got to think
| | 01:53 | about that simply because if they don't type in a
product, there could be other parts of the form you want
| | 01:58 | to gather information from rather than just get products.
| | 02:02 | Now you will notice right here it says Show All Properties,
click Show All Properties, this is not the only way to get
| | 02:07 | to the properties but one way you can do it.
| | 02:10 | Click on the General Tab, make sure that is selected.
| | 02:13 | I will move this out of the way
Text Field Properties dialogue box.
| | 02:17 | All fields have properties.
| | 02:19 | I have already mentioned this in previous
videos but each field has its own properties.
| | 02:23 | You are going to see right here the text fields have a
ton of properties and these buttons that we can change.
| | 02:30 | Usually the way it works is I start
from the left, work my way to the right
| | 02:33 | and tell the Form Field what I want to have in it.
| | 02:35 | So if we want to have a text, make sure it's just text.
| | 02:38 | If you want to change the color, you can change the color.
| | 02:40 | So in the General Tab, you will see the name, we can change
the name, which we have already done; you will see ToolTip.
| | 02:46 | ToolTip is pretty effective in a lot of cases.
| | 02:48 | If you hover over the Form Field when
you are filling it out as the end user,
| | 02:53 | a little yellow box little box will appear below
it telling you a little bit about the field.
| | 02:57 | So right here, we can type in.
| | 02:59 | So I want them to actually type in a
price right here because we are going
| | 03:04 | to do little calculation instead
of typing in the actual item.
| | 03:08 | Down here in the common properties, you will see Form
Field Visible but Doesn't Print, Hidden but Printable.
| | 03:13 | When I started doing this stuff, I was like
why would you ever create a hidden field,
| | 03:17 | there are lots of reasons for that.
| | 03:18 | Hidden fields can be to gather data or
when somebody submits the form to tell it
| | 03:23 | where to send the data, there's a lot of reasons for that.
| | 03:26 | Visible is pretty self-explanatory, you can see it.
| | 03:29 | Hidden will not be shown when the end users looks at
this; visible but doesn't print, you can have a Form Field
| | 03:34 | that just gives somebody information maybe like
a tip but when they print it, it won't show.
| | 03:39 | Hidden but Printable, there are times where I have fields
that go across the page that remind people of certain things
| | 03:45 | so when they print, this form field that they
didn't see on screen will print with the file.
| | 03:50 | You can make it read-only.
| | 03:52 | This is a little bit dangerous because then they
can't interact with the field that's only good
| | 03:56 | for things like calculations that sort of stuff.
| | 03:59 | You'll see orientation, you can orientate
it in different ways 90-180 rotate it,
| | 04:02 | you can also make it required like we saw earlier.
| | 04:05 | Now there's a lock button down here so you can't
easily delete it, you can't move it things like that.
| | 04:11 | Click the second tab up here, which is Appearance and
you will see we can change the appearance of the forms.
| | 04:16 | Now almost all these form fields can change the
border, the fill different things about them;
| | 04:21 | each type of field is going to
have its own appearance properties.
| | 04:24 | You are going to see we can have a border color on this.
| | 04:27 | If you choose border color, click on the slash
stroke there, you can pick a color if you want to,
| | 04:33 | I will maybe do like a light grey here
just to show you what it looks like.
| | 04:37 | When you pick a color for the border, the outside of the
box, you can see a line thickness, then thick medium.
| | 04:42 | You can choose a fill color.
| | 04:43 | Fill color if you don't have, if you look out at
this design, there's already white boxes out here.
| | 04:48 | If you don't have white boxes out there and it's going to
be hard to read, you might want to fill it with a color.
| | 04:53 | And then the line style you can make solid, which is going
to go all the way around it, dash to put a nice dash line,
| | 04:59 | bevelled it's going to make it look like it's kind of
three dimensional, inset's going to do the same thing,
| | 05:04 | looks like it's pushed in and underline is a good one;
| | 05:06 | this is great because it only puts
a border on the bottom of the field.
| | 05:10 | So you are going to see a lot of different
types of forms that look like that.
| | 05:13 | So, just to see what it looks like I am going
to do a nice solid, just leave it there.
| | 05:17 | Now, the font size, this is little bit tricky
because when somebody goes to type in a value,
| | 05:22 | let me move the text field properties dialogue out
of the way, when somebody types into this field,
| | 05:27 | the height of the field is going to dictate
how tall the text is or how big the text is.
| | 05:31 | So right now it's going to actually
have the text be about this tall.
| | 05:34 | If you want it to be a little smaller, you are
going to change it from auto to an actual size.
| | 05:40 | I tend to set it to an actual size simply
because it's going to make it a little bit easier
| | 05:45 | and more reliable across all the different Forms Fields.
| | 05:47 | So in font size here, try 12, we will see what that does.
| | 05:51 | You can change a text color if you like by clicking the
Color Box here and you will change the font if you want to.
| | 05:56 | Click on the Font right here and you will
notice that you have got a bunch of choices.
| | 06:00 | I want you to scroll down a little bit, you will see
there's little up and down arrows here and you will notice
| | 06:04 | that there's a line below a bunch of these.
| | 06:09 | All of the fonts above that line are ones
that come with Acrobat for the most part
| | 06:13 | and those are probably the safest fonts you can deal with.
| | 06:17 | Now you may see Arial in here if you are on
a Windows machine, you may see a Helvetica.
| | 06:21 | If you scroll down a bit, you will see once again that line,
you are also going to see I will make this little quicker,
| | 06:28 | I will grab a little scroll we will be doing here.
| | 06:29 | If you go in down, you will see another line
show up and I kind of cruised right past it.
| | 06:35 | The second set of fonts there are ones that are
installed typically with Acrobat ones that you can get
| | 06:41 | and the second line down here, these
are ones that are on your system.
| | 06:44 | I would really be careful about what font to choose
here because you go crazy and pick some whacky font,
| | 06:49 | it's going to try and embed it, they might not
have it and it could add file size things like that
| | 06:54 | so I try and keep it as simple as possible.
| | 06:57 | Choose Options in text fields, I am going to move this up.
| | 07:01 | You can change how the text aligns left, center,
right so that's where it sits in the field itself.
| | 07:06 | You can change a default value.
| | 07:08 | Why don't you type in the default value, go here and type
in, type in price and we will see what that looks like.
| | 07:14 | If you look down here, you see bunch of checkmarks.
| | 07:16 | Now multiline, if you have a really tall textbox,
you want them to type in a bunch of information,
| | 07:22 | you will choose multiline; that makes it
so that they can type in a bunch of lines.
| | 07:26 | Now as soon as you interact with another part
of the properties out here notice what it did,
| | 07:30 | you are going to see the default value that will show
up by default, they have to delete that to type in.
| | 07:35 | Turn off multiline, we don't want to have multiple lines.
| | 07:38 | Scrolling long text is important because
if they type in and they keep typing,
| | 07:41 | it's going to have them scroll
so the scrollbars would show up.
| | 07:45 | Rich Text Formatting, I don't really do this too often, Rich
Text Formatting is somebody in the field could go out there
| | 07:51 | and make it bold, make it change the properties
of it and I don't really go for that a lot
| | 07:55 | of times, I am just trying to get the information.
| | 07:58 | You can limit the number of characters if you want to.
| | 08:01 | There's a password option here.
| | 08:02 | If you tell it not to scroll long text and
not to have a limit and not to check spelling,
| | 08:07 | there are certain things you can
do, you can have a password field.
| | 08:10 | That means that when they type in it's actually
going to show nothing but dots out there.
| | 08:13 | Field is used for file selection, you can have
it to where somebody types in some information,
| | 08:18 | it will select another file , which is
interesting that's a little more advanced.
| | 08:22 | Check Spelling, it's going to be a number so I turn
off Check Spelling and you will see password show up,
| | 08:27 | otherwise it would let them check spelling.
| | 08:29 | And a combination box is great for like a Social Security
Number where what it will do is we tell it to have
| | 08:34 | so many characters, it will put lines between each character
they type in, like I said like a Social Security Number.
| | 08:40 | So this looks pretty good.
| | 08:43 | Now the default value here you are
going to see it's this type in price.
| | 08:45 | What's going to happen here is we are going to
tell this, this is actually going to be a price
| | 08:49 | so this default value is going to be
a problem because this is not a price.
| | 08:53 | So default values can be a little tricky.
| | 08:55 | I want you to delete that if you won't mind.
| | 08:58 | Come to the Actions Tab up top.
| | 09:00 | The Actions can be really important
for certain types of fields.
| | 09:03 | An action is when somebody interacts with this
field, they click on it, they put their cursor on it,
| | 09:09 | you can have it perform something called an action.
| | 09:11 | If you click on Select an Action here, the pop-up menu,
these are all the different things you can have it do.
| | 09:16 | Now for most Form Fields you are not going to do
this so we are going to ignore it for the moment.
| | 09:20 | Click Format and this can be very important.
| | 09:23 | If you just want to type in text, leave this
alone; if you want them to type in a date,
| | 09:28 | you want them to type in a number
and you only want them to type
| | 09:31 | in let's say a number, you need
to select the Format category.
| | 09:34 | That's exactly what's going to happen here.
| | 09:36 | So I am going to select Format category, you will
see all the different things we can change it to.
| | 09:39 | Some of these are very useful like date.
| | 09:42 | If somebody types in let's say June
30th 2008, they type in long hand,
| | 09:48 | you can force it to be something like a slash value.
| | 09:51 | I want this to be a number.
| | 09:53 | So choose number and what that automatically
does is make it so they can't type in letters.
| | 09:57 | If they start typing in letters, it will
beep at them, it will interact with them
| | 10:01 | and say no you can't do that, you need to type in a number.
| | 10:04 | You can tell it how many decimal places
you want that's usually after the period.
| | 10:07 | If you want them to just type in a quantity, I would set
decimal places at 0 so you can only type in whole numbers.
| | 10:15 | You have Separator Styles, do you want a comma, do you
want a period; I will just leave it as is right here.
| | 10:20 | And as they type in something like a price, you can
choose a currency symbol to automatically apply.
| | 10:25 | Now when they type in a negative number let's say they type
| | 10:28 | in something that's (-$300) you can either show a negative
number with parentheses and if you look down here,
| | 10:34 | you will see it's showing you what it might
look like or you can choose Use Red Text.
| | 10:38 | So it's going to give you both options here.
| | 10:41 | I tend to just use red text or nothing
to show people a little feedback there.
| | 10:45 | So those are the format categories we
can choose, I suggest trying those out
| | 10:48 | and we will do those a little bit later
on as well when we calculate things.
| | 10:51 | Click on Validate, validate allows you
to validate the contents of the field.
| | 10:55 | Right now it is not validated.
| | 10:58 | Validates means field value is in a
range, this is pretty simple validation.
| | 11:02 | You can tell it that the value that somebody types in since
it's a number let's say has to be between 0 and a $1000
| | 11:09 | or a 1000 anything it could be; if they type in a
$1001, it's going to tell them in a dialogue box no,
| | 11:15 | can't do that, it's got to be between 0 and 1000.
| | 11:18 | This is to help you limit if you know that prices are
certain price range where you should be just about anything
| | 11:23 | in here you can create your own
script that's called and run that.
| | 11:26 | It's a little bit more advanced, we may get that in
a later video when we do calculations and that sort
| | 11:30 | of thing but we are not going to touch it now.
| | 11:33 | Click Calculate and you can calculate fields.
| | 11:36 | Now right now we are not going to touch this
so we would learn this in a later video.
| | 11:39 | So just click Close.
| | 11:40 | We have gone through all our fields here.
| | 11:42 | Text fields out there, what I would like to do now is
I want to make it little bit smaller so you can come
| | 11:46 | to the right edge, click on the bounding point,
| | 11:48 | just make it a little bit narrower and
we have got ourselves a text field.
| | 11:52 | Now when we work with text fields, we can make
them just straight text fields meaning just text,
| | 11:56 | you can make them numbers all sorts
of different things we can do here.
| | 11:59 | So when you add fields, you have got a lot of choices
especially when you add certain types of fields.
| | 12:04 | And the one thing I do want to point out here
is as you start to add fields to the page,
| | 12:08 | always looking over at the fields panel and seeing
what the name of the field is as well as what type
| | 12:14 | of field it is, so adding text fields is very important.
| | 12:17 | You are going to do this a lot for names,
prices, quantities things like that.
| | 12:21 | So I wanted to give you a heads-up
and show you how that works.
| | 12:23 | Now you should be able to go to your
form and start to add these things.
| | 12:27 | We are going to start to look at
different types of fields next.
| | 12:30 | So keep this open and we will move on to the next type of
field or start talking about working with Radio buttons.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using radio buttons| 00:01 | We will take a look at creating radio buttons.
| | 00:04 | I have got form start.PDF, opened right now and then
working through this, if you are just joining us,
| | 00:09 | you can open up Form Start Radio and
that should get you exactly where we are.
| | 00:13 | And if you open up that file, you want to go to
the Forms Menu and choose Add or Edit fields to get
| | 00:18 | into the Format Edit mode and you
should see exactly what we see here.
| | 00:20 | Now, what I have done is, I have click Show
One Page at a time up in a toolbar up here.
| | 00:24 | Once we are in the editing mode then we will see everything.
| | 00:27 | So, we are going to through and talk about radio buttons.
| | 00:29 | Radio buttons are typically things like Yes/No or
letting people choose one out of a series of buttons.
| | 00:36 | So, it could be more than yes or
no, but we will do a simply Yes/No.
| | 00:39 | So I would like to zoom in a little bit,
using the plus sign up here, you can zoom in.
| | 00:43 | Now, I'll use scroll wheel of my mouse with the scrollbar
in the right hand side here to scroll down, you should go
| | 00:48 | and see "Are you a supplier in California,
Oregon or Washington State, yes or no?
| | 00:52 | So, we are going to make it, so they
can easily answer this question.
| | 00:56 | Come up to the toolbars up here, you will see Add New Field,
you will see all the fields we have got choose radio button,
| | 01:02 | come on out to your page, bring your cursor
out there, you will notice the cross hairs.
| | 01:05 | If you are just joining us, we have
been talking about this little bit.
| | 01:09 | Your job is to simply click, place the form field out
there or you can click and drag to make it a certain size,
| | 01:15 | but I am just going to click right now, get it in position
and click, that will open up the radio group name area.
| | 01:21 | These are few properties we can set.
| | 01:22 | So you can actually set the radio group name, the way
this works is if you set more than one radio button,
| | 01:28 | which is what you are probably going to do, you call the whole
group by a name, this makes it so that when somebody clicks
| | 01:34 | on one of these form fields with the same name, it
can only do one, it can only select one of them.
| | 01:39 | So, we name them the same thing, the group name
and then we change the button value for each one,
| | 01:45 | that's how it differentiates when you get the
information, you can tell, which one they clicked on.
| | 01:49 | So, for radio group name, we are going to
call this Supplier, just keep it simple.
| | 01:54 | I am not going to make this Required, but I want
to make sure that the button value is correct.
| | 01:59 | So, you see right here it says yes,
which is correct, because it's yes.
| | 02:03 | Now, we have the ability to show the properties or
we can go in and add another button to the group,
| | 02:07 | what I would like to do is simply add another
button and then we will go into the Properties,
| | 02:12 | you could work either way, but this is little bit simpler.
| | 02:14 | So, click Add another Button to Group, it will give
you your cross hairs, just come right down to no down here,
| | 02:20 | and it does not to be line up perfectly, we can do that.
| | 02:23 | Click to create the button, it automatically names it
the same as the previous radio button, which is good,
| | 02:29 | you do not want to change that
if you want to only choose one.
| | 02:33 | You then have to change the button value, so let's call
this No and we will keep the uppercase that they have.
| | 02:37 | I usually make everything lowercase, we will
keep the same and we are basically done.
| | 02:41 | So, click Show All Properties, so for this single
radio button, we are going to see its properties now
| | 02:48 | and then we will go to the other
radio button change its properties.
| | 02:51 | Notice the radio button properties dialog box here, we
have on the General tab a typically like I said earlier
| | 02:56 | in previous videos, I work my way from left
to right, these are all the things we could do
| | 03:00 | to that radio button to change its appearance and function.
| | 03:03 | There's your name, you can change that again.
| | 03:05 | We have a tool tip, which pops out as a little pop up
menu that they just simply see they cannot interact with.
| | 03:12 | We can make this hidden, visible, printable.
| | 03:16 | You can make it read-only, which we do not want
to do otherwise we cannot interact with it.
| | 03:19 | You can change its orientation, you can flip it, flop it,
do sorts of things and you can make it Required,
| | 03:25 | I don't want to make this Required, so we are fine.
| | 03:28 | Click the Appearance tab and you will see that we can change
the color of the border, thickness that sort of thing.
| | 03:33 | For the radio buttons, it automatically puts a
border for you, you can change the color if you
| | 03:37 | like by clicking the color box here
and try something little different.
| | 03:41 | You can also fill it with a different color if you like.
| | 03:44 | Line thickness, you can go thin, medium, or thick and
line style you can make it, Solid, which is a solid line,
| | 03:51 | you can make this circle Beveled, which is kind of looks
like three dimensional, inset looks like it's pushed
| | 03:55 | in a little bit and underline is only underneath.
| | 03:58 | I tend to use a solid on this, I don't like the inset
or anything like that, you do what you want to do.
| | 04:03 | Now, if you look down here you can see the Text Properties.
| | 04:07 | Font size, I wouldn't change unless you wanted to
be a little small or little bigger it's up to you.
| | 04:12 | Auto means whatever shows up out there, the little check
the radio is going to be about the size of the circle,
| | 04:19 | you can change the color of that if you like.
| | 04:20 | And if you look at the font here, it's not going to
let you mess with this, simply because this is sort
| | 04:25 | of like Wingdings or Webdings and it comes
with reader and folders in Acrobat,
| | 04:29 | so everybody has got this, so we
are not going to change that.
| | 04:32 | Click Options and this is where the need of the
properties are, you will see the button style,
| | 04:37 | you can change that if you don't want
it, you can be instead of a circle,
| | 04:41 | you can make it a checkmark, if you use checkmark.
| | 04:43 | Checkmark actually makes it a box, click on the
pop up again, you will see you have got a cross,
| | 04:47 | you have got a diamond, square all sorts of
different things, I, depending on how you feel
| | 04:52 | that day, I kind of mix things up a little bit.
| | 04:53 | If you have a lot of different types of radio buttons to
break the monotony, you can change how each set looks, there's the value,
| | 05:01 | once again if you needed to change that you could.
| | 05:03 | Button is checked by default, this can
become very important with certain things,
| | 05:07 | like if you want to send them any junk mail, you could say
"would you like to send junk mail" and you can check it
| | 05:12 | by default, good way to lose friends and customers.
| | 05:15 | Buttons with the same name and value are selected in
unison, this can become very important later on if you have,
| | 05:20 | let's say a multipart form, several pages
and you ask them similar questions depending
| | 05:26 | on you know what they have answered previously or maybe
you have to ask them several times about certain features.
| | 05:31 | If you have another field named supplier and the value
is no, you can have that one select as well as this one,
| | 05:38 | so as soon as they click on this
one the other one will select.
| | 05:40 | So, there are a lot of things we can do here.
| | 05:42 | Click Actions, actions are where you can do things like
somebody clicks on the field and a pop-up menu shows up,
| | 05:48 | a movie plays, all sorts of different things, we
don't need to do that right now, so click close.
| | 05:55 | You have changed the appearance for this one right here,
| | 05:57 | so we are going to do the same
things to the other radio button.
| | 05:59 | So, come up to the other radio button, click on it and
what I am going to do, I am going to zoom in a little bit,
| | 06:03 | so it's a little easier to see,
it's kind of hard to tell right now.
| | 06:05 | So, I click the plus up here and I will
scroll down, you can see the difference here
| | 06:10 | in appearance between the two radio buttons.
| | 06:13 | This kind of drives me crazy, because when you
create one and then you create another one,
| | 06:16 | if you change the properties on each independently, then you
got to kind of replicate what you did for the previous one.
| | 06:23 | What I tend to do is this, we have already named them,
we have already put values on them, so it should work,
| | 06:28 | but I want to change the properties,
so we are going to do both at one time.
| | 06:32 | So, you can Shift Click between the
two of them, so you got the first one,
| | 06:35 | Shift Click on the second one here,
it should select both of them.
| | 06:38 | Another way you could have done that is to
click and drag across the fields to select both.
| | 06:42 | If you right-click or Ctrl Click
on Mac on one of the fields,
| | 06:46 | you will notice at the very top of
the Context menu here Properties.
| | 06:51 | Choose Properties and that will
open up the radio button properties.
| | 06:54 | Now, the interesting thing about this is we can set both
of these at one time, if you click on the General tab,
| | 07:00 | you will notice the name and tool tip are dimmed,
which means you are not going to mess with this,
| | 07:04 | because they are going to have the
same name unless you want them to
| | 07:07 | and right now they actually do, but it's radio buttons.
| | 07:10 | Click Appearance, you will notice the border color has
a question mark, because both of them are different,
| | 07:16 | if we change this right now, as a matter of fact
click on the border color and try something different,
| | 07:20 | I will try like a red or something like that,
they are both changing at the same time,
| | 07:24 | I will make sure my Line Thickness is
thin, you can try anything you want.
| | 07:28 | Line Style I will try Solid.
| | 07:30 | Fill Color white, which is fine.
| | 07:34 | Got the Font Size is set at Auto, Text Color for
both, click on Options, you will see button stop.
| | 07:39 | Do you ever see the word varies or it's greyed out, it
usually means there's a conflicting or competing value,
| | 07:44 | so click varies and we can do what want
here, checkbox, radio button, cross,
| | 07:49 | diamond, circle spread all sorts of things.
| | 07:52 | We don't want to change the button value right now,
because this would be bad, simply because each one has
| | 07:56 | to have its own value, you would do those separately
and we are basically done, so click close to test them
| | 08:02 | out or take a look at them, you can either click
somewhere to deselect and then go to Preview,
| | 08:07 | so click on the Preview button up top, you will be
able to see them and take a look and see if they work.
| | 08:12 | So, you can click on Yes, you can click on No and
you should only be able to select one of them,
| | 08:17 | they are what's called Mutually Exclusive,
they have the same name but different values.
| | 08:22 | Alright, go back to Edit Layout, click
Edit Layout that should show both.
| | 08:25 | Now, I am going to show you another way to do this, this is
really pretty helpful, and I will mention this in a later video.
| | 08:30 | If you want to change the properties on these, sometimes,
if I select them out here, I will accidentally move them
| | 08:38 | to do something like this, which I don't really want to
do, if you come over to your fields navigation panel,
| | 08:44 | you can change the properties over here.
| | 08:46 | So, if you click on one like let's say yes, if you right
click or Ctrl click, you will see properties, same thing.
| | 08:52 | If you want to change more than one, you
can shift click between two of these,
| | 08:57 | it will select them on the page automatically,
if you right-click on Windows or the Ctrl click
| | 09:01 | on Mac, you can change the properties as well.
| | 09:03 | So, couple of different ways to do that.
| | 09:06 | There are other ways, but we will
mention that in later video
| | 09:08 | where I will talk about some different ways to edit forms.
| | 09:11 | So, we have got this two set out here, the
only other thing I want to do now is I want
| | 09:14 | to line them up, I would like to select both of those.
| | 09:17 | You can use Shift Click to select both or you can click and
drag and select both by dragging across and selecting them.
| | 09:23 | Now, here's what's going to happen, we
are going to line them up pretty easily.
| | 09:26 | If you notice one of these form fields is
like a blue with boxes around it, little dots.
| | 09:33 | When we do things like align fields to each other or copy
paste that sort of thing, the one that's blue with dots,
| | 09:39 | is going to be the key object, meaning all
the other fields are going to align to that.
| | 09:43 | So, whichever one you want to align to, you
are going to make sure it's selected last.
| | 09:47 | So, suppose just by looking at them, I want
the Yes button to align to the No button.
| | 09:52 | Now, hold on Shift Click and click on No, you will
notice that one is blue with the dots around it,
| | 09:57 | if you right-click on Windows and ctrl click on Mac, you
will see things like align distributor center and set fields
| | 10:05 | to same size, different things we can do.
| | 10:06 | We are just going to simply align these, you will
notice we have aligned left, right top and bottom,
| | 10:12 | vertically, horizontally, horizontally or center, vertically or both.
| | 10:16 | All I want to do is this, I just want to align them to
left of each other and what it does it takes the one
| | 10:20 | that is not the key right here, this light blue
or aqua one and aligned it to the left edge
| | 10:26 | of the one that's finally selected there, so I
will choose align left and it should align yes
| | 10:31 | to no, you will see that, so there we go.
| | 10:33 | They are both about the same size, click to deselect,
you've got yourself couple of radio buttons out there.
| | 10:38 | So, if you are going to follow along, just keep this open,
| | 10:40 | we are going to start talking about
working with checkboxes next.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using checkboxes| 00:01 | We'll take a look at how to create checkboxes.
| | 00:03 | I have got form_start.pdf open and if you are just
joining us, you can open up form_start_checkbox.pdf
| | 00:09 | and if you open that file, make sure you choose Forms, Add or Edit
Fields in the menu. That way you can get into the Form Editing mode.
| | 00:16 | So, I have got the Fields navigation panel on the left, got all
the fields we have created so far if you are following along.
| | 00:22 | Now, we are going to create some checkboxes and I just want
to create one in this video. It's going to be short but sweet.
| | 00:27 | In the next video I'm going to show you how to make multiple
versions or multiple copies of any field, not just checkboxes.
| | 00:33 | You are going to see out here
that I have got Payment Method.
| | 00:36 | Make sure Show one page at a time is selected here. You should
able to see them. I want you to just notice where they are
| | 00:41 | and then we will zoom in to them, you can
use the plus sign up here to zoom in a bit.
| | 00:44 | I'll scroll down.
| | 00:46 | Take a look to the right there.
I can see MasterCard, Visa, Amex.
| | 00:48 | We've got a lot of different checkboxes I want to
put out there so I'll scroll to the right as well.
| | 00:52 | Now, there are times where you need to put a field
of checkboxes out here, meaning an array of them.
| | 00:57 | In previous versions of Acrobat,
| | 00:59 | a long time ago, if you wanted
to you had to copy/paste or
| | 01:03 | create fields over and over again to get a bunch of
different types of fields like a series of checkbox fields.
| | 01:08 | Acrobat allows us to create a checkbox and then copy/paste
fields. So first of all we need to get a checkbox out there.
| | 01:15 | Come to Add a new field or right-click on the page,
Ctrl-click, and you will see Checkbox. Choose Checkbox.
| | 01:20 | Come on out. Just like any type of field,
we will see these nice little crosshairs.
| | 01:24 | I'm just going to click and let it go. We could click and drag to create
a certain sized field but I'll just click. It should place it out there
| | 01:32 | and we'll name the checkbox,
we will call this MasterCard.
| | 01:35 | Once again naming fields, keep it simple;
| | 01:37 | if you want to do MC for MasterCard.
| | 01:40 | If you are trying to eventually take this data and send it
off to a database or you are handing it off to someone else
| | 01:45 | and they're going to deal with the data,
| | 01:47 | you might want to ask them what they want the field names to be
because it can make that easier when you try and put data in the
| | 01:52 | database or other places.
| | 01:54 | I am not going to make it required
| | 01:56 | and we're going to show all properties. Click Show All Properties.
That should open up the Properties dialog box for checkboxes.
| | 02:02 | I'll move it out of the way a little
bit so you can see the checkbox.
| | 02:05 | Once again, when I create fields, I start from the left.
Everything you can change about a field is listed up here as a tab.
| | 02:11 | Change the name if you'd like, we already did that.
| | 02:13 | You can put a tool tip. When you hover over it,
little box shows up which gives a little information.
| | 02:18 | We can make them visible or hidden.
| | 02:20 | You can also make them so that
they are visible but will not print,
| | 02:24 | or hidden but print.
| | 02:25 | That can be a good thing in certain cases.
I don't use it too often for checkboxes.
| | 02:30 | You can make it read-only, they cannot interact with it.
| | 02:32 | You can also make it required if you would like,
| | 02:35 | or you can orient it in different ways.
90 degrees- you can rotate it basically.
| | 02:39 | Click Appearance
| | 02:40 | and we can change the colors of this if we like. Border color, you
want to change the color, click on the box there. You'll be able
| | 02:45 | to change it to whatever you'd like.
| | 02:46 | I tend to keep it consistent.
| | 02:48 | You can change the style if you like. Some people
like to do an underline so it only shows an underline.
| | 02:53 | You can make it look really fancy
with a beveled or inset if you like.
| | 02:57 | You can change the fill color.
| | 02:59 | The font size is set to Auto right now. That means whatever they
click, you're going to see usually a checkmark or something like that.
| | 03:05 | It usually will fill the box itself, so that's Auto.
| | 03:09 | If you want to make the checkbox that
shows up or the checkmark that shows up
| | 03:12 | a little smaller you can change the font size.
| | 03:15 | Text color, you can change the color
of the text that appears in the box
| | 03:18 | and the font itself is determined automatically
for you, you don't need to change this.
| | 03:22 | This is sort like Wingdings or Webdings that
comes with Reader or full version of Acrobat.
| | 03:28 | Click Options
| | 03:29 | and you can see right here, we can change the
style up a little bit. It's similar to radio buttons.
| | 03:33 | You can do a circle or you can do a diamond, all sorts of different
things. The circle's going to make it look like a circle.
| | 03:38 | And the Export Value, now this is interesting.
Export Value is going to say
| | 03:42 | when somebody submits this data,
| | 03:44 | it's going to send the name
of the field as well as the value.
| | 03:48 | The reason why they do this is because if you have a lot
of these that are named the same thing, it will only let you
| | 03:53 | choose one of them; you can only check one of them.
| | 03:56 | The Export Value can be anything you want it to be.
| | 03:58 | It will send MasterCard as the name and it will say yes
| | 04:01 | and it will tell them which ones have been selected.
| | 04:04 | So, if somebody clicked on this, it will
show you when you get the information back,
| | 04:09 | it will say MasterCard and Yes.
| | 04:10 | You can change this to whatever you would like.
| | 04:12 | You can check it by default if you like
by choosing this and I tend not to do that.
| | 04:16 | And of course there are actions. Actions, we're going to look at
later on. Actions are incredible. They allow you to do things like
| | 04:22 | click on a field, you can play a movie. If you click on a field
you can have a tool tip pop up, there is a lot of things we can do.
| | 04:27 | And just to see the actions, you can click on the popup here.
| | 04:30 | Just to give you an idea of what you could do.
| | 04:32 | We don't need to do this, it's pretty
simple checkbox. So I'll click Close.
| | 04:37 | And to test it out,
| | 04:38 | click on Preview up top.
| | 04:40 | It will kind of take you out of editing mode.
You'll see that I've got a nice gray border on it.
| | 04:43 | If you want to, you can click on it to see
what happens here and I put a little square there
| | 04:47 | and if somebody clicks on it again, it will take it off.
| | 04:50 | So that's a checkbox. We can make a
bunch of these out here by copy/paste.
| | 04:55 | In the next video, I'm going to show you how
to take these checkboxes and make a series of them
| | 04:59 | either by copy/paste or using another method.
| | 05:02 | So, creating checkboxes can be really important
when you are trying to convey information,
| | 05:06 | get things across and select multiple areas or multiple
checkboxes instead of things like radio buttons.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating multiple fields| 00:02 | When you work with form fields a lot of
times you have got a lot to put on the page,
| | 00:06 | you don't want to have to reinvent the
wheel every time you place a form field.
| | 00:10 | So we can take the form fields and copy them in many
different ways and that's what we are about to do.
| | 00:16 | I have got formstart.pdf if you are following along, you
should be roughly where I am; if you are just joining us,
| | 00:20 | you can open FormStartMultiple.pdf and make sure that
you go to the Forms menu and choose Add or Edit Fields
| | 00:28 | that will take you into the editing mode.
| | 00:31 | For those of you that are following
along, I am going to click back
| | 00:33 | on Edit Layout, make sure you are in the layout here.
| | 00:36 | And what I would like to do is make sure you are zoomed
in now here so use the plus to zoom in and I will scroll
| | 00:41 | over little bit where we could see the fields
and I will scroll up using my scrollbar.
| | 00:46 | Now we have got a single checkbox.
| | 00:48 | By taking fields and copying them or duplicating
them, there's a lot of ways you can do this,
| | 00:53 | you don't have to do this to just checkboxes, you
can take almost any field and do this to it.
| | 00:58 | So if you have a single table you are trying
to setup with a bunch of text fields on it,
| | 01:02 | you could create one and then copy the rest.
| | 01:05 | There are a few little caveats to doing this and
we will go through them as we talk about this.
| | 01:10 | Click on the MasterCard field here, you should see it
out there and what we are going to do is we are going
| | 01:13 | to copy another one and put it over here next to Visa.
| | 01:17 | So if you know shortcuts for copy, paste you can use
those for fields as long as the field is selected,
| | 01:22 | you can right-click or Ctrl-click on Mac, you will
see copy and we will eventually have a paste out here.
| | 01:28 | Choose Copy.
| | 01:29 | You right-click somewhere else you can see paste, go and
paste and you get yourself a field that always puts it
| | 01:35 | in the center of your document window no
matter how zoomed in or zoomed out you are.
| | 01:40 | We could then click drag it, put it wherever we
want to and we have got ourselves a second field.
| | 01:45 | Now I would like to show you another way to do this.
| | 01:48 | Click on the field and delete that,
just press Delete or hit backspace.
| | 01:54 | Click on the MasterCard field again.
| | 01:56 | If you want to copy fields, we can use a shortcut
to do this and this will help out quite a bit.
| | 02:02 | What I tend to do is I tend to use the Ctrl
key on windows or the Option key on Mac.
| | 02:08 | After you select the field, hold the Ctrl
key down, Option on Mac, click and drag,
| | 02:13 | you will notice there's little page icon showing up
to the right there that's actually little plus sign,
| | 02:17 | which is telling us that we are going to copy this thing.
| | 02:19 | So what we will do is we will come across to the
right here, let go of your mouse, let go of the key
| | 02:26 | and you have got yourself a copy; that
is going to drag off a copy for you.
| | 02:31 | So if you have a copy out here, the only thing you have
to remember is each field needs to have its own name,
| | 02:35 | each one of these because I want
people to be able to select these.
| | 02:38 | If you copy paste or if you do a drag copy like we just did,
| | 02:42 | notice over here in the fields navigation
panel what it did to naming those.
| | 02:46 | The original one was called MasterCard but because
we made a copy, it's trying to say MasterCard ?0,
| | 02:52 | MasterCard ?1 it's going to start adding this
little feature at the end here this little number.
| | 02:56 | We are going to rename these.
| | 02:58 | So come to MasterCard ?0.
| | 03:00 | What you can do is you can double
click on it slowly, double click on it.
| | 03:03 | If it won't work for you that way, you can right-click
or Ctrl-click and choose rename if you get in there
| | 03:09 | and I will do it right here, you can see it right there.
| | 03:10 | What we will do is we will just call this MC for
MasterCard and we will rename the second field here.
| | 03:16 | So select that field, you can either double click slowly
or right-click and go to rename, we will call that Visa
| | 03:22 | and I usually press Return or Enter to accept
it and there we have got two fields now.
| | 03:25 | Now that's not the only way to do this.
| | 03:28 | You can copy paste, you can drag but the
third way is using an Acrobat Wizard.
| | 03:32 | So click on the Visa field here.
| | 03:34 | Now if we do this, what's going to happen is
it's going to name them Visa, Visa1, Visa2 etc,
| | 03:39 | it's going to place as many copies out here as we need.
| | 03:43 | So if you right-click on this field or Ctrl Click on Mac
you'll notice the command called Place Multiple Fields.
| | 03:50 | Choose place multiple fields it will open up
this Create Multiple Copies of Fields dialog box,
| | 03:55 | we move this out of the way, you can
see exactly what it's doing right now.
| | 03:58 | It's going to create a series of checkboxes for us but
we can control how many are out there, how many rows,
| | 04:04 | how many columns and how far apart they are.
| | 04:07 | This is excellent for a field of
checkboxes or a table of text fields.
| | 04:12 | So if you look right here it says number
fields, how many do you want to have down.
| | 04:16 | I don't want any down, I want one, just go one across here.
| | 04:19 | You are going to see copy selected fields across, right now
it's going to have two; it is not going to make another copy
| | 04:25 | of Visa and have two sitting there,
it's just going to have 2 total.
| | 04:28 | We need to have 3 so I will increase that
value it will add 3 and we need to move them.
| | 04:33 | So you are going to see what's called overall size of all
fields, this kind of threw me when I first got in here
| | 04:38 | and first started doing this because I
was like size, what is that each field.
| | 04:42 | It's the total width from the left edge of the
first field to the right edges of right field.
| | 04:46 | So if we want to change the distance between
them, we can increase the width of all of these.
| | 04:51 | Now if you want to make it faster, jump faster, hold down
your Shift key and click on the Up Arrow or click on the
| | 04:56 | down arrow and it will go little bit
faster by inches so start clicking.
| | 05:00 | We will get them roughly where we
want them so I will get them out there
| | 05:04 | and I will move it over just a little for Discover.
| | 05:06 | If you find it's going too far, you don't
want it to go that far between clicks,
| | 05:10 | you can type in a number here if you like.
| | 05:12 | If you want to, you can position
the fields up, down, left or right.
| | 05:16 | So click up once and you will notice all the
fields just generally shift up a little bit.
| | 05:21 | So if they are not quite in this right area, and what I
do is I usually use this down here to positioning.
| | 05:25 | If you have a table drawn with rows and columns
with lines between and these are not sitting exactly
| | 05:31 | where they need to be, you can position them up or down.
| | 05:34 | So I will move them up just a little
bit, it makes it look pretty good.
| | 05:36 | I know it looks like it's kind of doubling that
one up but that's OK, it's going to have one.
| | 05:41 | Click OK and you should have all the fields out here.
| | 05:43 | You will notice what it did to the names of them now.
| | 05:46 | Coming over here to the fields navigation panel, you
will see just like copy/paste it did Visa0, Visa1, Visa2.
| | 05:51 | This is OK if you wanted to be that way
but we want it to say Visa, MX, Discover.
| | 05:58 | Now just a tip here if you do this a lot and you have let's
say a table and you want to put checkboxes or text fields
| | 06:04 | or whatever out there, I usually name the first field that
I want to copy according to a generic value for the row.
| | 06:11 | So we might call this first field credit
card or CC or something like that;
| | 06:15 | as you copy across it will call the next one CC1,
CC2, CC3 or Credit Card1, Credit Card2, Credit Card3.
| | 06:23 | So naming it generically can help you save time
so you don't have to go backing to name them.
| | 06:27 | You just have to know that that's
what you want the fields to be.
| | 06:30 | So we are going to change the names of all these.
| | 06:32 | So if you come over to the navigation panel, you
can click twice slowly or right-click or Ctrl click.
| | 06:38 | You notice right here it's going to say a field
already uses this name of different type, click OK,
| | 06:43 | it will tell us we can't do that right
now so what I want to do is we are going
| | 06:46 | to just change the value here of Visa1, we will try there.
| | 06:49 | Click visa1 slowly, we will call that MX.
| | 06:52 | We go to Discover, click on that one and we will
go back to Visa here, go ahead and name that and there we go.
| | 07:01 | So there was just a couple out there and it was getting a little
confused but now we have all the right names for ourselves.
| | 07:06 | Now once you have all these fields out here,
like I said checkbox radio, it does not matter,
| | 07:10 | we can do things like align them or distribute
them, there's a lot of things we can do here.
| | 07:14 | So I want to select all of these.
| | 07:16 | Easiest way to do that I think is just to click somewhere
where there's no fields, drag across any field that you put
| | 07:22 | in this little selection box, will become selected.
| | 07:26 | Now you are going to notice that
one of them is blue with dots.
| | 07:29 | I mentioned this in previous video where if we do anything
like align or distribute or any such thing like that,
| | 07:35 | this is the one they are going to align to this where
it's going to be its key point or starting point.
| | 07:39 | So I want to keep that one selected.
| | 07:41 | If you have let's say this one is blue,
all the rest will align to this one.
| | 07:46 | If you realize that there's another one you want to
align to, hold down your Shift key, click on that field
| | 07:51 | and it makes that one the one that everyone else aligns to.
| | 07:54 | Now that they are all selected, you can come to
any one of them, right-click or Ctrl click on that
| | 08:00 | and you will see align, distribute or center.
| | 08:03 | What I would like to do is I want to align these vertically
or horizontally so I will choose Align Horizontally
| | 08:07 | that should align them, you will see
them all come into range here.
| | 08:10 | Now if you have got one of them out of order here meaning
it's a little different position, why don't you do this,
| | 08:16 | click on MX that field right there, you can move
fields by using your arrow keys if you would like.
| | 08:21 | I want to just bump it to the left a little bit.
| | 08:23 | So use your left arrow key on your keyboard
and you can kind of move it a little bit.
| | 08:27 | So we are going to try and do that for all these
just to get them spaced evenly next to the names.
| | 08:31 | So there's not quite as much gap between these so click
on Visa, I will use my left arrow to move it over.
| | 08:36 | And I think Discover is a little
to close to the word discover so click
| | 08:39 | on the Discover field, I use my right arrow to bump it over.
| | 08:42 | The reason why I am using the arrows on the keyboard is
because if I just try and drag them, I could drag it up
| | 08:47 | or down and get them out of alignment
again so I don't want to do that.
| | 08:50 | Now another thing we can do is you have got these fields
out here text fields, checkboxes it doesn't matter,
| | 08:54 | suppose that I decided they are too big, I am going to come
into MasterCard field here, click on the MasterCard field
| | 08:59 | and we are going to make it just a little bit smaller.
| | 09:02 | If you come to a corner or the edge, click and drag,
you will notice you can make this as big or small as you want.
| | 09:08 | If you hold down the Shift key, it's going to
constrain its proportions and keep it usually a square.
| | 09:13 | So make it a little bit smaller, let
go of your mouse, let go of the key.
| | 09:19 | I want to make them all the same size now.
| | 09:21 | So we are going to select all these fields.
| | 09:23 | You can click, drag across to select them, this
is one way to do it, you got them all selected.
| | 09:28 | I want to make sure that the one I just changed size is
the last one selected here meaning it's blue with the dots,
| | 09:33 | if it's not, you want to shift click on it.
| | 09:35 | right-click on one of the fields or Ctrl click on Mac,
you will see the command called Set Fields to Same Size.
| | 09:42 | You can change the height to be the same, the width
to be the same or both; we are going to change both.
| | 09:48 | Choose both and you will notice what it does.
| | 09:51 | Now it takes it out of alignment
so we need to align them again.
| | 09:53 | So if you right-click back on the field or Ctrl
Click on Mac, you see align distributed center,
| | 09:58 | we are going to see things like align vertically,
horizontally put it back to align horizontally,
| | 10:03 | choose that and that should bring them back in line.
| | 10:05 | So there we go.
| | 10:06 | You have the ability to do copy/paste.
| | 10:09 | If you learn how to do this copy/paste as well
as duplicating, it will save you a lot of time
| | 10:14 | in the long run especially if you have an
array of fields you need to put out here.
| | 10:17 | When I learned this, it really helped
me to move faster throughout my forms.
| | 10:21 | The one thing I want to mention and
remind you of is you need to change names
| | 10:24 | if it's necessary so this should help you out.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating a combo box| 00:01 | We will take a look at now how to create a combo box,
which is sort of like a pop-up or drop down menu.
| | 00:06 | So you should become familiar with these after this video.
| | 00:09 | I got form Start.PDF, if you are still following along.
| | 00:12 | If you are just joining us, you can open up form
StartCombo.PDF and you should see pretty much what I see.
| | 00:17 | If you are just joining us and you open up that
file choose forms Add or Edit fields up in the menu
| | 00:23 | to make sure you are in Format Editing mode.
| | 00:25 | So I have got this out here.
| | 00:27 | Next thing we are going to do is we
are going to add a little pop-up menu.
| | 00:29 | I want to show you, you can add fields
without having text out here automatically.
| | 00:33 | So we are going to add a pop-up menu.
| | 00:36 | Make sure that you are in Show One Page
at a Time, so we can see the whole page.
| | 00:39 | You should see the Fields Navigation Panel in left side.
| | 00:42 | We got a blank area kind of in the middle here
that I would like to do a nice little pop up to ask
| | 00:46 | about shipping methods, if they want to buy products.
| | 00:49 | So zoom in a little bit using the plus up top, scroll
down so we can see it and I use little scroll wheel
| | 00:55 | or scroll mouse over here and we will add ourselves
nice little pop-up, these are called Combo Boxes.
| | 01:00 | Click on Add a New Field, you will
see that we have a combo box right here.
| | 01:04 | We have also have what's called a List Box,
there's a big difference between these two,
| | 01:07 | Combo Box is a pop-up menu where you choose one.
| | 01:11 | List box is sort of like a pop-up menu
but you see the whole menu automatically
| | 01:16 | and you can choose as many as you like out of it.
| | 01:19 | Chose combo box, come out to your page, what I want
to do is, I want to get it a little bit to the left here,
| | 01:25 | I just want to kind eyeball line it up with the text,
that's why it's great to have these little guide show
| | 01:30 | up and simply click to place it out there.
| | 01:32 | It will ask you what you would like to name it.
| | 01:34 | We are just going to call this Shipping.
| | 01:35 | I am not going to make it required.
| | 01:38 | Click Show all Properties, it should open
up the combo box properties dialog box.
| | 01:43 | I always start on the left side, click on
General, you can see the name right there.
| | 01:46 | We have a tool tip , which is a little tip
that shows up, if you hover over the field,
| | 01:50 | this is good for telling people what they need
to type into the field and things like that.
| | 01:55 | What is the form field, visible hidden, visible,
but doesn't print, hidden but printable.
| | 01:59 | The combo box, I usually don't hide these
things because otherwise people can't see them.
| | 02:03 | There are certain types of fields, where you might hide
them if you want to send information like a text field.
| | 02:08 | I am not going to make this read only because
they want to be able to interact with it.
| | 02:13 | I am not going to make this required either.
| | 02:14 | I find required things like names, that sort of thing be
pertinent, but in this kind of case I don't need to do that.
| | 02:20 | Orientation, we could orient it a different way, rotate it.
| | 02:22 | Click on Appearance and you are going to
see that it's very similar to other fields.
| | 02:27 | We have a Border Color we can set and that's what
I typically will set, so click the Border Color,
| | 02:32 | I am going to choose a nice light
grey just to have it out there.
| | 02:35 | It'll be a thin border.
| | 02:37 | You can choose a line style, dash line,
bevel and inset are kind of fancy,
| | 02:42 | they allow you to make it look like 3 dimensional.
| | 02:43 | And there's also just an Underline,
which we will do for certain text fields.
| | 02:48 | You got to Fill Color, we will keep it white and your Font
Size, take a look make sure you have got something set
| | 02:53 | in there like about 12 point something like that.
| | 02:55 | It's going to do it automatically, because
for the pop-up menu it can't do Auto,
| | 02:59 | which will make the letters huge in the menu.
| | 03:01 | Change your text color, if you want
and you can see the font right here.
| | 03:05 | Once again for the font, don't go crazy with
this, if you click on the pop-up menu if you want
| | 03:08 | to little more information about this you can go back to the
video where we talked about creating fields from scratch.
| | 03:14 | So I will click to deselect, click Options
and this is where the metadata sits.
| | 03:19 | You have got to go in create your
items and what's called Export Value.
| | 03:24 | Now when people go to click on this, the item
is the text that appears in the pop-up menu.
| | 03:30 | The Export Value is what you get in the
other side when somebody sends you this data.
| | 03:35 | So what I tend to do is whatever you put in here first is
going to be the first thing that appears in the pop-up,
| | 03:40 | we can change that, but I tend to do this.
| | 03:43 | Tend to type in what the field is all about.
| | 03:47 | So I choose like choose a shipping method.
| | 03:49 | Now this is just going to let them choose
something this is not something I want them select,
| | 03:53 | so the value for this is going to be something
to let me know that they haven't chosen anything.
| | 03:59 | So sometimes I will type in like null
or put a 0 or something like that
| | 04:02 | to let me know that they haven't done anything with it.
| | 04:05 | Click Add to add it to the pop-up and
that's the first thing that will appear,
| | 04:09 | so our job is to start adding items to the pop-up menu.
| | 04:12 | As a matter of fact, if we move this out of the way
I am going to click and drag this out of the way.
| | 04:16 | I should be able to see that whenever I choose a shipping
method, because there's a certain font size, it may not fit,
| | 04:21 | we may have to open up the pop-up, but that's fine.
| | 04:23 | We'll start adding some things here, so I will type
in 'Air' for item and export value will be 'Air.'
| | 04:31 | I usually do lowercase for export value because this is
what you are going to see if you send it to a database.
| | 04:36 | I will add that to the list.
| | 04:38 | Next thing I will do Item is, we will do
Ground and I will type in export values,
| | 04:43 | Ground usually just the lower case version and
I will do Freight, there we go and click Add.
| | 04:51 | Now you will notice down here like I said that
they are all there, this is your pop-up menu.
| | 04:56 | I want you to notice right now what's showing up out here
on the page, yes you can see this shipping field name
| | 05:01 | but below that you will see Freight, whichever one is
chosen in here is the default value that they see initially.
| | 05:09 | So you want to remember to click on the
top one usually choose a shipping method
| | 05:13 | so that's what they see when they first open this.
| | 05:16 | I do this every once in a while, I forget
to do it and they see something different.
| | 05:19 | If you want to delete one of these items,
you can simply select it, press Delete.
| | 05:24 | If you realize that these are not in the right order,
let's say that it should be Air, Freight, and Ground,
| | 05:29 | I could click on Ground for instance and choose down
| | 05:32 | and it will just change the ordering here
and that's how they appear in the menu.
| | 05:35 | Now once again look out there, you will see it says
Ground right now, because that's the one I had selected.
| | 05:40 | Always last thing, check to make sure you
choose what you want to show as default last.
| | 05:45 | Sort Items is going to sort them
alphabetically you might not want to do
| | 05:49 | that unless you are doing like
States or something like that.
| | 05:52 | Allow user to enter custom text, they can
go up, click in the field and actually type.
| | 05:56 | By default even if you choose this, they can still click
out there usually but they can't type in something.
| | 06:03 | Check spelling, I only turn that on if I let them type in,
I enter custom text because otherwise you should be able
| | 06:10 | to tell what you are doing here, so turn off check spelling.
| | 06:12 | Commit selected value immediately, that's if you have things
like JavaScript or some kind of script or something going
| | 06:17 | on where this value is contingent
upon something else or vice versa.
| | 06:21 | We are not going to do it, it's little bit more advanced.
| | 06:24 | We are done with the Options.
| | 06:26 | Actions allow us to do something with
the field beyond just submitting values
| | 06:30 | or submitting data, we don't need to do that.
| | 06:33 | Click on format, you can change the format if you would
like, if this is all numbers and if it's a percentage,
| | 06:38 | a date and a time that sort of thing we can do that.
| | 06:40 | We will look at this in a later video.
| | 06:43 | You can validate the field range, whatever is in
here, we don't need to do that for a pop-up menu
| | 06:48 | and you can calculate, which we also
do not need to do, so we are done.
| | 06:52 | Click Close, you should be able to see it out there.
| | 06:55 | What we are going to do is we are going to make a little
wider now, so you can come to the right side here click
| | 06:59 | and drag open, I will make it pretty wide so
people can see it and then we will test it out.
| | 07:04 | So to test it out, we are going to go to
Preview, choose preview up top in the toolbars,
| | 07:09 | it should kick you out of the editing mode, click on
the pop-up and you will able to see it right there.
| | 07:13 | So if you don't like the font size or the font, you can
change that back in the properties, but once you choose one
| | 07:18 | of these, we are only choosing 1, that's the value
that's going to get sent with the form field.
| | 07:23 | Click back on Edit Layout that will take us back.
| | 07:26 | If you wanted to change the properties of this, click
on the field again, you could move it up and down,
| | 07:31 | you could resize it, you want to get rid
of it just press Delete or Backspace.
| | 07:35 | If you right-click on Windows or Ctrl click on Mac,
you will see that we have Properties at the very top.
| | 07:41 | So if you choose Properties, you can go back
and change the font, the size that sort of thing.
| | 07:45 | So I will click to deselect.
| | 07:46 | So working with combo boxes can be really important.
| | 07:49 | I tend to use this a lot simply because it's a nice easy
way to display a lot of information in a compact form.
| | 07:55 | Keep this open, so we can start to
create some more form fields next.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating a text area| 00:01 | We will take a look at how to create a larger text field,
| | 00:04 | which is sort of like a text area
that you can type multiple lines into.
| | 00:08 | This is great for suggestion fields things like
that that we have got on our form right now.
| | 00:12 | So if you are following along,
you have got formstart.pdf open.
| | 00:15 | If you are just joining us, you can open formstart_text_area
and make sure that you choose Forms Add or Edit Text Fields
| | 00:22 | up in the menus to get into the editing mode.
| | 00:25 | So we are going to go and create a larger text field
that's multiple lines with some different things.
| | 00:29 | You should see any product suggestions out here.
| | 00:32 | I fit my whole page in one page at a time here.
| | 00:34 | I want to zoom in down to any product suggestions.
| | 00:38 | So you can do that using the plus at the top, couple
of ways to do that and I use the scrollbar to go down.
| | 00:42 | Now there are times where you are going to
want to create a larger text field so we going
| | 00:46 | to create a text field down here but just make it bigger.
| | 00:49 | Click add a new field, you will
see text field come on out here.
| | 00:54 | We have been creating form fields lot of different
ways out here but this time instead of just clicking
| | 00:58 | to create the form field, we are going
to click and drag to draw a larger field.
| | 01:03 | So click hold down, pull away and you can
draw how large you want the text field to be.
| | 01:08 | I let go. What it should do is it
should show you the field name.
| | 01:10 | We will just call this Suggestions.
| | 01:13 | I am not going to make this required.
| | 01:14 | Once again we could just choose required field
and we want to show the properties on this
| | 01:18 | so choose Show all Properties, come to the general tab of
text field properties and you will see the name right there
| | 01:24 | and if you want more information on
creating text fields and their properties,
| | 01:28 | go back to the video where we
talked about creating text fields.
| | 01:31 | Right now we are going to focus on just a few things.
| | 01:33 | Click on Appearance, we are just going to
change how it looks just so it looks little better.
| | 01:36 | We want to tell people that there's actually
a box there so I would like a border color.
| | 01:40 | So click the border color, I will use a
light grey I am kind of stuck on that.
| | 01:44 | Line style solid, that's fine; now if you create a larger
text field, you want to make sure you set a font size
| | 01:51 | because otherwise the font is going to be huge.
| | 01:54 | When you type in there, it's going to
be a letter about the size of the box.
| | 01:58 | Just to show you this, I will click
close, you don't have to do this.
| | 02:01 | I will go to preview, come out there and
click and start typing and take a look.
| | 02:06 | This actually can be a good thing
because as people start typing,
| | 02:08 | it's going to make the text smaller
to fit you will notice this.
| | 02:12 | Now if you make this thing multiple
line, we can have it to where it fits.
| | 02:15 | This is a great work around if you want to
print everything in here because what we are
| | 02:19 | about to do is make a specific font size and if you try and
print this thing and somebody typed in some kind of tome
| | 02:24 | or story in there, you won't be able to print the
whole thing, it will be a little rough sometimes.
| | 02:28 | So I will get rid of that text that I typed in there so
you can select that and just press Delete to get rid of it.
| | 02:33 | I will click back on Edit Layout to start
editing again, click on the suggestions field,
| | 02:37 | right-click or Ctrl-click on Mac, we will go to Properties.
| | 02:40 | You can also double-click like I keep mentioning.
| | 02:43 | Now come to Font Size, we are going
to set a specific size here.
| | 02:45 | So I will choose 10, we could try
something different a little later.
| | 02:48 | Once again for the font, I wouldn't go crazy trying to
mess with this simply because you can add file size.
| | 02:53 | I tend to use what's up here above the line because
these are what come with Acrobat and Reader.
| | 03:00 | Click on Options and options are what we
are going to spend most of our time here.
| | 03:04 | You can change the alignment to the field if you want to,
you can also set a default value, which is fine, default,
| | 03:08 | which shows up first but here is the magic right here.
| | 03:11 | We need to make this multiline.
| | 03:13 | You saw what it did just a second ago; as I typed in
there, it fit it but it only let me put one line of text
| | 03:18 | out there and it was vertically centered.
| | 03:21 | Choose Multiline and what it will do is it will
put the text in the upper left corner here.
| | 03:26 | That allows them to have multiple lines,
it's going to wrap the text inside the field,
| | 03:30 | it's also going to allow them to have a scrollbar.
| | 03:32 | So we are going to let it scroll long text, which
is a good thing otherwise you can make people upset
| | 03:37 | without scrollbars.
| | 03:39 | You could assign Rich Text Formatting, which is
Bold, Italic things like that and I will tend to do
| | 03:44 | that because people tend to get all carried away.
| | 03:47 | I almost always limit the number of characters
in a suggestion field not because I am mean
| | 03:52 | but because I have had people just copy paste stuff
from a website and I wind up with you know 14 pages of content
| | 03:59 | so I usually put some kind of limit on this thing of
couple thousand characters or something like that.
| | 04:04 | That's just me, you don't have to.
| | 04:06 | And I usually have a check spelling because as they type in,
| | 04:09 | you want it to be able to tell them
if they have misspelled something.
| | 04:12 | So that's basically what we have got out there,
that's it, we don't need to look at anything else,
| | 04:15 | go ahead and click Close and we will test it out.
| | 04:19 | Click preview up in the toolbar up there,
place your cursor in there, start typing.
| | 04:24 | As you start typing, you will notice
that if you misspelled words,
| | 04:27 | which I didn't realize those would
be misspelled, take a look out there.
| | 04:30 | It's going to be multiline and when you get to a
certain point, let me just do this really quick,
| | 04:35 | I am just going to copy paste all this
text in here, those make it faster.
| | 04:40 | When you get to a certain point,
you will see a little scrollbar.
| | 04:43 | So if you have misspellings in here since we
turned that on, if you find a word that's misspelled,
| | 04:47 | you can right-click on the word or Ctrl click out there, it
either lets you sometimes undo the typing or come out here,
| | 04:54 | let me type in another word, I will
type in "the" just to show you this.
| | 04:57 | Press the space bar for a space and of course "the" is a word
so I will type in something that really was misspelled.
| | 05:04 | If I right-click on it, you can
tell me I can undo that as well.
| | 05:07 | So there's a misspelling out there, sometimes
it will let you when you close the form editing,
| | 05:11 | go out and actually pick something from
a dictionary, you go see words out there.
| | 05:15 | So right now we are kind of stuck here with just previewing
this thing quickly, we have got our form fields set.
| | 05:20 | Once we are done, the last thing I want to mention here
is you want to delete the text that you typed in there
| | 05:25 | as gobbledygook because if you don't do that,
that's going to show up in your form fields.
| | 05:30 | We are going to create a Reset button that will help you
when you go to submit this when you send it out to people
| | 05:35 | as well, it will reset everything so there's
not a lot of text out there to begin with.
| | 05:40 | So creating a larger text field is a great
way to do something like a suggestion box
| | 05:44 | so hopefully you get the idea of how
this works and some key features you need
| | 05:48 | to look at to be able to make it more effective.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating a Reset button| 00:00 | A form without a Reset button is just a way to upset people.
| | 00:03 | You need to put a Reset button on
your form so that people can go out
| | 00:07 | and clear the data they have put
in there if they don't want it.
| | 00:10 | I have got formstart.pdf open if you are
following along you should be roughly where I am,
| | 00:13 | if you want to if you are just joining us you can open
up formstartreset.pdf and if you just opened that file,
| | 00:19 | make sure you choose forms up in
the menu and Add or Edit Fields.
| | 00:22 | For those of you that are following along, click
the Edit Layout button in top in the toolbars
| | 00:27 | that should get you back in the Editing Mode.
| | 00:30 | And scroll down over here to the right, you may
need to zoom in using the Plus and Minus up top.
| | 00:34 | Scroll down to where it says Reset and we are going
to create ourselves a nice little Reset button.
| | 00:39 | This is going to lead us into working with buttons,
| | 00:41 | which later on in a later video we are
going to talk a little bit more about.
| | 00:44 | So if you notice down here, you are going to see that we
have got this submit area, we have got this reset area.
| | 00:49 | This was created in InDesign and
these were actually drawn in InDesign.
| | 00:52 | If you want to put a button on the page, a button is
an interactive feature that allows you to do all sorts
| | 00:58 | of things submit the form, reset the
form, print the form almost anything.
| | 01:03 | Now a button is very interactive, it can
be very plain in style, it can be a box
| | 01:09 | or you can put pictures and text or both.
| | 01:12 | So we have the ability to create a button.
| | 01:13 | Now it's already here reset.
| | 01:15 | So what I would like to do is I just want to put
the interactivity out here to where somebody hovers
| | 01:19 | over Reset they can click and do what it says
reset the form in its simplest form here.
| | 01:25 | Come up to Add New Field, you will see a
button choose button, come out to your page.
| | 01:31 | What I want to do is I want to instead of just clicking to
create a button a certain size, we are going to click Drag,
| | 01:36 | click hold down, drag away, cover the
whole reset area here so that anybody
| | 01:40 | that gets in there can actually click to reset.
| | 01:43 | Release the button and it's going to ask you to name it.
| | 01:45 | So we will just call this Reset, we are not going to
make this required, as a matter of fact if you try
| | 01:50 | and click on it buttons for the most part are
not required but we want to show the properties
| | 01:55 | so we can Edit how it looks and how it acts.
| | 01:57 | So choose Show All Properties and it
should take you to the button properties.
| | 02:02 | The General Tab once again allows you to name these things,
you can have a tool tip popup to tell you what you are
| | 02:07 | about to click on, it's a little
tool tip that shows up in a corner.
| | 02:10 | Form field can be visible or hidden, which I don't usually
hide a reset button unless you want to lose friends.
| | 02:16 | Visible but doesn't print makes it so that it
will not print and sometimes for reset buttons,
| | 02:21 | I like to do this because you only want to show
the form data or what's going on out there.
| | 02:25 | Hidden but Printable, there's no real
reason to do this for a reset button
| | 02:28 | because once again you will just annoy people.
| | 02:30 | Read-only is not a good idea on a Reset
Button, you want them to interact with it.
| | 02:35 | Orientation, we can orient it anyway
we want, you can rotate it or flip it.
| | 02:39 | Come new appearance and I typically will change the
appearance on these things because it always puts a gray fill
| | 02:45 | in there, which if you look it's covering
up that button that I created in InDesign.
| | 02:48 | So we are going to get rid of the Fill.
| | 02:50 | So click on the Fill Color and you will see no color,
| | 02:54 | it will make the button basically
transparent but it will still work.
| | 02:57 | Font size, we are not going to put any text in this thing,
we can and you will see in just a second that we can
| | 03:04 | but the font size does not matter because you will see in
InDesign I typed in Reset and had it as part of the design.
| | 03:08 | So we will leave the text alone.
| | 03:11 | Click Options, now the options are a really
important part of buttons, they can be.
| | 03:16 | If you look at layout up top and click on that
popup menu, you have got what's called label-only,
| | 03:22 | icon only and all sorts of other combinations of that.
| | 03:25 | A Label is text.
| | 03:26 | If you didn't have a Reset Button drawn in or
created in your design when you made the PDF,
| | 03:33 | you could put a label on this and just
kind of make a nice little button.
| | 03:36 | Just to see it happen, make sure label-only is selected.
| | 03:39 | Look down here, you will see the label field,
put your cursor in there and type in Reset.
| | 03:43 | If you click somewhere else, click off of Reset maybe,
go to behavior up here and try something different;
| | 03:50 | as soon as you interact with another
field, take a look out there,
| | 03:53 | you will see the word Reset show up,
it's kind of hard to see but it's there.
| | 03:55 | So if you didn't have this button built-in
your design, you could put some text
| | 04:00 | out there called a label and change the color.
| | 04:02 | Now click on label-only popup, you will see icon; if
you want to get fancy, you can actually put a picture
| | 04:08 | that you create from another application in the button.
| | 04:11 | We will do that in a later video.
| | 04:13 | So for right now, I don't want a label because it already
says Reset so delete what's in that field, click on Actions.
| | 04:21 | I will move this button properties
dialog box out of the way,
| | 04:23 | you will notice the reset text is gone, we don't need it.
| | 04:27 | Now the Actions are something we, if you have been following
along, are something we have just kind of glossed over
| | 04:32 | and haven't done much of; now we need to do
these because a reset has to have an Action
| | 04:36 | for the most part otherwise they can't do anything.
| | 04:39 | The way an Action works is you have got to select a trigger
first and then you select what it's going to do the action.
| | 04:44 | So a trigger is when the end user does
this thing to the field to perform an action.
| | 04:50 | You are going to see mouse up, mouse down, mouse enter,
mouse exit, on-focus, on-blur here is what they mean.
| | 04:56 | Mouse Up means when somebody comes over to that field, they
click and then release their mouse, perform the action.
| | 05:02 | Mouse Down means when they click down
on their mouse, perform the action.
| | 05:07 | Mouse Enter when somebody puts their cursor
and enters the field, perform the action.
| | 05:13 | Mouse Exit when somebody removes
their cursor from the field as soon
| | 05:16 | as it exits the field area it's
going to perform this action.
| | 05:19 | On-focus, if somebody likes to tab between fields,
focus means they have tabbed to that field.
| | 05:25 | On-blur means they have tabbed off of that
field there, they have gotten off of that field.
| | 05:29 | Now for reset buttons, never ever do Mouse Enter,
you may have a reason but if you choose Mouse Enter
| | 05:36 | and somebody just moves their cursor
across the Reset field and they didn't want
| | 05:40 | to reset it, it will automatically reset it.
| | 05:42 | I usually don't do Mouse Down.
| | 05:44 | Mouse Down means when somebody
clicks, it automatically happens.
| | 05:47 | If you go to the Web and you fill out a form in the
Web, some of you have may have seen that if you click
| | 05:52 | and hold down, you can move your cursor off
the button and release and it won't happen.
| | 05:57 | That's what Mouse Up is, I usually choose Mouse Up for these.
| | 06:00 | We are going to select an action so
I click on the action popup menu.
| | 06:04 | All sorts of stuff we can do movies, websites all sorts of
things, they have two form options built-in here right away
| | 06:11 | and you will see Reset Form is one as well Submit a Form;
choose Reset a Form, now that you told it what to trigger on
| | 06:17 | and what the action should be, you have
got to add it to the action of the button.
| | 06:20 | So choose Add.
| | 06:23 | The Reset a Form dialog box should
appear and it's going to ask you,
| | 06:26 | which fields you want to reset to their initial state.
| | 06:30 | Now there are some fields that you don't need to reset.
| | 06:33 | If you have tips out there or a submit button or
something like that, you really don't need to reset those.
| | 06:38 | It's not going to kill you if you do but if
there's like a Date Time something like that
| | 06:43 | like a more complex field, we are not going to reset that.
| | 06:46 | We will reset everything we have got, which makes sense.
| | 06:48 | So with them all selected, that means it
will all reset to their original states.
| | 06:52 | Click OK. It's going to tell you on Mouse Up,
reset the form; if you wanted to edit this,
| | 06:57 | we will see how to do that in a minute, you could simply
click reset a form, and there's edit, go right back to that dialogue box.
| | 07:03 | You will also notice delete here
if you want to delete the action.
| | 07:07 | Click Close and we need to test this out.
| | 07:09 | So click on the Preview button, it's
going to take you back out here.
| | 07:13 | What I would like you to do is try clicking on a
couple of checkboxes different things out here,
| | 07:18 | maybe type in a little text and then press Reset,
come over to Reset, you will see it gives you a hand,
| | 07:24 | click and it should reset the form fields.
| | 07:27 | It's necessary for a form I believe to have a Reset
button out there as small or big as you need it
| | 07:32 | but it's a way for users to be able to start over.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
2. Editing Forms in AcrobatPerforming simple field calculations| 00:00 | When working with forms, you may have
a simple form or a more complex form.
| | 00:05 | In this video, we are going to talk
about how to create or how to work
| | 00:08 | with simple field calculations
such as additions, multiplications.
| | 00:12 | If you need to have products, quantities and totals or grand
totals things like that to be able to happen on your form,
| | 00:18 | you have got to be able to go in and create these.
| | 00:20 | So, I have got formcalculate.pdf open right now and we
need to be able to edit the fields that are out here.
| | 00:26 | There already are some fields, by clicking the
highlight fields you may already see it or not.
| | 00:30 | You will notice that there are three fields right here,
| | 00:33 | which we are going to use to create
a simple field calculation.
| | 00:37 | So, to edit the forms out, here click on the
forms button up top, choose add or edit fields.
| | 00:42 | If there were no form fields out there, it would
typically ask you if you wanted to go through
| | 00:46 | and recognize form fields but since there's already some
out there it's going to say OK, you just want to edit.
| | 00:50 | Zoom in to this area right up here, where it says
product, use a plus sign to zoom in a bit and I will scroll
| | 00:55 | over so you can see this and I will scroll up.
| | 00:58 | Now if you want to do calculations in here, calculations
are not that bad once you understand how they work.
| | 01:03 | If you have done things like this in Excel even
I can believe Word can do things like that,
| | 01:07 | then you have kind of got a little bit of a leg up.
| | 01:09 | It's a relatively simple process that requires a few things.
| | 01:13 | We have got three fields out here with different
names, you can see item 1 price.0, quantity total 1.0.
| | 01:20 | We are going to name the fields; we are going
to do some different changes or updates here.
| | 01:23 | So if you want to do calculations,
we have got this total field here.
| | 01:27 | I want to be able to take the product price
here and the quantity, multiply them together
| | 01:32 | and have the total automatically show up in the total field.
| | 01:34 | So, a couple of things that we need to have are both of
these fields quantity and product need to be numbers only
| | 01:40 | because if somebody types in something,
it's not going to let it calculate it.
| | 01:43 | So, come to item 1 price 0, you can either double click to
open its properties or you can right-click or Ctrl click
| | 01:49 | and go to Properties and it will open up the text field properties.
| | 01:53 | And we will rename this, let's call this Product 1
or better yet just call it Product, keep it simple.
| | 02:01 | You will see the tool tip here.
| | 02:02 | We don't need a tool tip, named
item name 1, you will see that there.
| | 02:06 | I really want them to be able to hover over the field
and tell them that they want to type in a price.
| | 02:10 | So type in price, we will do that.
| | 02:14 | Field's going to be visible, read-only,
no we need that, it's not required.
| | 02:19 | Click Appearance, we don't need a
border out here if we don't want to,
| | 02:23 | that's fine, we don't need to fill color either.
| | 02:25 | Keep the font size, if it says 12, keep it at 12.
| | 02:28 | Click Options, this is just a text field,
we are going to keep it left aligned.
| | 02:31 | I usually keep the defaults in here, not too much to do.
| | 02:35 | Skip over to format.
| | 02:36 | If you want to calculate fields, you have got to make
sure that this is set at number, this one is already set
| | 02:41 | at number but the other two I believe are not
so we have to make sure that they are numbers.
| | 02:45 | So you can see right here it says number, we have
got decimal places at 2, they can type in a price;
| | 02:50 | The separator style has a comma and a period, which is
fine and as soon as they tab or click on another field,
| | 02:55 | it will automatically add a dollar sign, which won't affect
the total at all but it just adds a nice little touch to it.
| | 03:01 | Click on Validate, we could validate this range if you
really wanted the price to be within a certain range.
| | 03:06 | If you click field values in range, you could type in
from 0 to a $1000 whatever you want that 1000 to mean.
| | 03:12 | We will leave that alone for right now, click
Calculate and we don't need to calculate this
| | 03:17 | because it's simply just typing in a value.
| | 03:20 | So what we need to do is we need to go to the next field,
we will rename it and we will make sure it's a number.
| | 03:25 | So this is the great thing about Acrobat
9 when you work with form fields.
| | 03:28 | In previous versions, you had to close this and go to the
next one and set the properties but you can simply come
| | 03:33 | out here and click on the next field and now this dialog
works with that quantity field showing its values.
| | 03:40 | Click on the General tab, we are just going to change
this to QTY for quantity, we will keep it simple.
| | 03:46 | Tool tip, I don't really care, we
can have it say type in quantity;
| | 03:52 | lot of times I don't really need to put in a tool tip.
| | 03:55 | Appearance, we don't have to put
anything in there if we don't want to;
| | 03:58 | border color, fill color you
can try some things if you like.
| | 04:01 | Make sure it's got a font size set at 12.
| | 04:04 | Options, it's fine you don't need to do anything here.
| | 04:08 | Jump over to format, we do need to make this a number
though because otherwise you can type in a letter
| | 04:12 | and our calculation will break so click
to select format category, we're going to choose number.
| | 04:17 | This is a little different example here, we don't want this
to have decimal places simply because it's the quantity,
| | 04:23 | I want them to type in number one
or if they want 12, they type in 12.
| | 04:27 | So, for decimal places, we will set it at 0.
| | 04:30 | Separator style, I don't want it to put a comma or
anything in there, you could, it's fine but I am just going
| | 04:34 | to tell it not to have anything out there.
| | 04:37 | And if you look down at the bottom, you will see what
it's starting to look like just a regular old number.
| | 04:41 | Get rid of the currency symbol because this is not a price,
it's just a quantity, choose None from that popup menu
| | 04:46 | and that's what it's going to look like right now.
| | 04:49 | Click Validate, we could validate within a
certain range, as matter of fact let's do that,
| | 04:53 | they can only buy up to let's say a 100 so
from 0 to 100, some people put in from 1
| | 04:59 | to 100, I would definitely put in 0 there.
| | 05:02 | Click Calculate, we do not need to calculate this
field once again, the total field would do that.
| | 05:06 | So we could click Close but we don't need to.
| | 05:09 | Click the Total Field and we will see
all the values for the total field.
| | 05:12 | Click the General Tab, we will just type in Total;
tool tip doesn't matter, appearance, we could change,
| | 05:19 | we could change the options; jump right to
format, we will skip over everything else
| | 05:23 | and make sure that this is indeed a number.
| | 05:26 | When you choose number, this is going to be a total price so
I typically have the decimal places if you want for cents.
| | 05:32 | Have the Separate Style be a comma if you want to do
that and I want to put a currency symbol out here,
| | 05:37 | we don't have to, just for appearance for the most part.
| | 05:39 | You will see all the different currency symbols
we can use and that's what it might look like.
| | 05:44 | Now we need to calculate so click Calculate.
| | 05:48 | There are three ways to calculate fields so you can do a
simple, value as the sum product average different things
| | 05:54 | like that, you can do what's called simplified field notation,
which we will do in a little while, little later video
| | 05:59 | or you can do custom calculation script,
which can get kind of crazy at times.
| | 06:03 | Choose "Value is the" now I don't want to do sum here,
you can only do certain things; you can do product average,
| | 06:10 | minimum, or maximum so choose product and the way it works
is you have got to tell it, which fields to multiply.
| | 06:17 | So, click Pick, it will come out here to field
selection, we need to choose product and quantity.
| | 06:24 | So scroll through the list here,
you should be able to see it.
| | 06:26 | There's product and QTY for quantity so we are going
to tell it to multiply these two together, click Ok.
| | 06:32 | Now I want to point one thing out here.
| | 06:34 | When you multiply things together,
the order definitely can matter.
| | 06:37 | So if you look in here, you are going
to see that the way these are written
| | 06:40 | in here, it's going to do it in this order.
| | 06:43 | So if you wanted to, you could pick them in a different
order, you could do different things like that
| | 06:46 | but this is the order in, which they
are going to be multiplied together.
| | 06:49 | So we are good, we are going to test it out, click Close.
| | 06:53 | Click on Preview Up Top, should
be able to see it kick in here.
| | 06:58 | Come to CPU and we will type in a number here, I will
type in $23, come to quantity and we will type in,
| | 07:03 | I want three of those, and you can tab between
fields if you tab or if you click somewhere else,
| | 07:08 | you should see the total appear automatically.
| | 07:10 | Now the one thing we want to stop here, this is something
that I used to forget all the time is we want to stop people
| | 07:15 | from entering in numbers themselves so, we
want to make this read-only for the most part.
| | 07:20 | So click back on edit layout.
| | 07:22 | I am going to scroll over to the right, make sure I can
see the total field, double click on the total field,
| | 07:28 | make sure you don't move it, come to the General Tab.
| | 07:31 | You are going to see right here, make sure that
it is read-only, we don't have to make it required
| | 07:37 | but read-only will make it so people
cannot get in there and start editing
| | 07:40 | that so that's the only thing I wanted to mention again.
| | 07:42 | So, to do calculations, typically you want to make sure
| | 07:45 | that you have got your format set for
all the fields with their numbers.
| | 07:48 | One thing I run across a lot that happens a lot is
if you go to the Options tab here for text fields,
| | 07:54 | a lot of people will type in a default value.
| | 07:56 | If you type in words there or even numbers
sometimes and you choose number for the format,
| | 08:02 | you might get an error because it's telling you that
what's default is not following the formatting rules.
| | 08:07 | So, for defaults sometimes you can
remove that or follow the rules.
| | 08:10 | So, those are some simple ways to do calculations for
yourself, there's a lot of other ways that we have seen
| | 08:15 | and I talked about but if you really need to do calculations
out here, you can, there's a lot of simpler ways to do it
| | 08:20 | and a lot of more complex ways to
do this we will see in later videos.
| | 08:23 | So, click Close and you should have that all set.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Copying fields| 00:00 |
When you work with PDF forms, there are times where you
want to be able to create fields and then copy them,
| | 00:06 |
so you don't have to keep reinventing the wheel.
| | 00:08 |
On a previous video, we did talk a little bit about copying
fields, but I want to relate it directly to what we did
| | 00:14 |
in the previous video, which is talking about doing
calculations, because this is really going to help.
| | 00:18 |
So, if you are joining us you can open up form
calculatecopy.PDF make sure you choose forms Add
| | 00:24 |
or Edit fields to get into the Editing mode to see this.
| | 00:27 |
And if you are following along, you should be
able to see that we have got our form fields
| | 00:30 |
out here, we are focusing right over here.
| | 00:31 |
Where it says CPU, quantity, and total.
| | 00:33 |
Now, what I would like to do is I would like to take
those and we have already set up a calculation here.
| | 00:38 |
I just want to be like copy these three
fields to monitors, digital cameras,
| | 00:41 |
laptops, and printers and then do some changing.
| | 00:44 |
So, to do this, we are going to select all fields
and we are going to use the special method for this.
| | 00:49 |
I guess that we saw this in previous video,
but I want to show you in relation to this.
| | 00:52 |
To select these three fields, easy way to do
it, you can click drag across to select them;
| | 00:56 |
we are in Editing mode right now,
so it will select all three.
| | 00:59 |
If you right-click or Ctrl click on
Mac, you will see we have the ability
| | 01:03 |
to place multiple fields, so choose Place Multiple Fields.
| | 01:07 |
If you take a look out here, you are going to see that
we get this error, telling us that one or more fields
| | 01:11 |
in the selection have duplicates in this form.
| | 01:13 |
This is a very important reason why you need to rename
fields and name them something different, click OK.
| | 01:19 |
If you look over here on the left, where the
Fields Navigation Panel is, you will be able to see
| | 01:22 |
that we have got our field selected product
quantity and you will see total number 1.
| | 01:27 |
Now, looking on the page, you will see it just
says Total for the name of the field that means,
| | 01:31 |
they are usually another field called Total somewhere
and if you look straight down where it says Grand Total,
| | 01:36 |
in fact it is, so we need to rename one of these
just to make sure that we don't have conflicts here.
| | 01:41 |
So, come to this Total right here if you right-click on it
| | 01:44 |
or Ctrl click you will see Rename
field, we will call this Product Total.
| | 01:48 |
I usually press Enter or Return to accept that,
| | 01:53 |
click somewhere to deselect and
you should have that out there now.
| | 01:55 |
So, all three fields should be separate, so we are
going to select all three again, click drag across,
| | 01:59 |
you should be able to select them, right-click on Windows
or Ctrl Click on Mac, you will see Place Multiple Fields.
| | 02:06 |
Now, create multiple copies of fields, like I said
we saw earlier but it's going to really help us
| | 02:11 |
if we do calculations, so we don't have to keep
doing the calculations, keep setting this up,
| | 02:15 |
we will have to change field names though, you are going
to have to watch that, so we will see that in a minute.
| | 02:19 |
Copy fields down, we are going to do a total, I think
of, let's see here, we got 4, yeah we have 4 more.
| | 02:24 |
So, look at Change Width and Change Height, Change Width
means, the width of the total number of fields here
| | 02:29 |
from the left edge to the right edge, we are going to
keep that the same, the height of all of these fields,
| | 02:33 |
so increase that value, you will
see it moving down a little bit,
| | 02:36 |
we can get it pretty close to where
we want it and that's pretty good.
| | 02:39 |
Now, if you want to shift these positioning a
little bit, looks like they are a little bit off,
| | 02:43 |
click down and it will shift them all up down left
to right, just so it will look a little better,
| | 02:48 |
click OK and that should give you your fields.
| | 02:51 |
Now, if you notice out here, you are going to see
that its naming convention is little bit different,
| | 02:55 |
so we started out with a generic name like product
and quantity and product total and it put a .0.1.2.3
| | 03:02 |
to help make it easy for us to keep track of these.
| | 03:04 |
Usually, if I want to do this kind of multiplying of
fields, you want to copy these or create multiple copies.
| | 03:09 |
I tend not to name it according to a specific
name like CPU, I name it something generic.
| | 03:14 |
Now, you will notice that each one of these fields,
| | 03:16 |
the way I have it set up here is they each
have numbers in them right to begin with.
| | 03:20 |
We can reset the fields and get rid of that.
| | 03:21 |
But the last thing we need to do here is we need to check
to make sure that calculations are still going to work
| | 03:26 |
and we do that by coming to one of the fields, click
somewhere to deselect, come into first product total,
| | 03:32 |
you can double click on it or right-click or Ctrl click and
go to properties and we are going to check the calculations.
| | 03:37 |
So, click on Calculate, you will see value is the
product of, it's going to say product in quantity.
| | 03:43 |
Now that the field names have changed, we have to make
sure that that is correct and it is not right now.
| | 03:48 |
So, choose Pick, you are going to see all the fields
in here, scroll down, you will see product zero,
| | 03:54 |
that's one we need not product and we will also see quantity
zero, let me scroll down here, not quantity, click OK.
| | 04:02 |
You can look at the field names here, that looks good, don't
close this, because what we can do is we can just click
| | 04:07 |
on the next field product total and start marching
down, so you can see this one is wrong as well.
| | 04:12 |
So click Pick, you will be able to see all the
fields, we are going to do instead of product,
| | 04:15 |
we are going to do product.1, instead of
quantity we will do quantity.1, click OK.
| | 04:21 |
That one is correct and we will just keep marching
down and you can see exactly what I am doing.
| | 04:25 |
So, if you do, do the Create Multiple Copies
or even copy-paste or duplicate field.
| | 04:30 |
You always have to check the field names.
| | 04:32 |
Acrobat's kind of got your back
there, it's trying to help you
| | 04:34 |
out with the naming, but you got to check your calculations.
| | 04:37 |
You shouldn't have to do that, but the format
and things like that should stay consistent
| | 04:40 |
across all the fields that you copy-paste.
| | 04:42 |
Click Close, you could finish those up if you want to.
| | 04:45 |
So, now that you have learned how to copy and create
multiple fields, this can really save you time
| | 04:49 |
down the road, especially when you got a field
or an array of fields that are very similar.
| | 04:53 |
| | 04:54 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using simplified field notations| 00:00 | When working with forms, you may have simple calculations
| | 00:03 | and then you may want a little
bit more complex calculations.
| | 00:06 | In this video, we are going to take a
look at how to do simple field notations.
| | 00:10 | I have opened form fieldnotations.PDF and we have got a form
out here, which has a lot of the fields already created,
| | 00:15 | but we are going to go in and look at
how to perform simple field notations.
| | 00:19 | Click on the Forms button up top, click Add or
Edit fields that allow us to enter the edit mode
| | 00:25 | and you see all the fields out there and now, if
you have been following along and you went through
| | 00:29 | and you did the calculations, what I did was I actually
completed the calculation, so all of these total fields,
| | 00:34 | these product total fields will multiply the product
price times the quantity and get their value.
| | 00:40 | A simplified field notation allows us to go in
and instead of picking some product average,
| | 00:45 | we can actually type in what we want it to do.
| | 00:47 | So, zoom into this area over here, I'm going to click
the plus, zoom in a bit, find subtotal,
| | 00:52 | tax and grand total down towards the bottom down here.
| | 00:54 | And what you will see is, we are going to go in and we are
going to set up the subtotal, then we will set up the tax,
| | 01:00 | we will show people what tax is going to
be on it, not 8.75% but the actual number,
| | 01:06 | the quantity and then we will set the grand total.
| | 01:08 | So, first of all, we need to do this Subtotal
to get all this to happen in order here.
| | 01:12 | So come to the Subtotal field, double click on it to get to
the properties, you can also right-click or Ctrl click.
| | 01:17 | It should open up the text field properties
and this is going to be read-only,
| | 01:21 | you can see right here it is read-only and what we need
to do is we need to add all of the total fields together.
| | 01:26 | So, first and foremost, if you are going to do any
kind of calculations or anything like that,
| | 01:29 | you need to make sure that the format is set
correctly, just so that you only get numbers.
| | 01:34 | So in select format category choose number, it's going
to put two decimal places out there separator style
| | 01:39 | and if you want to show a currency
symbol, you can, you don't have to.
| | 01:43 | I will choose dollar ($) for currency
symbol, come to calculate.
| | 01:47 | Now, we could do what's called a Simplified
Field Notation here or value is the sum,
| | 01:51 | we just need to add all the total fields together.
| | 01:54 | Simplified Field Notation is simply typing in
the name of the field such as producttotal.0,
| | 02:01 | putting an operator like a +, -, / for division,
| | 02:06 | * an asterisk rather for multiplication
and then a name for another field.
| | 02:11 | So, we can actually type out the names
of the fields and tell it how to work.
| | 02:14 | Now, we are going to add a bunch of fields
together, it's going to be easier for us just to pick
| | 02:18 | the fields rather than type all the names in.
| | 02:20 | So, we are just going to go into value
here, make sure it says Sum, choose Pick,
| | 02:25 | we are just going to take all the products, we are
just setting this up, so we can get it all together.
| | 02:30 | So the product total is 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, we will do all those,
| | 02:33 | those are all the fields here on
the right in the totals, click OK.
| | 02:37 | Now, we have got the text field properties dialog box open
we are going to leave it open, click on the tax field here
| | 02:43 | and what we need to do is we need to
make sure that this is read-only as well,
| | 02:47 | so click General, make sure it's read-only it should be.
| | 02:51 | Come to Format, we are going to make sure that this is
giving a number here, we can have it do decimal places as well,
| | 02:56 | currency symbol $ sign, a lot of times
it will remember things like this.
| | 02:59 | Come to Calculate and this time we know how to figure out
what the actual tax is going to be, is it $3 what is it?
| | 03:06 | So, we are going to use Simplified
Field Notation to do this.
| | 03:08 | Choose Simplified Field Notation, click Edit and
you are going to come into the JavaScript Editor.
| | 03:14 | Now, this can give you cold feet here, if you are
thinking oh I got to type a Java Script right now,
| | 03:18 | but a Simplified Field Notation can
be really simple the way it works.
| | 03:21 | In the simplest setting here, we could, if we wanted to add,
let's say just for instance, I wanted to add quantity zero
| | 03:27 | and quantity one together, here's
the way it would look inside of here.
| | 03:30 | I would type in the first field name, I can put a
space if I want, I put the operator plus, minus,
| | 03:37 | division, subtraction whatever I want and QTY.1.
| | 03:41 | So that's literally telling you to find this
field name QTY.0 add it to the field QTY.1.
| | 03:48 | Now, why wouldn't I just use the simple sum, product, or
average to do, that because, if you have done trigonometry before
| | 03:53 | or algebra at all, you can go in and you
can tell it to do certain things in order.
| | 03:58 | So, we could tell to add these together
and then add that to a subtotal, let's say.
| | 04:03 | This is not going to make sense because literally I am
just throwing out fields here, but we can tell it to do things
| | 04:08 | in order, so anything in parenthesis is going
to happen first, then it will take the total
| | 04:12 | of that and add it to the field called subtotal.
| | 04:15 | So, you can not only go in and
do simple addition, subtraction,
| | 04:18 | but you can also tell it how to do things, in what order.
| | 04:21 | And you will notice that back in the other
dialog box, when we did sum, product, or average,
| | 04:25 | if you followed along in the last video,
there wasn't a way to divide.
| | 04:28 | So, in here if we want to divide something I simply
put a forward slash and divide it by a number.
| | 04:33 | So, if we wanted to put, let's say the tax out
there as 0.0something, we could divide it by 100.
| | 04:40 | Now, what we are going to do is, we are going to do
something really simple here so, select where you have got
| | 04:47 | in there, if you typed that in, you can
delete that and we are going to do the tax.
| | 04:53 | So, we need to do, is we need to
take the subtotal field and we need
| | 04:58 | to multiply it times 0.0875 to get the actual tax.
| | 05:11 | What we will do is, we will type in the tax 0.875,
I am going to multiply that times the subtotal.
| | 05:20 | So, we are literally saying 0.0875 times
subtotal that makes it so we don't have to put
| | 05:28 | like a default value in the tax or anything like that.
| | 05:32 | We can just tell it anything we want
depending on the region or area, click OK.
| | 05:38 | Take a look out there it's just going to put a value now,
we are going to test it out, so go ahead and close this up.
| | 05:47 | Click on Preview and over to the right, we are going to
try typing in a value here, just type in like some money,
| | 05:56 | a quantity and as you can see it's
starting to do the calculation for you.
| | 06:00 | So, as we add things out here, I will just --
| | 06:04 | little bit more, tab over to the next
field, type in a value and there we go.
| | 06:11 | So we are telling them what the subtotal is, what the tax is
| | 06:16 | and the grand total is simply the
addition of subtotal in tax.
| | 06:20 | So, we will fix that real quick and
should be done, click edit layout again.
| | 06:24 | Scroll over to the right, come to grand total,
either double click or right-click, Ctrl click on Mac
| | 06:30 | and we are just going to simply add value is the sum of, go
ahead and pick subtotal and if you scroll down -- click OK.
| | 06:34 | So you get it out there and you should actually
see a value show up now, so we will test this out.
| | 06:37 | Click Close.
| | 06:37 | Go back to Preview, take a look and
you should see it happening there.
| | 06:39 | If you want to check the addition here
you can, but it is actually working.
| | 06:41 | Using simplified field notation, you can do all sorts
of things, I see a lot of people that have large tables
| | 06:44 | with descriptions, products, quantities, taxes,
subtotals and you want to do everything in order that's
| | 06:46 | where simplified field notation kind of steps in.
| | 06:48 | Now there's a lot of places to
go find information about that
| | 06:49 | and one of the place I will suggest finding a little bit
more information about that is the Acrobat Developer Center.
| | 06:52 | Go up to Adobe's website, you can search for
Acrobat Developer Center and they have got PDFs,
| | 06:55 | which are devoted to working with JavaScript
as well as simplified field notation.
| | 06:57 | So, it's a nice easy way to go in and set up
a calculation the way you want it to happen.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Adding JavaScript to a field| 00:00 | There will be times, where you want to take
your form and add something extra to it,
| | 00:04 | that you can't do with the typical menus.
| | 00:06 | So we are going to take a look at how to add just
a little bit of JavaScript and how this works,
| | 00:10 | the different places you can put
it and how you can work with it.
| | 00:12 | I have got form JavaScriptfinal.PDF open right now and
this is just an example of what we are going to do.
| | 00:17 | So, I will zoom in using a plus, scroll down a little
bit and you could see we have got a nice area here
| | 00:23 | for calculations and if you come to CPUs and type in a
number, let's say $12, tell them they are going to be two
| | 00:28 | and then click in another field, you can see it's
automatically performing a calculation out here.
| | 00:33 | Now, you also notice that it's doing subtotal, tax,
| | 00:36 | it's figuring out tax automatically
as well as shipping and grand total.
| | 00:39 | Now, the shipping is what we are going to focus on.
| | 00:41 | We are not going to let people enter this,
simply because it's already figured out.
| | 00:45 | The way it determines the shipping cost is by
the shipping pop-menu or dropdown menu over here.
| | 00:50 | By default, it's Ground, but if somebody chooses
a different shipping method like let's say Air,
| | 00:55 | then they click somewhere else, it
automatically figures out the shipping cost
| | 00:59 | and the grand total, automatically updates for them.
| | 01:01 | So, we are going to figure out how do I get the
shipping cost to be tied to this dropdown menu.
| | 01:06 | It's going to require a little bit of JavaScript
but that's what we are here for to show you.
| | 01:09 | So I am going to go back over to Form JavaScript
Start that's where we are going to start at.
| | 01:14 | I have already got the shipping
fields and all the fields out there;
| | 01:17 | we just need to add the JavaScript to get this to work.
| | 01:20 | Now, I have got the JavaScript in Word documents
that you can open up, there are three of them,
| | 01:24 | they are really pretty small, but I have got them in three
separate documents, I also have them these text files
| | 01:29 | and as we use them we will open them up,
I have already got them open down there.
| | 01:33 | So, what I want you to do is inform
JavaScript start, zoom in,
| | 01:37 | I will scroll down, we need to focus on the shipping itself.
| | 01:41 | We have already got the subtotal and tax figured
out, we just need to do the shipping now.
| | 01:44 | So, we are going to start out by coming over to
the shipping field on the left, this dropdown menu
| | 01:48 | and adding a little bit of script
to kind of get this started.
| | 01:51 | So, come up to the Forms Button up top, click Add
or Edit fields to get into the Form Editing Wizard.
| | 01:57 | Come over to the shipping field, double
click to open that to get to the properties.
| | 02:01 | Now, here's what we are going to do, we can
use JavaScript in a lot of different ways.
| | 02:05 | We can use JavaScript to validate
fields, you click on Validate.
| | 02:09 | You can use JavaScript to calculate fields, so you
can do simple calculations or complex calculations.
| | 02:14 | You can use JavaScript to do something
as soon as the document opens
| | 02:18 | and that's called the Document Level JavaScript.
| | 02:20 | JavaScript is a separate language that was created a
while ago, but it's been adapted or adopted to Acrobat
| | 02:26 | and there's a lot of things particular
to Acrobat you can do.
| | 02:28 | So, what we need to do here is this, we are going
to actually validate this field, this dropdown menu,
| | 02:34 | so that we can tell other fields what value is being
used at that second, so we need to validate it.
| | 02:39 | Validating simply says, it's got either to be either
be within a certain range or it's going to come
| | 02:44 | up with an exact value and tell
other fields what the value is.
| | 02:47 | So, we are going to run a custom validation
script, it's going to be a little JavaScript.
| | 02:51 | Now, what I have got here is I have actually
got a shipping field, let me open this up,
| | 02:55 | I have got a shipping field Word document,
I also have a text file in the folder;
| | 03:00 | you can open that up if you don't have Word.
| | 03:02 | I want to start here, this is not a JavaScript class, but
I want to point you in a direction of how you can do this.
| | 03:07 | This little JavaScript right here is
just going to say if the event value,
| | 03:12 | if the field says Ground then the shipping cost, this
thing we are calling shipping cost is going to be 30,
| | 03:18 | 30 pesos, $30, 30 whatever it doesn't matter.
| | 03:21 | If it's "air" it's going to be
35, if it's "freight" it's 20.
| | 03:24 | So, we are going to simply broadcast that out to other
fields and say, if it is this then it's that value.
| | 03:29 | So what we need to do is I am going to
copy all of these, just copy it all.
| | 03:33 | If you notice up here you are going to see these slashes,
that is actually commenting, you really don't need to put
| | 03:38 | that in there, but we put that in there
just so you can tell what this is all about.
| | 03:42 | So, I am going to copy that, go back to
Form JavaScript Start, in the Validate,
| | 03:48 | I am going to click Run Custom Validation Script, click
Edit and we are just going to simply paste it in there.
| | 03:53 | And there we go, click OK.
| | 03:55 | So that's going to tell other fields,
what's going to happen here.
| | 03:58 | Click Close.
| | 04:00 | Now, that's a part of it, so we
are just broadcasting the value.
| | 04:03 | Now, what we need to do is we need to go out and
create a couple of different things called Variables
| | 04:07 | and get things set up a little bit easier for ourselves.
| | 04:10 | So, we need to create what's called the Document Level
JavaScript, this is another way to have JavaScript run
| | 04:15 | or scripts run, when the document opens or at anytime.
| | 04:19 | If you come up under Advanced, come to
Document Processing, you will notice right here
| | 04:23 | that we have Document JavaScripts, open that up.
| | 04:26 | Now, we need to come up with a script
name here and we also need to come
| | 04:29 | up with the code, so let me show you the code first.
| | 04:32 | I have got a Word document and a text file called Doc Level.
| | 04:36 | So, with this document open, you should be able to see
all the code that's in here, the script that is in here.
| | 04:41 | It looks similar to the code that
we had for the field itself.
| | 04:45 | But what we are trying to do here is we are trying to
create what's called a Variable, called Shipping Cost
| | 04:49 | and shipping cost to be precise and this variable
is going to be passed over to the calculation field.
| | 04:54 | So, in the calculation when it does the grand
total, it would be able to figure this out.
| | 04:58 | You can see there's a lot of code in here,
not a lot, but there's code in here,
| | 05:00 | it looks similar to what we had before, we are
going to copy paste all of the things that we have
| | 05:04 | in here, so I will go and select all that stuff.
| | 05:07 | Copy it out, come back over to the Form JavaScript Start,
we need to give this a name here, so I will call this "INIT"
| | 05:14 | for initial, we are going to add that and what we will
do is we will just simply paste in there, click OK,
| | 05:21 | there we go, we are going to close that up.
| | 05:23 | So it basically has this JavaScript ready to go, the
last thing we need to do now is we are going to come
| | 05:27 | over to shipping and say pick up
whatever it figures out as the value.
| | 05:31 | So, if you open up the Ship Total Field by double
clicking, come to calculate and what we are going
| | 05:36 | to do is we are going to run a little Custom Calculation
Script, so click Custom Calculation Script, click Edit.
| | 05:41 | And what we need to do here is we need
to actually put in our field script.
| | 05:45 | I have got a Word document called Field and
what we are going to do is we are going to just,
| | 05:49 | it's just a little bit of text here it's just
going to say, we are just going to grab the value
| | 05:54 | from this shipping cost variable, the end shipping cost variable, so copy that, come over
to JavaScript Start paste that in there and there we go.
| | 06:01 | So, we had to tell it to broadcast the value, we had to
tell it to say, what value is happening at that moment
| | 06:06 | and then we had to pick up the value in the shipping field.
| | 06:09 | So, click OK.
| | 06:11 | There we go.
| | 06:11 | Click Close.
| | 06:13 | And let's test this out.
| | 06:14 | Click Close Form Editing.
| | 06:16 | Take a look, we are going to try and add some values here.
| | 06:19 | What I want to do first though is let's reset the form,
| | 06:21 | so I am going to come down to the
bottom, click Reset and come up.
| | 06:26 | Come up to CPU, just type in a value, type in a quantity
and what we are going to do is we are going to try
| | 06:30 | and change the shipping, so click on
Shipping, try something different.
| | 06:34 | Click on another field and there we go.
| | 06:36 | So, let's get started right now.
| | 06:38 | So, if you take a look, we are telling it like I said to
broadcast that value if we choose another value out here.
| | 06:43 | A lot of times what has to happen is it's going to tell it
to send it out, but we are going to click somewhere else
| | 06:48 | to get it to work and it should start
automatically updating things as we go here.
| | 06:53 | Once again, if you reset the form, which I would
always suggest doing before you send this out,
| | 06:57 | a lot of times it goes back to the default value
and the default value in this case is Ground,
| | 07:02 | and you can see the Shipping Cost right there.
| | 07:04 | The only thing I did to do the grand total here was I
just added all three fields, subtotal, tax and shipping,
| | 07:10 | a simple calculation, either using
the Simplified Field Notation
| | 07:13 | or just the built-in addition function within Acrobat.
| | 07:17 | So, hopefully this gets you started
with working with JavaScript.
| | 07:20 | JavaScript can do a lot, there's a lot of information
out there on the web, you can go to www.acrobatuser.com.
| | 07:29 | If you go to the Help section, there actually is
Acrobat 9 Extended Help, you can actually go to the Help
| | 07:38 | and take a look, they have some things, there is support
online, you guys can actually go to the resource center.
| | 07:43 | I would suggest going to the Acrobat Developer Center, the
developer center on Adobe's website has a JavaScript PDF
| | 07:50 | that you can open up and use and it does have some formulas,
like some examples in there, that you can get started with.
| | 07:55 | So, this should give you a jumpstart with JavaScript,
just enabling you to see what you can do,
| | 07:57 | different places to put the JavaScript and to be able
to extend your forms beyond just a simple click and go.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Showing and hiding fields| 00:00 | If you look at Forms on the web, you are going to
see that sometimes when you click on something,
| | 00:05 | something else shows up something that's
actually contextual or depends on something else.
| | 00:09 | For instance I have got formfieldjavascript.pdf open right
now and if you are just joining us, go ahead and open it up.
| | 00:15 | Take a look down here, at the very bottom, I have zoomed in.
| | 00:17 | At the bottom of the page you will see are you a
supplier in California, Oregon or Washington State.
| | 00:21 | There are two little Radio Buttons here that
when you click, they are mutually exclusive,
| | 00:24 | which means only one will select but suppose you
want to do this, suppose you want to click No
| | 00:29 | and then when they click No have a field show up that
says why not maybe like a reasoning so you don't want
| | 00:36 | that to show all the time but as soon as
somebody clicks, you want something else to show.
| | 00:40 | So it's contingent upon clicking No.
| | 00:42 | We can use fields and hide them and it's one reason
why you would use what's called a Hidden Field
| | 00:47 | and then we can show them when
somebody interacts with the field.
| | 00:49 | So that's what we are going to do.
| | 00:51 | So in here, go to Forms button up top, you will see Add
or Edit Fields, you may have to scroll down a little bit
| | 00:56 | or scroll to the right, you can see your fields out here.
| | 00:58 | What we are going to do first is we are going
to add the fields out there that are going
| | 01:01 | to show when someone clicks the No button.
| | 01:04 | So I would like there to be text
out there that says give a reason
| | 01:07 | and then perhaps a field that they
can type into to the right.
| | 01:10 | So what we are going to do is we are
going to put two text fields out here,
| | 01:12 | I am going to show you one use for
a text field as just simply text.
| | 01:16 | Come up to Add New Field, chose text field.
| | 01:19 | Come on out to the page, instead of
us clicking, we are going to click
| | 01:22 | and drag to draw ourselves a nice tiny little text field
here, release it's going to ask you what to name it.
| | 01:28 | We will call this Hidden 1 because this is going
to be hidden and it's not going to be required,
| | 01:33 | click Show All Properties that should
show the properties dialog box.
| | 01:37 | I want to have text showing here so this is going
to be the text that says where are you a supplier.
| | 01:42 | So come to Appearance, we are going to make sure
that border fill, I don't want either one of those
| | 01:47 | and if there's a color there, you
can click and choose No Color.
| | 01:51 | Come to Options, here we are going
to set what's called a Default Value.
| | 01:54 | We will type in, which state.
| | 01:58 | Now I don't want it to scroll, I don't want to
do anything, we are just going to have this fit,
| | 02:01 | this is literally just going to be text out
there so I will turn Check Spelling Off,
| | 02:05 | move this dialog box out of the way, you should
be able to see it out there, which state.
| | 02:08 | Now if you want to change the appearance of
the text, go to Appearance and we are going
| | 02:12 | to actually pick a different font size, make it a
little bit smaller maybe, I will try like 10 point,
| | 02:17 | maybe a little bit smaller than
that like 9 point, there we go.
| | 02:19 | And the last thing I want to do is I want to hide this.
| | 02:23 | So if you go to General, you are going to see
right here Form Field is visible or hidden.
| | 02:28 | Now before we hide it, if we hide it right now,
we are going to make another field over here,
| | 02:33 | which is actually just the text field that they can
type into but I want to be able line both of these
| | 02:37 | up so I am not going to make it hidden just yet.
| | 02:39 | So we will leave it alone, click Close, we are going to
make one more text field so click Add New Field Text Field,
| | 02:46 | just to the right of that, we are going to click and drag,
| | 02:49 | make yourself a field a little
bit wider so you can type into it.
| | 02:52 | It's going to ask you what you want, we will call this
Hidden 2, click Show All Properties it's called Hidden 2,
| | 03:00 | go to Appearance we are going to have it have
a border so click on the border color
| | 03:04 | and let's try whatever you want,
I will try nice thin solid border.
| | 03:07 | I also want to put a nice fill color so they can see this
so I will chose a white fill, there you go, not too bad.
| | 03:13 | Come to Options, take a look, we don't have to type in
a default value here, you can make it so it scrolls,
| | 03:18 | I do not want to make it multiline, that's fine.
| | 03:21 | And the last thing I want to do is this.
| | 03:23 | Go to General we are going to make both of these hidden.
| | 03:25 | So come up to Form Field is Hidden.
| | 03:30 | Click on Hidden 1, come to Form Field is Hidden, they
are both there now and you can move it around a little bit
| | 03:36 | if you want to get a little closer or resize
this text field if you want to do that,
| | 03:40 | get them close to each other, it's not too bad, click Close.
| | 03:44 | What we are going to do is we got them
out there, we are going to make it so that
| | 03:46 | when somebody clicks on No, these will show.
| | 03:49 | So come to No, double click on the field, come to
your Actions so we are going to do a little bit more
| | 03:56 | with Actions here on Mouse Up; when
somebody releases their mouse to select this,
| | 04:01 | we are going to tell it to show these fields.
| | 04:03 | So come to select in Action, scroll down a
little bit, you will see Show/Hide a Field,
| | 04:08 | we are going to add that to our list of actions, click
Add and now it's going to ask us what do you want to do.
| | 04:14 | So it's got all the Form Fields out here that we can show
or hide and we got to tell them exactly what to do here.
| | 04:20 | So scroll down, you should be able to see somewhere out
there's Hidden 1, we are going to tell that to show,
| | 04:25 | it only lets you do one at a time, click OK so here it's
going to tell us, it's going to Show/Hide a Field.
| | 04:32 | Now we need to show both of those fields so
we are going to add one more action here,
| | 04:35 | we are going to tell it not only
to show Hidden 1 but Hidden 2.
| | 04:39 | So click the Add button again, it's going to take
us back to Show/Hide a Field, scroll down a bit,
| | 04:44 | find Hidden 2 and this time we are going to show it.
| | 04:48 | So click OK so we now are doing two things here we
are showing Hidden 1 and showing Hidden 2 on Mouse Up.
| | 04:55 | Now we got to give this a try.
| | 04:56 | So click Close, preview the page, go on down there, we
got to reset the form first because they are not going
| | 05:03 | to see No selected so reset the form,
click reset, come over here and click on No
| | 05:08 | and you should see what's happening here
so it's just simply showing both of those.
| | 05:12 | Now the only key thing here that I would like to
do just to kind of make it a little bit cleaner,
| | 05:16 | if somebody decides to switch their mind
and say oh yeah I am and they click Yes,
| | 05:20 | I want that to go away so I want
these two form fields to go away.
| | 05:24 | So click Edit Layout again, come down,
there, we are going to go to the properties
| | 05:28 | for the Yes button so double click on the properties there.
| | 05:31 | Mouse Up, we are going to hide these two fields.
| | 05:34 | So we have already got Show/Hide a Field and Select
Action there, click Add, scroll down to Hidden 1
| | 05:40 | and you need to make sure it says Hide, click OK.
| | 05:43 | We will do the next one here, click Add,
Show Hide, scroll down Hidden 2 we are going
| | 05:49 | to hide that one too, click OK and there we go.
| | 05:52 | Now the only last thing I want to make sure
of is you don't want people interacting
| | 05:57 | with these meaning you don't want somebody to be able to
change this text here, you do want somebody to type in here
| | 06:01 | so we are just going to double check, click on Hidden 1,
come back to the General Appearance here and we are going
| | 06:06 | to make this Read-Only so nobody can
interact with that unless you do it.
| | 06:10 | Click Close.
| | 06:11 | I am going to test it out, click on Preview and make sure
you reset, click on reset, that should get it all back
| | 06:16 | where it should be, click Yes and click No
and there we go toggling back and forth.
| | 06:24 | You want to click Yes and click Reset before you
send this off to someone so that it is not showing
| | 06:29 | because when they see it, this is exactly what they
are going to see and as soon as they start interacting
| | 06:33 | with these buttons, it should appear and
they can start filling out their form field.
| | 06:37 | Now that you know how to show and hide
fields, you can do just about anything.
| | 06:41 | Just a couple examples here; whenever I do like
product suggestions, if you hover over that field,
| | 06:47 | I usually will put a little bit of text up here that says
something like keep it short, be nice something like that.
| | 06:53 | You can show a Tool Tip that if they are
trying to figure out what is this DVD thing,
| | 06:57 | what's the speakers you can have a nice little text field
show up that's a tool tip for them, you can actually show
| | 07:02 | and hide a button that has a picture in it.
| | 07:03 | There's a lot of possibilities for this.
| | 07:05 | Now that you know how to do this, you can
kind of jazz up your form just a little bit,
| | 07:09 | add a few things that are very functional
as well as aesthetically pleasing.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating a Submit Form button| 00:00 | When you have most all the form fields you need on the page,
| | 00:02 | one of the last things we are going
to do is create a Submit button.
| | 00:05 | This is probably the most important part of
the form besides getting everyone to fill
| | 00:10 | out information, you need to be able to submit it.
| | 00:12 | Now if they are going to print this and fax it back, no
need for a Submit button, but we have got to get one out here
| | 00:18 | so that it works either for Email or other purposes.
| | 00:21 | So to get started here, make sure
you got formfieldsubmit.pdf open,
| | 00:24 | it's got lot of the same fields you
have been working on in this chapter.
| | 00:27 | We are going to add a button down towards the bottom,
which is a Submit Button so we need to edit the form fields,
| | 00:32 | click the form test button up top, you will
see Add or Edit Fields, got a good chain here.
| | 00:37 | And we are going to create a button right to the left
of preset so first of all I will zoom in a little bit
| | 00:42 | and scroll down OK so we are going to add a new field.
| | 00:46 | So right-click or Ctrl click on Mac, you
will see button, you add a button out here.
| | 00:51 | What I would like to do is we are just going to click
and let it go and I am going to try and line it up right
| | 00:55 | with the reset button, you see a blue line going
all the way horizontally across and click to set it.
| | 00:59 | It's going to ask us to name this, we are going
to call this Submit, click Show All Properties.
| | 01:05 | Now by default if you are going to see that the
General Tab here you have got the name already set,
| | 01:09 | we are not going to make this read-only
because people do need to interact with it.
| | 01:13 | Click Appearance, remove the fill color because we
actually are going to use a picture for this instead,
| | 01:18 | we are going to try something little different here.
| | 01:20 | So click the Fill Color, choose No Color, come to Options.
| | 01:25 | I mentioned earlier on in previous
videos that if you do a button like this,
| | 01:28 | you can actually set a label, label is typically text.
| | 01:32 | What I have got is I have got two pictures that we are
going to use that look something like the reset button
| | 01:36 | but I am going to have it to where if you look
at the button first, you will see it says Submit
| | 01:39 | with a certain appearance like a black background
and when we roll over the button the Submit Button,
| | 01:45 | it will change appearance, we are
actually going to swap a picture out.
| | 01:47 | So you are going to have something like a Web button.
| | 01:49 | Choosing layout, pick icon, that
allows us to put a picture in here.
| | 01:54 | If you notice, you are going to see that
we have a behavior right now set at Invert.
| | 01:57 | What I want to do is I want to choose what's called Push.
| | 02:00 | If you choose a behavior, behavior means how
many states to the button are you going to have.
| | 02:04 | Choose Push and you should have three up, down and rollover.
| | 02:08 | What you can do is you can actually change the text
or the picture, which is called an Icon for the
| | 02:14 | Up state, the Down state and the Rollover state.
| | 02:16 | The Up state is what you see when you first
open the form, Down when somebody clicks
| | 02:20 | on the button it can change a picture or the
label and Rollover when somebody rolls a cursor
| | 02:25 | over this button what it would look like.
| | 02:27 | So we need to start with the Up state.
| | 02:29 | Click Choose icon, that will ask us where is
the picture you want to put in your button.
| | 02:34 | Click Browse and this is going to ask us where they
are so I will go to my exercise files, get that to Edit
| | 02:39 | and go to buttons; in the buttons folder,
I should see I have submit and Submit Over.
| | 02:43 | If I look down here under the files of type, you
should be able to see there's a lot of different types
| | 02:47 | of files depending on your platform and
depending on what version of Acrobat you have,
| | 02:51 | this list maybe a little bit smaller, little bit bigger.
| | 02:54 | If you have Mac, typically you won't
see office products things like that.
| | 02:57 | So we do have a lot we can choose from, you will notice
there's not like Show All Files or something like that,
| | 03:02 | you need to pick the file format you are going to use.
| | 03:05 | So we are going to use PDF, we are going to use Submit since
this is the original button the one you are going to see
| | 03:10 | when you first click, come down to
select, click Select and there it is.
| | 03:16 | It's pretty small, click OK.
| | 03:18 | Take a look over here, you are going to see
it kind of cuts it down to just the content
| | 03:22 | so I move the Button Properties over here.
| | 03:24 | You will be able to see it show up out there.
| | 03:26 | Now what we are going to do is we are going to have
it so on the rollover state we switch pictures.
| | 03:30 | Choose the Rollover State, icon goes away here because
we are going to choose a new one, click Choose Icon,
| | 03:36 | we are going to browse again, click Browse,
should be back in the Buttons Folder,
| | 03:41 | choose Submit Over I usually name them that
way just so you can tell, which one's, which,
| | 03:45 | over means Rollover, click OK and there we go.
| | 03:49 | Now we are going to try this out to see what happens here.
| | 03:51 | Click Close, click on Preview Up
Top and try it out, hover over.
| | 03:57 | You should see that it's just simply
going to swap out the picture.
| | 04:00 | You can do anything, you can get as crazy as you
want with these things but you just have to remember
| | 04:03 | that the more pictures the more information
you put in this thing, the bigger the file size
| | 04:07 | so that doesn't look too bad it's just a little small.
| | 04:10 | Click Edit Layout, come back out here, I want to scroll
over just a bit so you can see the reset button as well.
| | 04:16 | Click on Submit and we are just going to try
| | 04:18 | and make it a little bit bigger here
so come to the corner, click and drag.
| | 04:22 | Now what's going to happen here is just going to
try and fit the picture in proportionally by default
| | 04:25 | but hold down the Shift key as you are dragging here and
it will try and keep these proportions; let go of the mouse
| | 04:31 | let go of the Shift key and you
will see that we are getting there.
| | 04:33 | Let me make it a little bit bigger, the picture
is just fitting inside of the field right now,
| | 04:37 | yeah it's not too bad probably
not as big as the Reset Button.
| | 04:40 | What I would typically do is instead of having a reset
already out here, this is actually part of the design.
| | 04:45 | I would create both buttons like
this but we will keep it as is.
| | 04:48 | So I will click and drag it up over
here just make a little bit easier.
| | 04:51 | Now we have got to give it an action
out here so I will move down a bit.
| | 04:54 | To do the Action, we are going to
go to the properties on this again.
| | 04:56 | So if you double click on it or right-click or Ctrl
click, go to Properties and we are going to go to actions,
| | 05:02 | choose Actions this is what it all comes down to right here.
| | 05:05 | We are not going to send this out
yet but we are just setting it up.
| | 05:08 | So the trigger is when somebody
does this perform this action.
| | 05:13 | So the trigger is the event
basically when it's going to happen.
| | 05:16 | So Mouse Up, Mouse Down, Mouse Enter, Mouse Exit; I
always choose Mouse Up so if somebody clicks on the button,
| | 05:22 | they can move their cursor off and
then release it and it will not happen.
| | 05:25 | Come to select Action, open up that menu, you will
see we already have a Submit a Form Action in here,
| | 05:30 | choose that and we need to add this
to our list of actions so click Add.
| | 05:36 | Now, this is probably the most important dialogue.
| | 05:38 | If you are going to have some kind of Submittal
Form, you have to answer two questions here,
| | 05:42 | you got to tell it what's the URL for this link
meaning where are you going to send this information
| | 05:46 | and what file format are you going to send it as.
| | 05:49 | There's two big options here, you can either Email it to
someone or you can send it to a Web Server or a Web Form.
| | 05:55 | We are going to take the simple road here and in a
later video I will show you how to do it to a web server.
| | 05:59 | We are going to simply mail it to someone.
| | 06:01 | So type in Mailto: your Email address or someone's Email
address doesn't have to be yours, you can try and split those
| | 06:14 | by commas if you want to, be careful
about putting too many in there.
| | 06:18 | So this is what's going to happen when somebody clicks,
tells the browser to open up your associated Email software.
| | 06:24 | If your browser can't find any like Outlook,
Entourage things like that, if it can't find it,
| | 06:28 | it will usually come up with a dialogue box that says do you
have web based Email like Hotmail or something like that.
| | 06:34 | You now have to tell it what format, we
have got FDF, which is Form's Data File,
| | 06:38 | this is only in certain situations
are you going to choose this.
| | 06:41 | We have got HTML; HTML is if you are going to send it
off to a Web Server you can use that and I would look
| | 06:46 | at the video later on the talks about doing that.
| | 06:49 | XFDF is an XML version of FDF and we have PDF.
| | 06:52 | We are going to send the complete PDF
off just so we can get it in Email.
| | 06:56 | Now once you choose PDF, you are going to get rid of field
selection and date options because if you choose any one
| | 07:01 | of the other formats here, it's going to export the
field data and you can choose, which fields to export.
| | 07:06 | We don't need to do that because we
are going to send the whole PDF file.
| | 07:09 | Date options we don't need to do either because
you are going to get the whole PDF file.
| | 07:12 | Click OK, here it is so we are going to submit
the form, close it up and let's test it out.
| | 07:19 | Click on Preview, if somebody is in Reader, if somebody is
in Full Version of Acrobat, if they open it in the browser,
| | 07:24 | if their browser lets them do that
the Submit Button should work.
| | 07:27 | So when you fill out a form, hover over Submit, you
will see a tool tip show up, send it to this person,
| | 07:32 | I will click that; what it's going to do
it's going to say where is your Email client,
| | 07:37 | you have a desktop Email application, you can click OK or
Internet Mail like Hotmail or HotPod or something like that,
| | 07:43 | click OK and what it's going to do is it's just going
to try and find your Outlook, find your Entourage,
| | 07:47 | find your Lotus Notes whatever it
happens to be, get that together
| | 07:50 | and if you take a look, here is
what it's going to send back.
| | 07:53 | Now using an Email Submit Button like
this is one of the simpler ways to do it,
| | 07:58 | you just got to know that if you send this to a 1000
people or it's posted on a website and you are going
| | 08:02 | to get 10,000 hits on it, you are going to be
getting Emails from everybody with the PDF in there.
| | 08:07 | Now like I said in later video where we talk about
working with the CGI Bin, I will show you how to get it
| | 08:11 | so it compiles the data at least
makes it so that it's not a PDF
| | 08:15 | and you can get it Emailed to you
directly or sent to a database.
| | 08:18 | Give you an idea how that works.
| | 08:20 | The Submit button is really important if you want to make it
| | 08:23 | so that your form is submitted via an electronic
submission, via Email or to a Web Server.
| | 08:29 | So now you should be able to put one on the page, create an
Email Submit Form; like I said, later on in a later video,
| | 08:34 | we will show you how to do a Web Submit Form.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Adding a digital signature field| 00:00 | We will take a look at adding a digital signature field to a form
now. I have got formfieldsubmit.pdf open right now and if you're
| | 00:07 | just joining us, you can open that file. You will not have
a Submit Button but that's okay, we are just focusing on this
| | 00:13 | digital signature field right now.
| | 00:14 | I have already got one in here because I wanted to show you
what this looks like and how it works and then we can add one,
| | 00:19 | we'll remove it and add one.
| | 00:20 | I'm in Form Editing mode right now and if you just open up
the PDF right now, make sure you got to Forms in the menu,
| | 00:26 | Add or Edit Fields, that will take you into the Editing Mode.
| | 00:29 | So if you get into the Editing Mode, make sure that you're not
looking at this, we want to be able to preview this. So click on Preview,
| | 00:35 | make sure you're in there.
| | 00:37 | You can see the digital Signature field,
we are trying to preview the field.
| | 00:40 | You hover it, you are going to see it gives you a hand, if you want to
sign this thing you can simply click to Sign so go ahead and click on that.
| | 00:46 | What it's going to do is just going to
try and digitally sign the field for you.
| | 00:50 | Now a digital signature field is something that you are going to use
if you want to keep track of whether or not the document has changed,
| | 00:57 | you want to make sure that the person that was actually looking at
it or filling it out is who they say they are by their digital ID.
| | 01:04 | Digital IDs are not overly complex but they require more
than just clicking on the button. In versions of Acrobat,
| | 01:11 | most of the time it's going to ask you, "You want
to sign this? What do you want to use to sign it?"
| | 01:15 | You can use a file or Roaming Digital ID stored in
the server, a device or you want to create a Digital ID.
| | 01:21 | Usually what happens with Acrobat is when you work with a
Digital ID, you create it once if it's an Acrobat Digital ID,
| | 01:28 | it stores it somewhere you tell it.
| | 01:30 | It creates both a public key and a private key and these
are two things that you sit on, you put somewhere on
| | 01:35 | your hard drive and Acrobat always remembers it.
| | 01:38 | So if you want to sign an ID, you can sign from an existing
digital ID which is a file or you can make yourself a new one.
| | 01:45 | If you have worked with digital IDs in the past and you work with
something like VeriSign or one of those types of companies, you
| | 01:51 | can if you want to find a Roaming ID server
| | 01:53 | and go to that; lot of government agencies will do this.
| | 01:57 | We're not going to go and create an ID and all that sort of thing. I just
wanted you to see what the other user has to have to get this to work.
| | 02:04 | So it will ask them some questions, it will ask them to fill
out la ittle bit of information and password, that sort of thing,
| | 02:08 | but to get this to fully work, people on both sides, both parties,
usually have to have a digital ID and you are going to actually
| | 02:15 | swap information so you can verify that the person that you're
sending it to is in fact that person. So I wanted, like I said,
| | 02:21 | I just wanted to show you what's going to happen with this. We're
going to now create one for ourselves, we're going to get rid of the one
| | 02:26 | that's there and just show you how it works. So click Cancel.
| | 02:29 | We're going to edit the layout. So click Edit Layout,
| | 02:32 | click on the digital Signature field and I
might over a little bit with the scroll bar.
| | 02:36 | I am going to delete that so you can press Delete
| | 02:39 | and we're going to create our own.
| | 02:40 | So you can right-click or Ctrl click on the page
| | 02:43 | or come up to Add New Field.
| | 02:46 | You'll see Digital Signature, choose that
| | 02:48 | and it works like every other field. You want to click somewhere.
| | 02:51 | What we're going to do is we're going to
click and drag so click, hold down, drag out
| | 02:55 | make it pretty wide here
| | 02:56 | just because it's going to fill out most of the area.
| | 02:58 | Release your mouse,
| | 03:00 | it should ask you what to call this. We can call this whatever
you want, we'll just call this let's say Sig. If you want to make
| | 03:05 | this required, you can and in certain cases I do do this because
I want somebody to digitally sign it so I know it's them.
| | 03:13 | Click Show All Properties,
| | 03:15 | click on General, you are going to move over here.
| | 03:17 | So once again it's going to ask you the same types of
things we have been seeing if you have been following along.
| | 03:21 | Click Appearance.
| | 03:22 | You can change the border color
or different things if you want to.
| | 03:26 | Click Actions and Actions on this, you don't need to do anything
because it's going to automatically figure out whether or not
| | 03:32 | you are going to sign it with the Digital ID,
a Roaming ID or something attached to the file.
| | 03:37 | Click Sign
| | 03:38 | and here is what we are going to focus.
| | 03:40 | When you sign this, you can do different things here.
| | 03:42 | You can make it so that nothing happens when you sign it,
that's just the way for you to send it off to someone that's
| | 03:48 | getting this data and make it so that they know
that it's you that actually filled it out.
| | 03:52 | You can also do this. You can mark fields as Read-Only,
| | 03:56 | which is interesting. The thing about signing a document
it's like signing anything else, like a contract. If you
| | 04:01 | physically sign something, you are saying you agree to
this. So if you sign something with a digital signature,
| | 04:08 | we can make it so that certain fields
if you choose just these fields
| | 04:12 | and click Pick
| | 04:15 | are grayed out so they are read-only. So the information you've
already put in there is basically locked in so you can't touch it.
| | 04:22 | Like I said I think that makes sense because signing something
is usually the last thing you do and if you do this, if you
| | 04:28 | do say Mark Things as Read-Only to where
they will be dimmed or grayed out,
| | 04:31 | if they sign it first, they're going to
have a hard time filling out the form.
| | 04:36 | So I will click Cancel.
| | 04:37 | We could do Mark as Read-Only, you could also execute a script
that does things like interact with the document itself not
| | 04:44 | just the form fields.
| | 04:46 | We are just going to say Nothing happens when signed,
| | 04:48 | close that up and we will test it out.
| | 04:51 | Click Preview,
| | 04:53 | come out to the Digital Signature field. You'll see this cool
little tab here which is always telling your name, fill this thing.
| | 04:59 | So if you click to sign,
| | 05:02 | once again it will ask you what you want to do.
Do you want to use digital ID or create one right now?
| | 05:07 | So this is how you create a Digital Signature field. This can be
very useful when you are trying to track information and make sure
| | 05:12 | that the person that is actually filling out this form is
indeed that person and that things have not changed or edited
| | 05:18 | if the form is sent or submitted.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Setting tab order| 00:00 | When your form is pretty much done there's a couple
little housekeeping things that usually need to happen.
| | 00:05 | One of those is working with the tab order.
| | 00:08 | In this video we are going to talk
about setting the tab order
| | 00:11 | and just show you exactly how easy it is to do in Acrobat 9.
| | 00:14 | So I have got formfilltab.pdf open right now.
| | 00:17 | What we need to do is we need to
start editing the fields themselves.
| | 00:20 | So click on the Form Stats button choose Add
or Edit fields, it should take us in here.
| | 00:25 | Now if you look on the left you will
see the Fields Navigation Panel.
| | 00:28 | Here is the way the tab order works.
| | 00:30 | This is so much easier I think
than previous versions of Acrobat.
| | 00:34 | The tab order can be very important it can be
actually very frustrating if it's not set correctly.
| | 00:39 | Tab order means when you come out to the page and you
place your cursor in a field when you hit the tab key
| | 00:44 | where does your cursor go, which
field does it go to next.
| | 00:47 | So we can set that manually or we can set it automatically.
| | 00:50 | Looking on the left over here you are going to
see that the names of the fields are sitting
| | 00:53 | over here this is the actual tab
order they are in right now.
| | 00:58 | So just to show you this come to the Tab Order button here
you are going to see there's a lot of things going on right now.
| | 01:04 | Click Show Tab Numbers you are going to see right here that
you can actually sort them manually you can drag
| | 01:10 | and drop fields it tells you how to do this.
| | 01:12 | Click OK and you will be able to see the numbers out there
| | 01:15 | so you can tell right now exactly
how someone would tab through this.
| | 01:18 | You are going to see 1, 2, 3, 4, across.
| | 01:21 | Now suppose that I wanted to do something little different I
wanted to go 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 and then jump across this way.
| | 01:28 | What we would have to do is we would
have to manually go in and change this.
| | 01:31 | There are a couple of ways to try this.
| | 01:34 | If you come to tab order you are going to see default
tab order that's what it pretty much defaults to.
| | 01:39 | Choose Default Tab Order and what it does it just
kind of says whatever was is what it's going to be.
| | 01:44 | Choose Tab Order again, choose Order Task
By Row that's going to do what you see
| | 01:49 | out there already so it's aready going
to do them by row sometimes it's does that.
| | 01:53 | Choose Tab Order again and you are
going to see order tabs by column.
| | 01:57 | Take a look what's going to happen here is you are
going to see it happen you are going to see it start
| | 02:01 | out here it's going to start up start
all way down, kind of run its way across.
| | 02:04 | It did something kind of weird here with
suggestions being number 1; if you look over here
| | 02:08 | in the Fields Navigation Panel you will
see the exact same ordering out here,
| | 02:11 | suggest is the number 1 field there it is right there.
| | 02:15 | Now if the tab order is not what you want we can
actually change the order by dragging right over here.
| | 02:22 | So the way I would like this to happen
is I want it just to be way down here.
| | 02:26 | I also want it to be instead of being 2, 3, 4, 5,
6, 7 etc I want to change its order up a little bit.
| | 02:32 | I want first name to be first.
| | 02:33 | So what we can do is we can take Suggest
over here in the list click and drag it
| | 02:38 | down you will notice these lines show up.
| | 02:40 | Once you put it below the Supplier buttons and
release you can take a look what happens to the page.
| | 02:46 | First name is now first in the list, which means it's
first in the tab order and last name company address line 1
| | 02:53 | Now shipping in address line 2 on mine got
a little screwed up so we are going to fix
| | 02:56 | that so just drag shipping down or address line 2 up.
| | 02:59 | Change the order and you will see what happens out there.
| | 03:03 | Now next thing we are going to do is come on over
to the right you have got Product Quantity Total.
| | 03:08 | It's doing it by column right now.
| | 03:10 | If you like it that way that's fine what you can do if
you want to is you can come on over here and try and change
| | 03:14 | that order manually and the way you can do it is if you
click on Product Field on the page here it selects it
| | 03:20 | in the Fields Navigation Panel over there.
| | 03:23 | If you click the Quantity1 the next one you want to
go to it will scroll down and select that one as well.
| | 03:27 | So what you can do is you can just do this take Quantity1
you see it right there and just drag it straight up,
| | 03:32 | put it below product, come on out here,
| | 03:36 | click on the Producttotal.0 you will see
it be selected we can then drag it straight up,
| | 03:42 | put it right below Quantity0 and work our way through.
| | 03:45 | So you can set the order manually like either clicking
over here to see where the field is or clicking over here
| | 03:51 | to scroll to it automatically and
then drag it into position.
| | 03:55 | Now click on the tab order button again you are going
to see that right now we are ordering it manually,
| | 03:59 | which is good because we tried column
first and it worked pretty well
| | 04:03 | but then we got to go through and manually drag this.
| | 04:04 | If you don't want to see the tab numbers you don't have to.
| | 04:07 | You can turn that off and you could
still drag these to change the tab order.
| | 04:12 | So tab order can be very important I am sure now
that you understand how it works you are going
| | 04:17 | to make it a better user experience for your end user
so that when they click they are not going to jump
| | 04:22 | to a part of a page they can go
in any order that seems to be logical.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Changing form design| 00:00 | One question I get all the time is you are creating
a form and you have gone through the trouble
| | 00:04 | of creating all these fields out here and everything
is done and then, somebody, yourself or someone else,
| | 00:09 | decides to change their mind on the design.
| | 00:12 | So they want a different color back there.
| | 00:14 | They want a different logo, that sort of thing.
| | 00:15 | What I used to do is I just scrapped the whole form and
start again, but with the form fields already out there
| | 00:21 | in Acrobat, you can simply replace
the design behind the form fields
| | 00:26 | and then adjust the form fields as
necessary to match to the new design.
| | 00:29 | I have got form field tab.pdf open right now.
| | 00:33 | If you have been following along, if you went to the tab or
the video, what I would do is I would close it up and save it
| | 00:38 | if you would like and then reopen it, you will see
it back in this view here and not in editing mode.
| | 00:43 | And what we are going to do is we
are going to replace the design.
| | 00:45 | So to do that, we are going to the Pages panel.
| | 00:47 | We could also use the Document menu up top,
but I tend to use this because it's visual.
| | 00:51 | If you right-click or Ctrl-click on
page 1, you'll see Replace Pages.
| | 00:56 | Click Replace Pages, so choose Form Redesign,
that should be the new page that we have out here,
| | 01:02 | you should see all the PDF files, and click Select.
| | 01:06 | Now, what's going to happen here is typically
you are trying to replace a PDF with a PDF.
| | 01:10 | So, what I did was I went back to InDesign where I made this,
made these slight design changes, saved it as a PDF again
| | 01:17 | and then just stuck it somewhere in a folder, on the
desktop folder, etc. All we are going to do is we are going
| | 01:22 | to use that to replace the design behind the form.
| | 01:24 | It's going to say, we are going to replace
pages 1 to1 of 1 with pages 1 to1 of 1.
| | 01:29 | It's a little overdone with that, but that's fine.
| | 01:31 | Click OK, you should get it out there, are you sure, yes.
| | 01:37 | Form fields are already still there, you
can go out, you can start working again
| | 01:41 | and if you look things are a little bit off so we need to
do a little fix here, close the Pages Navigation panel,
| | 01:47 | go to the Forms task button, choose Add or Edit Fields.
| | 01:50 | Now, we'll be able to see that the bottom
half of the form has moved down slightly.
| | 01:55 | I think we are going to be lucky here in that all we've
got to do is shift all these fields down a little bit.
| | 02:00 | So to select them all, simply click and drag across, start
with there's nothing, click and drag, select all the fields.
| | 02:05 | We should be able to select them all and we can either
use our arrow key or down arrow key on our keyboard
| | 02:11 | or we can click and drag straight
down if you want to move this.
| | 02:15 | So I'll click and drag straight down here.
| | 02:16 | I can see that I have got him selected, I have got to kind
of eyeball this, get him roughly where I want him,
| | 02:21 | release the mouse and there we go, not too bad.
| | 02:24 | The only things that we have got to watch
out for is Submit and Reset buttons.
| | 02:27 | I will zoom in a little bit so you can
see those clicking the plus up top.
| | 02:30 | And those are a little bit off here.
| | 02:33 | So what I might do is click somewhere to deselect all
the fields, take the reset, drag it in position there,
| | 02:38 | take submit and the problem with submit is we are
trying to cover up a button in the design so we may have
| | 02:43 | to make this a little bit bigger, just
to cover it up, drag it over that one
| | 02:48 | and it's going to cover up that part of the design.
| | 02:50 | there we go, not too bad.
| | 02:53 | So you can easily replace the design behind a
form without having to redo the entire form.
| | 02:59 | This can save you loads of time.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
3. Distributing Acrobat FormsDistributing forms via Acrobat.com| 00:00 | Now that your PDF is ready to go and you have got your form
all ready to fill out, you need to get it to some people.
| | 00:05 | So, we need to use a distribution method that's
how to build in Acrobat or you can send it
| | 00:10 | to other people if you email or put it up on a website.
| | 00:13 | By clicking up on Forms, I have
form_distribute_acrobat.pdf open right now.
| | 00:18 | What we can do is we can use to
Distribute Form method built into Acrobat.
| | 00:22 | By clicking Distribute Form, it gives us three choices for
how we want to collect the responses from our recipients.
| | 00:30 | You have got the ability to click on this popup menu
to go through acrobat.com which is a free service,
| | 00:36 | you can manually collect all these responses in your
email inbox and then kind of pull them altogether,
| | 00:41 | or you can use your internal server to be able to do that.
| | 00:44 | In this video, we are going to focus on acrobat.com.
| | 00:46 | Now down here, you are going to see, it literally
explains the process to you, which I find really helpful.
| | 00:51 | Gets basically an email everyone, send a link to them.
| | 00:54 | What they do is they open it up;
they can open in Acrobat or Reader
| | 00:57 | and even previous versions of Acrobat or Reader than 9.
| | 01:00 | They are going to respond, they are going to click on Submit
button or click a button up top, it's going to recollected
| | 01:05 | and they are all going to be aggregated or pulled into a
single file for you to kind of keep track of everything.
| | 01:10 | So, I click Next, it's going to ask
you to put in an Adobe ID to do this.
| | 01:15 | Now, if you don't have an Adobe
ID, you can get one, it's free.
| | 01:19 | If you click Create Adobe ID, doesn't
ask for much personal information at all.
| | 01:22 | I am going to type in my Adobe ID right here, and once you
type this in, you are not going to have to do this again.
| | 01:31 | It actually remembers it in the preferences
for Reader or full version of Acrobat.
| | 01:35 | Depending on the version of Acrobat you
have, usually later versions, 8 or 9.
| | 01:39 | I will click Sign in, it's going to authenticate
my ID, make sure that I am who I say I am.
| | 01:44 | It's then going to take me to this
Distribute Form dialog box
| | 01:46 | which is basically an email dialog here
asking me "Who do you want to invite?
| | 01:50 | Who do you want to get to fill out this form?"
| | 01:53 | So right now it's saying, "Here is
your delivery method, acrobat.com."
| | 01:56 | If you want to change that, let's say you want to email
or do something different, you can click Delivery Method
| | 02:00 | and it will take you back to the previous screen,
if you want to go to your Outlook address book
| | 02:04 | or some other email address book, you can click to -- what I
am going to do is I am going to simply email here, someone.
| | 02:10 | We can invite several people if we want to
and there are a lot of people we can do.
| | 02:14 | There is an N user license agreement for
doing this, you can check out in adobe.com.
| | 02:19 | You can see the subject and it
automatically creates a message for you.
| | 02:21 | So, this is the email the people will get.
| | 02:23 | So, it is telling them that they are going to get a link.
| | 02:25 | When they click the link, it will be down here and
they don't have to have Reader 9 or Acrobat 9 or later.
| | 02:31 | Down towards the bottom you will see Access Level.
| | 02:33 | Now, this can be really important, because
you might want to limit who accesses this.
| | 02:37 | If you want to limit the access to the person
you are sending this to, choose Limited access.
| | 02:42 | If you want to keep it open for
anybody, so that they could --
| | 02:44 | maybe student1 could fore this onto
other people, choose Open access.
| | 02:48 | That's what I will do.
| | 02:49 | Now, it's going to ask you if you want to collect
name and email recipients to provide optimal tracking.
| | 02:56 | I found that this can be really good, it could also be
annoying for certain people, because if you turn this on,
| | 03:01 | before they can see the form, they could have to
put in basically what it says, their name and email.
| | 03:06 | So, I want to turn that off for
right now and we will click Send.
| | 03:10 | Now, if you look down in the lower right,
it's going to say Creating responses file.
| | 03:14 | What happens here is when you do this, it's going
to take this file, it's going to make a copy of it,
| | 03:20 | it's also going to do something called Extend the features
in Adobe Reader, so that Reader users can get in here
| | 03:25 | and fill out the form and certain versions of Adobe
Reader can actually save the form data if they want to.
| | 03:30 | Once it has don't its job here and it has actually
uploaded the file to acrobat.com, it's going to open for me
| | 03:35 | as the initiator here, my Review Tracker.
| | 03:38 | So, I can see all the forms that I have distributed.
| | 03:40 | I can see different information about them,
things like where the Response file is located.
| | 03:45 | This is the file where everybody's responses, everybody's
form data is going to get pulled into a single file.
| | 03:51 | It's going to tell me that this is active, it's still
collecting data, when it was sent, when it was distributed,
| | 03:57 | who can access this and the response
is down at the bottom down here.
| | 03:59 | We would be able to see that who we have sent this to,
| | 04:02 | I can see right here student1@evolve
and whether or not they have replied.
| | 04:06 | Also it gives you date and time down here, so there's a lot
of great information to be able to keep track of people.
| | 04:11 | You can email the recipients if you need to, maybe
send a nice little note saying, "Please do this."
| | 04:16 | You can also add other recipients or
other people to fill out the form.
| | 04:19 | Now, you can also see I am jumping around here, where
you will see Stop Collecting Data which is going to say,
| | 04:23 | no one else can fill out the form if you decide
that we are done or you can open the original form
| | 04:28 | to see what it looks like, just to make sure.
| | 04:30 | At the very top, I jumped over this, we
are going to see the View Responses file.
| | 04:34 | This is located somewhere on your hard
drive and it is a copy of the original form
| | 04:39 | and everything is going to get pulled in there.
| | 04:40 | So, every time somebody fills out the form
and send it to you, you will get that.
| | 04:44 | We have sent this off to a user, what I would
like to do is we are going to switch users here,
| | 04:47 | I am going to show you what it looks like
from student1@evolveseattle from their eyes.
| | 04:51 | So, I have switched to users, now I am on Mac's myth and if
you take a look, I am in my email, I am going to see email
| | 04:58 | that I got from that Brian Wood guy and you are going to see
| | 05:00 | in here the email itself says,
invited to complete this form.
| | 05:04 | You can use Acrobat or Reader to do it; you don't
have to have Reader 9 or Acrobat 9 to do it.
| | 05:09 | When you are finished, click Submit to return your data and
down here it's going to tell you need to click on the image
| | 05:13 | to retrieve your file or this little link.
| | 05:15 | So, I will click on the image, looks pretty good.
| | 05:17 | Go up to the browser, it's going to go up to
acrobat.com, so it's going to try and find that.
| | 05:22 | You got to have an internet connection obviously; otherwise
you wouldn't be able to get email, that was kind of obvious.
| | 05:26 | So, it's going to come to the acrobat.com, it's
going to ask you a couple of questions here,
| | 05:30 | it's going to literally say "Okay, do you want to
download it or do you want to preview this form?"
| | 05:35 | Now, what's happening here is when the initiator
Brian Wood started all this, he copied it up there,
| | 05:40 | went through and copied up to acrobat.com,
it's sitting up there now
| | 05:43 | and you as the person filling this
out, can see it right now.
| | 05:47 | If you want to click Preview and just look at it, you are
not going to interact with it and you can download it later.
| | 05:52 | But to actually fill it out, we are going to click Download.
| | 05:54 | So, on clicking Download, it's
going to open it up in a browser.
| | 05:57 | Now, if I can't do that, it's going to
try and open up in Acrobat or in Reader,
| | 06:02 | if you don't have so far, it maybe use the Firefox.
| | 06:04 | It will try and ask you to download it, so
you can open it yourself in Reader or Acrobat.
| | 06:07 | You can see right here, it's opening in
my browser, in the Internet Explorer.
| | 06:11 | I can see, I have got my toolbars and everything up top
and in certain versions of browser, usually 8 and 9,
| | 06:16 | we can see this purple bar along the
top telling us to highlight the fields
| | 06:20 | and there is a button called Submit Form.
| | 06:22 | Now, in certain earlier versions of Acrobat or Reader,
that button will not appear, this bar will not appear.
| | 06:28 | So, there is a Submit button on the
form, which we did create earlier.
| | 06:32 | To go through, we can start filling this out, it's all live,
we fill out the form, start going through and I won't go
| | 06:39 | through everything here, but we can go through and fill
out the form, get ourselves some information going here.
| | 06:43 | You are seeing it's doing the totals and everything.
| | 06:46 | I will just pick a couple of things here, looks great.
| | 06:49 | I could do to assign the form; I
can pick some different options.
| | 06:53 | Now, we are ready to submit, like I said in certain versions
of Acrobat you are going to click the Submit button,
| | 06:57 | you want to have one of those or you are going to simply
click Submit Form in later versions of Acrobat or Reader.
| | 07:02 | By clicking Submit Form, it's going
to take that form data and send it up.
| | 07:08 | It's kind of underwhelming in some ways because it's
not going to do anything magical like email or anything,
| | 07:14 | it actually takes the form data
and sends that up to acrobat.com.
| | 07:18 | In certain versions of Acrobat or Reader,
you can save this with the form data.
| | 07:22 | But my job is done, I fill out the form, I
have clicked Submit Form and I am all done.
| | 07:27 | So, what we are going to do is we are going to switch
back over to Brian Wood and show you what it looks
| | 07:30 | like when he receives the different responses from people.
| | 07:34 | Okay, so I am back to the initiator,
I am back to Brian Wood.
| | 07:36 | And now that somebody has fill out the form and now that
somebody has fill out the form and sent me form data,
| | 07:41 | what I am going to do is I am going
to check and see if they have.
| | 07:44 | So, there is a couple of ways to do this.
| | 07:45 | On Windows, if we go through, we have a little form tracker,
| | 07:49 | it's basically Adobe Tracker notification
in the lower right corner.
| | 07:53 | You can double click this to open the Tracker.
| | 07:55 | And Mac will just simply open up Acrobat and if you come
under the Forms task button, you will see Track Forms.
| | 08:01 | We can track forms, now what we
could also do is we could go through
| | 08:04 | and we could literally open up
what's called our Response file.
| | 08:08 | When you started as the initiator, you start with your
original form, what Acrobat does like I mentioned earlier,
| | 08:13 | I just want to blow over this point,
is it makes several copies of the file
| | 08:17 | and one of them is called your Responses file.
| | 08:19 | That PDF is the one that's going
to contain everybody's response.
| | 08:23 | So, in Form Tracker it will keep track of the form forever,
| | 08:26 | as long as you have it in here,
and if I want to stop it I can.
| | 08:29 | But as soon as I am ready to view the
responses, I can click View Responses,
| | 08:33 | it maybe copies next to where the original was.
| | 08:36 | So, I click View Responses, it will open the Response
file and it's going to tell me, it's going to say, "Hey,
| | 08:41 | welcome to your Response file, if you want to do
some things, here is some options you have got,"
| | 08:46 | you can check the new responses and you
can see right here, it actually just found,
| | 08:50 | automatically found the response from that person.
| | 08:52 | I can fill the responses, one of the best things
about this is you can export the responses;
| | 08:57 | you need to be able to use this somewhere.
| | 08:59 | You can archive them and you can add new responses.
| | 09:02 | If people have older versions of Acrobat or Reader, some
of them are not going to let them go up tack about to kind
| | 09:07 | of do that process, if they have earlier versions, it's
going to export the file and you can add that yourself.
| | 09:13 | I will click GET STARTED, this is just a welcome stream
to show you what you can do and if you look out here,
| | 09:18 | you will see that I have got the response already and I can
see the names and things like that, let's go on out here.
| | 09:24 | As well as product totals, you can
see everything that they filled out.
| | 09:27 | If I scroll over to the right, I will see all
the different fields and everything going on.
| | 09:31 | Every time you get a Response file,
it will be filtered in here.
| | 09:34 | So, as people kind of do this, it will filter them.
| | 09:37 | In the upper right, you will see it says 1
response; it's tracking how many you have.
| | 09:42 | On the left, you got update, if you open up
this file, this is actually a PDF portfolio,
| | 09:48 | which you learned about in a previous
set called Acrobat Essentials.
| | 09:51 | If you click Update, it's going to go up an check
acrobat.com for you and see if there are any new responses
| | 09:57 | and it's going to tell you if there are any new.
| | 09:59 | It should do this automatically
every time you open it up as well.
| | 10:03 | By clicking Filter, you can go through and filter by
field name, who it's been sent from, their first name,
| | 10:08 | things like that and you have got a lot
of different things you can setup here.
| | 10:12 | I will click done, I can also export this data, now this
is one of the more important parts about doing all this,
| | 10:19 | because as you put all this together, that's
great that you can get this data in here,
| | 10:24 | but if you can't use it, what you are going to do with it?
| | 10:27 | So, first of all, I want to show you this, if I come on here
where it says Receive Date, if I come up to one of these,
| | 10:32 | I can see that's got a little PDF icon in the far
left, suppose you want to see the responses themselves.
| | 10:38 | There is couple of ways to do this, if
I double click on the little PDF icon,
| | 10:41 | it opens the original form with the responses filled out.
| | 10:45 | So, you can see what they typed in right there and it's
just a preview to show you what you have got going here.
| | 10:51 | Every time you get a new user filling out a response,
| | 10:54 | you will be able to go to the next
response and see what it looks like.
| | 10:57 | So, this is just like I said a preview.
| | 10:59 | There is an Open button up here, it allows you
to open the form to see their specific response.
| | 11:04 | So, maybe you want to save it out
for later use, you can do that.
| | 11:09 | At the very top, you are going to see a bunch of buttons
upper left, we have the homepage which is what we saw first.
| | 11:14 | So, if I click the homepage, that's what we see right
here, you can view the data, all the different responses
| | 11:20 | that you received as file details and that's what we were
actually trying to sort, this is just the detailed view,
| | 11:26 | if you want to you can sort by clicking a column view.
| | 11:30 | We can also go through and show each selected file,
| | 11:33 | as the button here called Preview the
selected file and that's what we just did.
| | 11:36 | Then you have got your welcome screen or your welcome page.
| | 11:39 | So, we can click to go there, I will click
back on Home, takes me back to the original.
| | 11:44 | Now, you have got some of this data and of course if I
had 50 responses, I would have them all listed in here
| | 11:49 | and you are ready to export these with as many as you
want selected, you can select them by Shift+Clicking,
| | 11:55 | Ctrl or Command+Clicking, if you come to Export, click on
Export, you will see Export all or just the selected ones.
| | 12:02 | I have only got one, so it's going to be
kind of underwhelming like I said earlier.
| | 12:05 | I will click Export all and what this allows you to do is
it allows you to save this data in two different forms.
| | 12:12 | So, I can save it as a CSV (Comma delimited), the
comma separated value or I can save it as XML.
| | 12:17 | So, just to give you a heads up, if you are not
familiar with these, CSV can go to things like Excel,
| | 12:23 | XML, a lot of databases understand XML data.
| | 12:27 | So, when you create the initial form, if you have the form
field names, named as same as what your database names are,
| | 12:34 | you could sync this data directly, the XMLs for a lot
of different types of databases especially on the web
| | 12:39 | or even on database that you have on your desktop.
| | 12:42 | So, two different file formats we can choose here.
| | 12:45 | Of course it's going to save it as the responses
file name which you can change out if you want to,
| | 12:48 | we are just trying to get data out, I will
click Save, it will save it out there.
| | 12:52 | You are going to see right there, how many were successfully
exported, that gives you a heads up as what's going on.
| | 12:57 | Now, the only other things we can do out here is
couple more things, on the left is the Archive button.
| | 13:01 | If you click Archive, it's going to allow you
to literally save this as yet another PDF file.
| | 13:05 | So, it will keep them altogether and this is great
because as you receive responses, so both of this is going
| | 13:11 | to start getting overwhelming, you
get 50 in 1 shot or ten seconds.
| | 13:15 | You can take a group or a batch how many you
want, pull them out of these responses files
| | 13:20 | in the Archive and then get the next batch.
| | 13:22 | So, this is just so you can keep them for
later use or it can be a less overwhelming.
| | 13:27 | We can also delete responses if you
don't want to keep them in here.
| | 13:31 | So, once again, going to the Forms Tracker, we can open
up what's called the Response file and this allows us
| | 13:36 | to see everybody's responses, at least form data,
pull them to a single source that we can export,
| | 13:41 | save out or archive for our own purposes.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Distributing forms via email| 00:00 | After your form is created distributing it
is probably going to be your next goal simply
| | 00:05 | because you made this form now what you do with it?
| | 00:07 | You need to send it out to people, have them fill it out
and you need to able to take all their different responses
| | 00:12 | and pull them together into a single PDF file.
| | 00:15 | We can use a wizard in here that
allows us to distribute this via email.
| | 00:19 | So I have got formdistributeemail.pdf open right now.
| | 00:22 | If you look out here you are going to see that
clicking on the Highlight field's button may turn them
| | 00:26 | on or off to see all the fields out here.
| | 00:28 | There's a Reset button out here
as well as an Email Submit button.
| | 00:33 | I want to talk about that just for a minute if
you submit via email the interesting thing here is
| | 00:37 | if you use the wizard you don't
have to have a Submit button.
| | 00:40 | As long as they have the correct version
of Acrobat we will take a look at that
| | 00:43 | in just a minute it will put a Submit button
up in the top up here that they can click on
| | 00:47 | and automatically send it back
to the initiator, which was you.
| | 00:51 | I will put a Submit button out here so I
can force it to use a certain email address.
| | 00:55 | If you don't have a Submit button what's going
to happen is it's going to go to your preferences
| | 00:59 | and check out your properties for who you are to
send this back to, so I want to show you that.
| | 01:03 | If you come under Edit on Windows or come under
Acrobat on Mac and go to preferences you will be able
| | 01:09 | to see that we have the identity section here.
| | 01:12 | Now if you do this for the first time and you
don't have an email address or anything setup
| | 01:15 | in Acrobat it's going to ask you to setup your identity.
| | 01:18 | I have already done that from previous videos so I
have got my name, title, organization if I wanted to,
| | 01:23 | you don't have to and your email address.
| | 01:25 | When you initiate a distribution via email in the Acrobat
wizard if you don't have a Submit button it's going to try
| | 01:31 | and use your email address right
there to be able to tell people
| | 01:34 | where to send it back to you when they click a button.
| | 01:37 | Either way it works, no submit with
this email address filled out correctly
| | 01:41 | or a Submit button sending it to a specific email address.
| | 01:44 | So click Cancel I will just show you this come under
the Forms task button you will see add or edit fields
| | 01:50 | that allows to edit these and I want you to
show you what the submit button looks like.
| | 01:54 | So if you click on submit here double click
on that to take a look at it you will be able
| | 01:59 | to see the properties, it's called submit.
| | 02:02 | If you go to actions tab you will see
that I have already set up an action here.
| | 02:06 | The way this works is you select a trigger
meaning when they do it I usually do a mouse up
| | 02:10 | and then what action happens when they perform that trigger.
| | 02:13 | So if you come on to Select Action here, take a look
at the very bottom of the list you will see Submit a Form.
| | 02:18 | If already done this you don't need to do it but if
you choose Submit a Form you would typically add it
| | 02:22 | to your list of actions and it's already here.
| | 02:25 | So click Submit a Form click Edit and
it will tell you what's going on here
| | 02:30 | so when somebody clicks Submit it is going
to mail it to this address right here,
| | 02:34 | which happens to be the same as
my identity it doesn't have to be.
| | 02:37 | You will notice right here the words Mail to Colon that's
really important in here simply because if you don't do
| | 02:44 | that in older versions of Acrobat it won't trigger.
| | 02:47 | Mail To tells the browser or whatever is actually working
with this to open up their desktop email application
| | 02:54 | or in certain later versions of Acrobat to be
able to open up something like a Gmail account.
| | 02:58 | So I have got my address right after no spaces, you can see
right here I have got a PDF document we are sending back
| | 03:04 | so you have got a lot of different
choices here in export format.
| | 03:06 | FDF is just the actual form data being sent back.
| | 03:11 | You could do that if you wanted to we
could also send a whole PDF itself.
| | 03:15 | You got to be careful about what's being sent back
and forth because a PDF file can be larger in size.
| | 03:20 | Whereas FDF is just the data you are
collecting so you need to keep that in mind.
| | 03:24 | HTML is typically if you are going
to send this via a CGI/Bin
| | 03:27 | or your web server XFDF is a little bit
more complex it's an XML file that deals
| | 03:32 | with certain server types so I am good PDF Click OK.
| | 03:37 | Click close to this it's got it out there and what
we are going to do is we are going to distribute this
| | 03:41 | so we are going to close the Form Editing you
will notice the Distribute Form button here.
| | 03:45 | As you edit this you could directly distribute from here but
I would rather close the Form Editing just a personal habit.
| | 03:50 | You will be able to see the form out there, a lot of
times I tend to test it out make sure Reset is selected.
| | 03:56 | Click on Reset make sure it's reset before you
distribute it and we are ready to distribute.
| | 04:00 | Come up to the Forms task button and you will see Distribute
Form it's going to ask you to save this if you want to.
| | 04:06 | Click Save.
| | 04:08 | It can ask you where to save it.
| | 04:11 | I always save it on my desktop
that's the way I typically do this.
| | 04:14 | So I will have one out there already that's fine.
| | 04:16 | You can probably save it anywhere you want to it's OK as long
as you know that that's where you are going to keep it
| | 04:21 | because once we do this what it's going to do is it's
going to create a copy of it for you and it's going
| | 04:25 | to start putting all the responses back in that one file.
| | 04:28 | So I typically try to put that where I
really want to keep it using on my desktop.
| | 04:33 | To look up here you are going to see Acrobat.com
we have inbox, we have internal server
| | 04:38 | and in previous videos what we did was
I sent up a shared review that's what
| | 04:42 | that there for, you may not see that, that is OK.
| | 04:44 | So we are going to choose in my email inbox it
says here is what we are going to do we are going
| | 04:49 | to distribute this thing via Acrobat or your email client.
| | 04:52 | People are going to open it up in Acrobat or Reader, they
are going to respond to it they are going to click a button
| | 04:56 | to send it back and you are going to collect all
the responses into a single portfolio document.
| | 05:01 | If you do this a lot you can tell it to remember
your choice for your inbox so you send this via email.
| | 05:07 | Click Next what do you want to do, do
you want to send it now via Acrobat
| | 05:11 | or would you rather save it local copy and send it later?
| | 05:14 | I usually send it now.
| | 05:15 | This is why I am going through the process.
| | 05:16 | If you want to you can send it
later on that's fine maybe you are
| | 05:19 | at an airport you don't have internet connection you
could set it up and then later on send it if you want to.
| | 05:24 | It will create an email in outlook or whatever email
you happen to have and you could just send it later.
| | 05:29 | There are all license limits for this.
| | 05:31 | There's an end user license agreement for details
you might want to click to check that out.
| | 05:34 | There are so only so many different things
we could send that to so you go click,
| | 05:38 | check the URL for details we don't need to
do that right now but I would suggest doing
| | 05:41 | that because you can't send this to
5 million people there's a limit.
| | 05:45 | Click Next and it's going to create an email for you
and you need to send it to a bunch of people you can't,
| | 05:50 | so you can either manually type in their email addresses or
if you click to you have an outlook address book something
| | 05:57 | like that you can actually use that so I will
just type in a couple of email addresses here
| | 06:01 | and what I will do is send is I will send it
to myself just because I am that way.
| | 06:05 | So I have got so with the window
and I will send it to myself.
| | 06:09 | I am not in my address book which is fine here we go.
| | 06:14 | I will click OK and if you take a look out here,
different addresses I will click cancel.
| | 06:19 | So what I will do is I will put a
semi colon between here we go click OK
| | 06:23 | and it's got all the different addresses out here now.
| | 06:25 | So like I said manually we could type these in.
| | 06:27 | If you look at top you are going to see it's
delivery method manually collect responses
| | 06:31 | in my email inbox this is the choice we have taken here.
| | 06:33 | If you click delivery method I am not going to do
it but it will take you back to previous screens
| | 06:38 | and ask you do you want to do Acrobat.com, do you
want to do a web server or do you want to do email?
| | 06:42 | So we are doing email here because
it's not going to be a large form
| | 06:45 | to millions of people just several people out here.
| | 06:48 | It's going to create a subject for you, look down
here is the message it is attaching the PDF itself
| | 06:54 | that it created you could reset the
default message because you can edit this.
| | 06:58 | If you click down here you can edit this message.
| | 07:00 | If you do edit the message it remembers that you can
click reset default message go back where you were
| | 07:07 | and for optimal tracking here it allows you to collect
the name and email from people that have received this
| | 07:12 | or sent it back , which I found to be useful because you
can tell exactly who send it back, whether or not it is them
| | 07:17 | because it maybe from a different email address.
| | 07:20 | So we are ready to send it off.
| | 07:21 | Now what happens here is when you do send this off
it's going to make it so that Reader users and Reader 8
| | 07:26 | and later can follow this along if you have a previous
version of Reader they can still fill this out they may have
| | 07:31 | to save it though that's one of the
issues, so click Send it will send it off.
| | 07:35 | So you can look right down here it is creating
responses file it's going to create a copy
| | 07:39 | of this file pretty much next to or
in the same folder as the original that's
| | 07:42 | where everyone's responses are going to go.
| | 07:44 | If you look down there it's an extending reader usage.
| | 07:47 | Now when you start this process
it's going to take you to tracker.
| | 07:50 | You are the one that initiated this so you probably
don't have to fill out the form to yourself.
| | 07:55 | The Review Tracker is a way for you to track who you
have sent it to whether or not they have responded.
| | 08:01 | It also allows you to see the original
form and where it's located.
| | 08:04 | This is so you don't have to keep track of all this stuff.
| | 08:06 | If you look over in the left you are going to see I have
got a lot of different review processes going on that's
| | 08:11 | because I have been doing all these different videos.
| | 08:12 | For you if you are just joining us right now if you are
just doing this one video right here you may simply have
| | 08:18 | under Forms Distributed, you may simply have one under here.
| | 08:22 | That's OK.
| | 08:22 | It remembers these as long as you have got Acrobat.
| | 08:25 | So you could remove these later on and I will
show you how to do that in a later bit later video
| | 08:29 | so right now it's telling me I have got 0
people responding so far I just sent it out.
| | 08:33 | 3 recipients have not responded, total recipients
are 3 I could email them this is after a little bit
| | 08:39 | of time saying hey hurry up you can add
more people to fill out the form if you want to
| | 08:44 | or if after a certain time people
haven't filled it out you can email them
| | 08:48 | and give them a terse little email
that says would you do that please.
| | 08:51 | So this is the tracker and what I would like to do now
is I am going to switch over to Rick and I want to
| | 08:56 | to show you what Rick would receive
as one of the respondents.
| | 09:00 | So now I am one of the recipients I am Rick Jones
and this is the email that Rick has received.
| | 09:05 | So after sending this form via email distributing via
email it's going to say right here you are invited
| | 09:11 | to complete this form you can use Adobe
Acrobat or Reader to fill in the form.
| | 09:15 | Click the attachment to open it in Adobe Acrobat or Reader,
when you are done click Submit to return the data.
| | 09:20 | If it won't work in your version of Reader or version
of Acrobat you can go get the new Reader 9 right here,
| | 09:26 | so we will do that I will just
come up here and open this up.
| | 09:29 | Now Rick has Reader so Rick is
going to open this up in Reader.
| | 09:33 | If you take a look the great thing about setting this all
up is if somebody has Acrobat 8 or later they can go through
| | 09:39 | and follow the process exactly as it is intended to do.
| | 09:42 | Now if somebody looks at an earlier version of Acrobat
or Reader you still have the Submit button built
| | 09:48 | on the form so somebody could still use that button.
| | 09:51 | If you look up top you are going
to see this is Reader 9 right now.
| | 09:53 | You will be able to see that I have got Please Fill
Out the Form, when you are done click the Submit form.
| | 09:58 | Last couple of versions of Reader
we have been able to see this.
| | 10:01 | So what they want you to do is they want you to use this
process of clicking the Submit Form button up here.
| | 10:05 | Now if you notice you will be able to
see that we have the comments out here.
| | 10:09 | You can actually apply comments sticky notes things
that to the document you can also digitally sign it.
| | 10:14 | And if you come under file right now
you will be able to see that in 8
| | 10:18 | and later in Reader we can actually
save or save a copy of the file.
| | 10:21 | This allows us to save our form data.
| | 10:23 | This is excellent.
| | 10:25 | As soon as you set up this email distribution via the form
it automatically enables some usage rights within Reader,
| | 10:31 | which means that they can save their data and save the file.
| | 10:34 | So this is excellent so even if they have Reader 8 and later
if you create and take a look at here we are going to go out
| | 10:39 | and fill out a few things so I will just type
in the name and I can zoom in if I want to.
| | 10:46 | I'll type in my last name here, get it
going go to company fill
| | 10:50 | out a few things here little price maybe quantity
should be doing some calculations out here.
| | 10:56 | And the one there we go more calculations, choose a
little bit of information out here let's actually type in no.
| | 11:04 | Now as your users are interacting with this thing you will
see that they don't have to have the fields highlighted.
| | 11:10 | I actually find it to be a little bit cumbersome sometimes.
| | 11:13 | If you click highlight fields that will go away you
can go out and sign and do whatever you need to do.
| | 11:17 | I am going to say no down at the bottom are you a
supplier and I will say I am the supplier in Illinois
| | 11:22 | and I am going to submit the form so I am all done.
| | 11:26 | Come up top you are going to see the Submit form button I
usually use this it's the most obvious button on the form.
| | 11:33 | What that does is it actually creates
the Send Form dialog box.
| | 11:37 | Now in Reader 8 and Acrobat 8 this dialog box will look a
little bit different but it will have similar functionality.
| | 11:42 | So you have the ability to set up from email address.
| | 11:45 | Now if you are in reader a lot of times it can't
guess who you are or guess what your email address is.
| | 11:50 | So you need to give it some kind of unique identifier here
| | 11:53 | so I am rickjones.grun@gmail.com,
here we go my full name is Rick Jones.
| | 12:03 | Now this email address and full name is part of the forms
process that we started with the email and Acrobat 9.
| | 12:09 | You won't actually see the email address
and full name in previous versions.
| | 12:13 | This is something new this is an option that
I set so you can tell it to remember if you like
| | 12:17 | and save it in your preferences if you want to.
| | 12:19 | If you click remember me it's going to remember the email
as well as your name in Reader so you won't have to type
| | 12:24 | that in again if you want to do that you can.
| | 12:27 | Click Send, what it's going to do is once again
it's going to ask you where do you want to send it,
| | 12:31 | how do you want to send this thing, do you have
outlook, do you got mail, what do you have.
| | 12:34 | So that's your desktop email app it's going to hand it over.
| | 12:37 | If you have Gmail Hotmail you can choose internet email.
| | 12:39 | He has got Outlook so I will click OK to this.
| | 12:43 | It's going to tell me that it's been
sent to my default email application
| | 12:48 | so I need to make sure that Outlook will send it.
| | 12:50 | So I will click OK.
| | 12:52 | The only thing I need to do is go to Outlook
and make sure that has sent the email.
| | 12:56 | It usually can get stuck in my outbox knowing me.
| | 12:59 | What we will do now is we will
switch over to show you what it looks
| | 13:02 | like when Brian receives Rick's email from this form data.
| | 13:05 | I am back to the initiator role now I am back to Brian
Wood the one who started all this submitting the form
| | 13:11 | and I have got 2 email responses from
Rick Jones and one from Windham Wood.
| | 13:16 | I will click on Rick Jones, Rick
Jones used Reader 9 and you could see
| | 13:19 | that what it did was it attached the PDF file called
Distributed and made that and tells me exactly what to do,
| | 13:24 | double click the attachment Acrobat will prompt
me to select a Responses File it's called.
| | 13:29 | If I click on Windham, Windham actually
used Acrobat 8 the previous version.
| | 13:34 | She was able to click the Submit button to
send it back and it did go through the process
| | 13:38 | of picking who to send it to that sort of thing.
| | 13:40 | Just like previous versions it even told her
to pick Outlook or whatever email she is using.
| | 13:45 | It formulated this email, attached
this and I received it back.
| | 13:48 | So what I am going to do is start with Rick Jones here.
| | 13:50 | I am going to follow the instructions so
as long as you still have the original
| | 13:55 | and it creates what's called the responses file as soon as
you start if you double click on the attachment it's going
| | 14:00 | to open up Acrobat I already had it open it's
going to ask me where the Responses file is.
| | 14:05 | This Responses file was created
automatically when you started the process.
| | 14:09 | I mentioned that it created copies.
| | 14:11 | I threw it all on my desktop so I could keep
track of it normally you won't put it there.
| | 14:15 | But it created a copy of the PDF
called Form Distribute Email Responses.
| | 14:19 | There it is, if you can't find that if it is
moved this little copy it should be right next
| | 14:23 | to the original PDF you started all
this with because it makes you copy.
| | 14:27 | You can go browse for it, so we will
see if it finds here I will click OK.
| | 14:33 | Goes out looks like it found it
so what it's doing here is opening
| | 14:37 | up a portfolio it actually generated a
portfolio and is showing me all the responses.
| | 14:42 | You can see right here it says welcome to your
form response file you can check for new responses,
| | 14:47 | you can filter your responses, you
can export them to a spreadsheet,
| | 14:50 | you can archive them into a little scroll
bar over here or you can add new responses.
| | 14:54 | This is a little getting started window.
| | 14:56 | All these little icons mean different
things, exactly what you see down here.
| | 14:59 | So click Get Started, take a look out here, you will be able
to see that this is in fact the portfolio and if you want
| | 15:05 | to brush up on portfolios take a look
at the section of the video on portfolios.
| | 15:09 | You can see that right now I am looking at every response
out here so I can see who it's from when it was received
| | 15:15 | and you could see all the different
fields in the document right here.
| | 15:19 | Windham sent me your response file as well so
I am going to add that too so I will go back
| | 15:22 | to my outlook I could have done it from
within Acrobat but I will do it from here.
| | 15:27 | I will double click on the Form
Distributed Email Distributed PDF.
| | 15:31 | If you look out here it's going to ask
me, which response file do you want
| | 15:34 | to add it to, it's the same one it remembers.
| | 15:36 | I click OK if you can't find it you got to browse
for it and there you go one new response is added.
| | 15:43 | So every time I get a response from someone via an email I
am going to go out and try and open it up or edit to this.
| | 15:49 | If you want to you are going to see right over here.
| | 15:51 | There's a bunch of buttons on the left over here.
| | 15:53 | You have got an Update button.
| | 15:54 | The Update button will allow you to go out and
check and see if there are any other responses.
| | 15:59 | You also have a filter, if you click on Filter it
allows you to filter according to field name selecting
| | 16:05 | from you can see all the different fields out here if you
want to and if you don't want to sort according to this,
| | 16:11 | click on a menu to close that up I
will click Done in the lower left here.
| | 16:15 | You can literally come out here and
sort from From by clicking on From
| | 16:19 | or Receive Date or however you want to sort.
| | 16:21 | It literally sorts up and down in order
every time you click on the column.
| | 16:25 | If you want to export this data take a look here you
can export the selected people's responses or we can
| | 16:31 | export all.
| | 16:33 | This is probably the reason why we are doing this.
| | 16:35 | You are are trying to get this data in, not just to
see what they did but to be able to export it.
| | 16:40 | If you click Export and choose Export All what it allows
you to do is it allows you to take all this data and export
| | 16:47 | as a comma separator or a common
delimited file or XML data.
| | 16:52 | Now comma separator allows you to take it over to an
application such as Excel or even Word or InDesign one
| | 17:00 | of those programs or certain types of
databases you can take this information to.
| | 17:04 | XML files pretty typically saved for a database
or a server for a website or something like that
| | 17:11 | but if I choose the CSV Comma
Separated Value and save it out here.
| | 17:15 | There's my responses you can see they are exported what I
can do is I can take that file open it directly in Excel
| | 17:21 | and take a look at the data which is what I am going to do
let me minimize everything get out to the desktop.
| | 17:25 | As you should be able to see I got all
of my forms filled out here.
| | 17:27 | You can see all the different copies here.
| | 17:29 | Forms Distributed, Forms Response I
will open up the Excel file right here,
| | 17:34 | take a look at it you will see the Excel
and there's all my data in a table.
| | 17:38 | So this could be exported you can send this off to
wherever you need to send it to all sorts of things.
| | 17:43 | I am going to go back to the Acrobat file
| | 17:46 | so from this portfolio we can export data
from individual users or from everybody.
| | 17:51 | You can also archive this data.
| | 17:53 | If you want to archive it choose Archive
All this allows you to save it out.
| | 17:57 | It will actually create a new response
file or an existing response file.
| | 18:01 | This is just a PDF that has the word Responses in it but
if you want to make a second copy so you can save it
| | 18:07 | for later on and maybe you want
these two people or this state
| | 18:10 | to be saved you could have it be a different response file.
| | 18:13 | So if you take a look in there you
will see it says responsesarchive.pdf.
| | 18:17 | You got to be careful with how many
underscores and names you name these things
| | 18:22 | because they can get pretty carried away pretty quick
but it allows you to save a nice archive for yourself.
| | 18:26 | It's kind of like saving a copy
of the state you have it in now.
| | 18:29 | I will click Cancel not to do that and if you want
to if you click on the user out here or the data
| | 18:34 | from someone you can actually delete
their data if you would like.
| | 18:37 | So there's a lot of things we can do out here.
| | 18:39 | If you come to one of these users like let's say
Windham Wood right here and if I come to the PDF icon
| | 18:45 | and double click on that what it does is it opens
up the original form the distributed form I sent
| | 18:51 | and it fills it out with all of their data.
| | 18:53 | This is just a visual to see exactly
what they filled out because it's kind
| | 18:57 | of hard to tell in column view what they did.
| | 18:59 | Now if you want to see the next person you will see
over here there's a couple little arrows over here.
| | 19:03 | Click on the arrow to the right and it will preview
the next data, the next data that somebody sent.
| | 19:08 | So you can see everything that I filled out there,
| | 19:10 | even though I was Rick Jones I filled
that as my own name that's fine.
| | 19:13 | So to click next it will go back
to the previous and there we go.
| | 19:17 | If you want to open these files as separate documents
you can click open and it will open as a separate PDF
| | 19:23 | so maybe you can print it or save it or send it to somebody.
| | 19:25 | After double clicking and viewing the data within the
form take a look up the buttons up top you are going
| | 19:31 | to see it says previous selected file you can always go back
to the homepage to visualize all the data and if you want
| | 19:36 | to see the data in a little different
sort here you can use a file details.
| | 19:41 | If you click File Detail here it will
show you in a little different view.
| | 19:44 | It's similar to what we just saw but it
gets rid of a lot of the buttons out there.
| | 19:48 | This allows you to sort and see
exactly what they filled out.
| | 19:51 | There's a huge scroll bar down here at the bottom
| | 19:53 | to see exactly all the data they
filled out as well, so you can do that.
| | 19:58 | Click back on the Home View.
| | 19:59 | It will take you back where you were.
| | 20:03 | If you look at here you will also see that you have the
ability to save this data, to print this and if you want
| | 20:09 | to share this if you click on this button here you can
share this with people via Acrobat.com or via email.
| | 20:15 | If you click on Modify up here you will be able to go
out and delete it's a lot of different things that we do
| | 20:20 | over in the left here basically the same thing you
have seen but one of the things I want to point
| | 20:24 | out in here is you can actually secure this thing
with a password if you don't want somebody getting
| | 20:29 | in here you can secure the whole
portfolio not just individual parts
| | 20:33 | of the file but the whole thing with a password.
| | 20:35 | This is so that people can either not open it, not print it,
| | 20:38 | not edit it that sort of thing
that you can keep it pretty secure.
| | 20:41 | Now the next time when you are all set here you got this
Responses file you can simply close this up if you want to
| | 20:46 | but the next time you need to add people you could go to
email, find their email and double click or if you click
| | 20:52 | on Add right over here it goes to the Add button
it's going to ask you to pick a form file.
| | 20:57 | This is if you have saved somebody's response out you
saved the PDF that they had as attachment out somewhere
| | 21:02 | and maybe in a folder and that's what I typically do.
| | 21:05 | You can then add a bunch of files at once
instead of double clicking from your email.
| | 21:08 | So that's one way you can work with this.
| | 21:10 | I will click Cancel.
| | 21:11 | This is an excellent way to view all your data.
| | 21:14 | It's also searchable.
| | 21:15 | If you look up here you can search all the data
somebody filled out it will sort for you automatically
| | 21:20 | but this response file allows you to automatically include
different people, have everything in one single place
| | 21:26 | so that you can Export, Filter, View, Add do whatever
you need to do out here to get this stuff done.
| | 21:30 | So working with an Email Distribution for your form
is a way for you to make it so that Acrobat can take care
| | 21:36 | of the heavy lifting for you, people get the email, they
submit it back to you and your job is to simply double click
| | 21:42 | or add via the add button here to
get their attachments pull them all
| | 21:46 | into one single response file and
keep that for your records.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Distributing forms via a website| 00:00 |
So the last type of distribution with
the form I would like to talk to you
| | 00:03 |
about from Acrobat is distributing
via a CGI or a Web Server.
| | 00:07 |
CGI typically stands for Common Gateway Interface and
it's usually a folder that most all websites come with.
| | 00:14 |
It has a little script inside of it, usually like a Perl
Script or something like that where you can send data
| | 00:20 |
as a form using a PDF or an HTML form because
your HTML forms is simple forms can use this.
| | 00:26 |
You can send it to the CGI.
| | 00:27 |
What it does is it processes the information out of
the PDF itself and allows that to be sent via email
| | 00:34 |
or whatever the little script does, sends it off to
somebody, sends it to a database that sort of thing.
| | 00:39 |
I have got a simple method here I want to show you and the
reason why I want to show you this is because it's something
| | 00:44 |
that a lot of people want to do and this is
not always going to work on every server.
| | 00:47 |
I am just going to put that out
there but most servers have this.
| | 00:50 |
It's a really simple method of doing it
but it's sort of like a gateway into later
| | 00:54 |
on working with other server functionality.
| | 00:56 |
So I have got form distribute cgi.pdf open right now.
| | 01:00 |
Before we even get this thing going what we
need to do is we need to add some things to this
| | 01:03 |
and I have already got a few of them out there.
| | 01:05 |
I just want to show you what I did.
| | 01:06 |
So if you come to the forms button up
top you will see add or edit fields
| | 01:10 |
that allow us to get in here and start editing these.
| | 01:12 |
If you notice we have got a Submit button down here.
| | 01:15 |
I have already put the button there but
it's not going to do what we need yet.
| | 01:17 |
I am going to have you set that up.
| | 01:19 |
And I will also point out a couple
of things called hidden fields.
| | 01:22 |
Come to the Submit button.
| | 01:23 |
You should be able to double click or right
click or Ctrl-click and go to properties.
| | 01:27 |
You will see right now that it actually
has a submit a form action set on it.
| | 01:33 |
Now if you are going to create a button yourself you
would use the Button tool, you could select an action
| | 01:38 |
and literally choose Submit a Form, add
it to your list here and it would show up.
| | 01:43 |
It would ask you what you wanted to do.
| | 01:44 |
So what we are going to do is we
are going to edit this instead.
| | 01:46 |
So if you click Submit a Form, edit the action.
| | 01:49 |
It will take you out to submit form selections dialog box.
| | 01:53 |
Now this is a simple email link we have right now.
| | 01:56 |
This is if you want to distribute it to somebody else,
send it off and maybe what they would like to do is click
| | 02:01 |
on the Submit button and actually attach
the contents as an email and send it back
| | 02:05 |
to you so we can kind of pull it altogether.
| | 02:07 |
We are going to do something little different.
| | 02:09 |
We are going to send this off to a web server instead.
| | 02:12 |
Typically what you need to have
is you need to have a web server.
| | 02:15 |
This could be a website that's already setup.
| | 02:17 |
It could be an actual justice server that's out there
that people can access so I am going to start to put
| | 02:22 |
in my web server address so it's going to
be something like http://www.yourwebsite/.
| | 02:30 |
Now the form server I am typing in here you won't be able
to use simply because it's my website and I can access
| | 02:37 |
or tell people whether or not they can access
this little script that we have got here
| | 02:41 |
so I am going to type in what I have got.
| | 02:44 |
Cgi-bin and the rest of this is going to be proprietary.
| | 02:49 |
| | 02:51 |
What I am doing is I am actually typing in the folder
path as well as the script that's in that folder.
| | 02:57 |
So this is what I am going to it send to.
| | 02:58 |
I have got a little script waiting.
| | 03:00 |
What I am going to do is I am going to show you that little
script back over in Dreamweaver just in a second here
| | 03:04 |
but we are just pointing to it
up on the web server right now.
| | 03:07 |
So this is the black box stuff that you need to talk to
IT if you don't do web developing you can simply tell them
| | 03:13 |
that if you have a script or some kind of server script you
can send this information as HTML just like an HTML form.
| | 03:19 |
So once I tell it where to go got it to this
little script I am actually going to send this data
| | 03:24 |
as HTML so this is what's going to happen.
| | 03:26 |
Somebody gets the PDF.
| | 03:28 |
They open in the browser or in Acrobat.
| | 03:30 |
They click the Submit button.
| | 03:31 |
It's going to take all the data out here, basically
the form field names and the data inside the field.
| | 03:37 |
Format it as an HTML document and send
it to this little script right here.
| | 03:41 |
The script is waiting ready for the data.
| | 03:43 |
If I want to I can choose different
fields, all the fields only certain fields.
| | 03:47 |
This is a good idea if you have things like tips or stuff
like that you don't need to send the data on or the date
| | 03:53 |
that you may already know that on your server etc.
You can also convert dates to a standard format.
| | 03:59 |
If you look down here, here is the date standard format.
| | 04:02 |
I tend not to that unless I am
trying to go to certain databases.
| | 04:05 |
Click OK that sets it up.
| | 04:07 |
This is what's going to happen it's
going to submit a form, click close.
| | 04:11 |
Now when you work with certain types of scripts on
servers lot of times when you send this data off
| | 04:17 |
to that script it's going to be very generic, it's going to
send exactly like I said the field name as well as the data
| | 04:24 |
but it's not going to know who to send the data to,
it's not going to know what to do after it gets the data
| | 04:28 |
so we typically have to add some hidden fields they are called.
| | 04:32 |
Now what I would like to do is I
am going to go over to Dreamweaver.
| | 04:34 |
I have got a bunch of things open right now but I am
going to go to Dreamweaver so this is our website.
| | 04:38 |
If you look down here you are going to be
able to see that I have got a Cgi-bin,
| | 04:41 |
which is a folder and I have got a script in here.
| | 04:44 |
I am going to open the Read Me and just show you this.
| | 04:46 |
I will double click this to open this.
| | 04:48 |
All scripts have a Read Me, which kind of give you an idea
of what you are going to do, how you are going to do this.
| | 04:53 |
Now I am going to scroll way down
here, way down sorry about this,
| | 04:57 |
scroll down and what I will be
able to see is form configurations.
| | 05:01 |
Let me go up just a little bit.
| | 05:02 |
Form configuration is what you got to concern yourself with.
| | 05:06 |
When you go to send this off there has
to be some hidden fields like recipient.
| | 05:12 |
Recipient you can see right here hidden
form inputs or hidden form fields.
| | 05:15 |
Recipient tells this little script who to send the data to.
| | 05:19 |
If I scroll down there's certain script I am using.
| | 05:21 |
Not all scripts do this.
| | 05:22 |
Allow you to do what's called a redirect.
| | 05:24 |
This means when somebody submits this data to the server,
| | 05:27 |
to the sole script where does it
send the user after they click submit.
| | 05:31 |
You can send them to a different web page.
| | 05:33 |
It says hey thanks for filling out
our form we have got your data.
| | 05:36 |
This is pretty standard Perl Script stuff.
| | 05:38 |
What we are going to do is we are going to
add these two and I have already added them.
| | 05:40 |
I just want to show you how they
are setup back in Acrobat.
| | 05:42 |
So these have to go in your Form in Acrobat.
| | 05:44 |
So I click back and form distribute cgi.
| | 05:46 |
I will be able to see down here that I didn't
care how big or small I made these things.
| | 05:50 |
I just set these out here.
| | 05:51 |
I have got two fields.
| | 05:52 |
One called Hidden1 and one called Hidden2
and I will show you how these are setup.
| | 05:56 |
So if you double click on Hidden1 it's going to open
up your text field properties, click on the general tab.
| | 06:02 |
Look out here you are going to see we got name
| | 06:04 |
so what I do is I just called it whatever I
wanted here I am going to call it recipient.
| | 06:09 |
The name of the field has to match what they said in that
little text file so let me go back to the text file.
| | 06:14 |
You will see right here we got redirect and
if I scroll up a bit we have got recipient.
| | 06:18 |
Lower case everything, it has to be that.
| | 06:20 |
You can see right here name equals recipient.
| | 06:23 |
Go back to Acrobat just to show you this.
| | 06:25 |
So I am going to call that recipient.
| | 06:26 |
It did not keep it, which it always does.
| | 06:30 |
You are going to tell it to be hidden.
| | 06:31 |
You want to do this otherwise people
are going to be interacting with this.
| | 06:35 |
Hide it on the page, which means
it's still there but it's hidden.
| | 06:38 |
I tend to do Read Only because I am paranoid.
| | 06:42 |
You can change the appearance but since it's
going to be hidden it really doesn't matter.
| | 06:45 |
If you go to options this is where
the big stuff happens here.
| | 06:48 |
You are going to go to default value right here.
| | 06:50 |
The default value is going to be the email address
of the person that you are sending this to.
| | 06:55 |
So this is going to be the recipient and
you could have different email addresses.
| | 06:59 |
I typically just do one here.
| | 07:01 |
It doesn't have to be you.
| | 07:02 |
It can be just about anybody else you want to send this
to and that's pretty much it so I am going to make sure
| | 07:06 |
that under format we have got no format set
things like that there's no validate or calculate.
| | 07:11 |
Click close.
| | 07:13 |
The next one we need to do is we need to
set up a redirect so where the page goes.
| | 07:17 |
So to be able to tell what to do double click on
Hidden2 here, opens up the properties, go to general.
| | 07:22 |
What I will do is I will go back over to
Dreamweaver and look at the instructions
| | 07:26 |
for that little script I will scroll down here.
| | 07:28 |
You will see we have to name another field called redirect.
| | 07:31 |
Now it gives you a ton of other things you can do like the
subject that you email or background color all that sort
| | 07:35 |
of thing but we really just need these two things and the
redirect you don't even really need but it's a nice thing
| | 07:41 |
because otherwise it will come up with the generic page
| | 07:43 |
that says hey thanks.
| | 07:44 |
So I will go back to Acrobat.
| | 07:46 |
I will call this field Redirect.
| | 07:48 |
It's going to be hidden and I typically make it Read Only.
| | 07:54 |
If you skip the appearance it's not going
to be seen so you need to worry about that.
| | 07:57 |
Click on Options and we have to set a default
value so your job is to type in a value here.
| | 08:03 |
This is going to be typically a web page not always.
| | 08:07 |
It could be another pdf file that you send them
to but it's typically going to be a web page.
| | 08:11 |
This web page is on my server.
| | 08:13 |
You won't be able to use this.
| | 08:14 |
Here we go.
| | 08:18 |
So I don't want to scroll or want to
do check spelling or do any of that.
| | 08:21 |
This is going to tell the little
script where to send someone as soon
| | 08:24 |
as they click Submit and that's basically it.
| | 08:28 |
So I will close this up.
| | 08:29 |
We are going to finish this out.
| | 08:32 |
I am just going to preview.
| | 08:33 |
Click on Preview, take a look , which
should show you all the fields out there.
| | 08:36 |
If you hover over Submit it should
show you where it's going to go.
| | 08:39 |
OK now the last thing we need to do here is we
need to save this so you can save it where you want to.
| | 08:43 |
I will do a quick save so File Save.
| | 08:46 |
This is where the magic comes in.
| | 08:49 |
You got it saved, you got it created.
| | 08:51 |
What we need to do is we need to get this PDF
up on the web server or at least a link to it
| | 08:55 |
on a web server so I will go back over to Dreamweaver.
| | 08:59 |
Now if you don't do websites, if you are just trying to
get this off to somebody else you are going to need to work
| | 09:04 |
in concert with the web developer or the IT
person somebody who has got this control.
| | 09:08 |
So what I have done as you take a look I have
actually got the form up here there it is right there.
| | 09:12 |
I am going to put it on a page and let me
open up the page here I will show you this.
| | 09:16 |
So that's in the form I will open this up.
| | 09:18 |
This is our website.
| | 09:20 |
I have got a nice little link here, which is going to link
directly to that form so you can see I have got form.pdf.
| | 09:27 |
What I have to do is I have got to post this new page with
this link as well as the PDF file so that they are both
| | 09:33 |
up there and once they are both up there
the magic should immediately happen.
| | 09:36 |
So I have got a web browser open here.
| | 09:38 |
I will open this up.
| | 09:40 |
Here is the page so I am going to go out there and browse
the website. I come to this page and I am like oh, look
| | 09:45 |
at this. Click to fill out a form. So I will click on that.
| | 09:48 |
As long as my PDF is up on the web server and this page
is there, which you can obviously see it is, I will click.
| | 09:53 |
I just made a link to the PDF.
| | 09:55 |
It's going to open up the PDF in
their browser if it's supported.
| | 09:59 |
Safari these days will be supported in Acrobat
9, as well as Firefox and Internet Explorer.
| | 10:04 |
Other browsers it will open it up
in Acrobat Reader and that's fine.
| | 10:07 |
They are going to go out and fill it
out. So it's interactive right out.
| | 10:10 |
They can fill out their stuff.
| | 10:13 |
Once they get down and down towards the
bottom, they will see the Submit button.
| | 10:16 |
They can click on that to send it.
| | 10:18 |
As soon as they submit this, what it's going
to do is it's going to send it to that script.
| | 10:21 |
Those two little hidden fields we have down here we
are going to tell the script who to email this to
| | 10:26 |
because it's just a simple email to someone as well
as where to redirect someone. So I click Submit.
| | 10:31 |
When a data is sent to that script. It said redirect it to
this page you can see it right here and here is what I get.
| | 10:38 |
'Thanks for filling out the Acrobat
form. We will be in contact shortly.'
| | 10:41 |
This like I said is a really a pretty
simple way of working with the web server.
| | 10:45 |
There's a lot more complex ways you can do
this and if you talk to your web developer,
| | 10:49 |
or if you are a web developer you will know that.
| | 10:51 |
Now the last thing I want to do is I want to show you
what I get in my email after somebody submits the form.
| | 10:57 |
You will actually get an email so I
send and receive here. Take a look.
| | 11:00 |
It's going to run through and it should give me an email.
| | 11:02 |
Now everybody that fills this out, you are going to
get an email. So I will be able to see right here.
| | 11:06 |
Anybody that filled it out and I can come
out here and click on Form Submission
| | 11:10 |
and what it does it shows me everything they
have filled out here, you can see it right there.
| | 11:15 |
I can take this data and send it to a
database, etc. Like I said, really simple way.
| | 11:20 |
This little script that I use is for really simple web
forms that allow you to send the data back but I wanted
| | 11:25 |
to show you that you do have the power to send a
pdf form as an HTML form so now you should be able
| | 11:31 |
to set it up so that you submit the data as HTML.
| | 11:34 |
You should be able to either hand it off or talk to
a web developer or if you are web developer, send
| | 11:39 |
that data off. How you get the data or where the data is
sent is usually up to that little script that's sitting
| | 11:44 |
up in the folder or some other application and it's an
easy way to be able to get the data from a bunch of people.
| | 11:50 |
Like I said earlier the last thing I want to point
out once again is if you follow this through,
| | 11:54 |
if you try and use what I have got out there, all the
different paths, things like that, you will probably come
| | 11:58 |
up in an error because every web
server has permissions built into it
| | 12:02 |
where only certain people can use those little
scripts, only certain peoples can use those pages to go
| | 12:07 |
to. So you are going to have to go through and talk to
someone who is web developer or yourself, figure it out,
| | 12:11 |
get that script, get another application,
some way to get this to work,
| | 12:15 |
but I just wanted to give you an idea of how this worked.
| | 12:17 |
| | 12:17 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Tracking forms| 00:00 | After you have distributed the form using Forms,
Distribute Form, you have the ability to track those forms.
| | 00:06 | We are going to go through in this video
and take a look at how to track the forms.
| | 00:10 | If you haven't started or distributed a form yet,
this really is not going to help you out too much.
| | 00:15 | You can see what I have done but you won't
have anything to look at on your screen.
| | 00:19 | So you might want to go back to Distribute
Forms and go through one of those processes.
| | 00:22 | Click Track Forms within Acrobat and what
we can see over here is we have the ability
| | 00:27 | to see both commenting review cycles and form tracking.
| | 00:31 | When you setup a form distribution, you send it
to a bunch of people in a bunch of different ways.
| | 00:36 | If you look on the left side over here
you are going to see that I have got a lot
| | 00:39 | of different processes I have already setup.
| | 00:41 | Every time you send off a form to be distributed
to a group of people, it saves it in the Tracker.
| | 00:46 | The Tracker actually saves the location of the pdf file
you started with and it tells you who you have sent it
| | 00:52 | to, whether or not they have responded and you can see the
responses plus there are other features we can look at.
| | 00:57 | Typically when you start out here- a lot of times if you
are starting from scratch, you haven't done any comment
| | 01:01 | or forms distribution. You are going to see these
minuses and plusses to the left of Review and Forms.
| | 01:08 | If you open these up by clicking on the plus
| | 01:10 | to the left there you probably won't see
anything under Distributed or Received.
| | 01:13 | Only when you do actually distribute or use that
distribution process or you have received a form
| | 01:19 | from someone will you actually see anything out here.
| | 01:21 | Typically when you start you are going
to see basically a summary out here
| | 01:24 | in the middle called Review Updates and Form Updates.
| | 01:27 | For forms, if somebody has sent you information
back typically if it's a shared review
| | 01:33 | or from acrobat.com, it will tell you that you haven't seen
this yet but somebody has sent you some information back.
| | 01:38 | So it kinds of gives you a nice information
right there, a nice little summary of things.
| | 01:41 | You will also notice that we have
either Turn on notification icon
| | 01:45 | or Turn off notification icon. On Windows only.
| | 01:48 | If you click on this, if it says turn
on right now, go ahead and click on it.
| | 01:52 | It should show up as a little icon
in your system tray at the bottom.
| | 01:56 | What this does is if somebody sends you forms and
it sends you something back let's say you have used
| | 02:02 | like I said a shared review via network folder
| | 02:04 | or acrobat.com, anytime somebody sends you something
back, this thing will popup with a little tip down here
| | 02:09 | and say "hey, you just got something back
from someone. Do you want to see it?"
| | 02:12 | If I hover over this you are going to see that it
says nobody sent me anything back yet and if I want
| | 02:17 | to see the Tracker you can double-click
this and it will open Acrobat automatically.
| | 02:21 | So on Windows we can see this.
| | 02:23 | Now you are also going to see on Mac and
Windows Turn Off notification inside Acrobat.
| | 02:27 | If you open up the form that you have
sent out and you see the response form,
| | 02:33 | which is the form that actually collects everything,
if you open that up it will actually tell you
| | 02:38 | in the pdf itself- there will be a little response
window up here it says "Hey you've got 3 new responses."
| | 02:43 | If you did something like a shared review or an
acrobat.com review you can turn that off if you want to.
| | 02:48 | I tend to keep it on because it tells you what's going on.
| | 02:52 | Now if you look on the left you will
see all the forms that I distributed.
| | 02:55 | Like I said yours maybe totally different,
you may have 1, you may have none but you have
| | 02:59 | to start it a distribution of forms to see these.
| | 03:02 | If you click on and I will click on one of these
out here, I have actually distributed one via email.
| | 03:07 | The Tracker views on the right side over here, the forms,
it's going to tell me exactly what's going on right now.
| | 03:13 | If you look right here you are going to
see that when you started distribution
| | 03:15 | of a form it's going to create a response file.
| | 03:18 | The response file is just a copy
of your form and it's a portfolio
| | 03:22 | where everybody's content, everybody's
responses, merge into one file.
| | 03:27 | Here is where mine is located right now.
| | 03:29 | It's telling it when all this started, when
it was distributed, how it was distributed
| | 03:33 | as an email attachment. You can open the original
form, you won't see anyone's responses in there
| | 03:39 | but you will see the form intact. If you
want to see people's responses and you want
| | 03:42 | to see what's called the response file click
View Responses. That lets you see the file itself.
| | 03:48 | If you look down here you are going to see
how many new responses there have been,
| | 03:51 | how many people have sent you the form data back, how
many people have not responded and the total number
| | 03:56 | of recipients that have sent you back information.
| | 03:58 | I am going to skip to these buttons down at the bottom.
| | 04:01 | This is a great summary of who you have sent it to, whether
| | 04:04 | or not they have responded and
the last time they did respond.
| | 04:08 | If you look here we have got this brian@evolveseattle
slacker, which actually says he has not responded yet.
| | 04:13 | So if you look right here we can go through and email
all the recipients and tell people things have changed
| | 04:19 | or we are going to move up the date that we need
this back by and certain things. It emails everybody.
| | 04:24 | You can add more people to this so suppose you realize
that you didn't sent it to your boss and you needed
| | 04:28 | to include him or her in this you can do that.
| | 04:31 | As soon as I click Add Recipients it creates
this little Distribute Form Email for me
| | 04:35 | to hand off. I will click cancel.
| | 04:38 | This is the best one right here, Email Recipients who
haven't responded. So that Brian character is going
| | 04:43 | to get an nice terse email, which says do it.
| | 04:47 | That's a great way to keep track
of things, keep on top of this.
| | 04:49 | And this is a simple distribute via email.
| | 04:53 | If you had a shared response or you have an
acrobat.com, there's a couple extra things you can do.
| | 04:59 | You can see what's called access level so you can tell
people whether or not anyone can fill it out or they have
| | 05:04 | to have some kind of email address
or some kind of login information.
| | 05:08 | You can stop collecting the data, this is
via a shared network folder or acrobat.com.
| | 05:13 | So you can say no more, you can open
the original form like I said,
| | 05:16 | and for the most part the rest
of it is pretty much the same.
| | 05:19 | People that have also received the forms can also view
a Tracker even in Reader, certain versions of Reader,
| | 05:25 | so they will be able to see just some general
information about whether or not they have responded,
| | 05:29 | opened the original form and things like that.
| | 05:31 | Now just a couple of housekeeping things here. When
you do work with the Tracker if you come up to one
| | 05:35 | of these Tracker views and you right-click or Ctrl-
click on Mac, a lot of the same things that we see
| | 05:40 | over in the right side you will be able to do
over here but there's a couple you won't see.
| | 05:44 | For instance, Remove Responses From Tracker.
| | 05:47 | You can actually stop it from
tracking this and get rid of it.
| | 05:50 | After the process is done suppose, you know, it's
two months later and these are starting to build
| | 05:55 | up because it actually saves these in here.
| | 05:57 | You can remove these from Tracker so it no longer tracks
it and it just keeps the most up-to-date ones in here.
| | 06:03 | You will also notice that you can
create a pdf of the Tracker details,
| | 06:06 | which is great because that's an excellent way to be
able to take not only the response file, all the responses
| | 06:12 | from people, but a nice summary of what people have done
out here whether or not they've, you know, actually emailed
| | 06:17 | or responded and put it in there
so you will have it all together.
| | 06:20 | You can also create folders. It's a
great way to keep things organized.
| | 06:24 | If you tend to distribute forms to let's say certain clients
| | 06:27 | or you know internal/external, you can create
folders in here by clicking Create Folder.
| | 06:33 | This allows you to enter a name for a folder so I can
call this you know Jones or Jones Project. Click OK.
| | 06:40 | That's puts the folder out there and then what we can
do is we can organize things a little neater out here.
| | 06:44 | So if you right-click on this distributed form you
will see that we have Send To Folder and we can send it
| | 06:49 | to the top level, which is just inside
distributed or we can send it to the Jones folder.
| | 06:53 | Choose Jones and it will just simply put it in there.
| | 06:56 | It's just a way for you to organize things out
here, which makes it a little bit easier for you.
| | 06:59 | Now the last thing I want to point out is
just right down here where it says server status,
| | 07:03 | if you actually join an email review you
are not going to see things down here.
| | 07:07 | If you start a review process or if you join a
review process, they are commenting your forms
| | 07:12 | and we are constricting forms, and you use a
shared review or use acrobat.com, it's going
| | 07:17 | to tell you the server status down there.
| | 07:19 | As a matter fact for the form distribution
I have, I can see network resource not found.
| | 07:23 | Usually that means you are not connected to acrobat.com
or you are not connected to the network shared folder.
| | 07:29 | It's just telling you whether or not things
are OK. If you see a green checkmark down here
| | 07:33 | that means things are good to go, all your workflows are OK.
| | 07:36 | Typically if you see something like a yellow
yield sign, like this one right here, you can see
| | 07:39 | that there are errors because things have been disconnected.
| | 07:42 | When you work with review Tracker
I really suggest getting in here.
| | 07:45 | Now that you understand what it does and how it
works. It's a great way to keep track of everything
| | 07:50 | without having you sit there and figure out were the
files are, who has responded, who hasn't with your forms
| | 07:55 | and everything is collected in a
single location using the Tracker.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Enabling usage rights in Reader| 00:00 | For a long time one of the biggest stumbling
blocks with forms in Acrobat, the fillable kind,
| | 00:06 | was that you'd send it off to somebody and somebody didn't have
Acrobat, they just simply had Adobe Reader on their machine,
| | 00:11 | they would fill up their form,
| | 00:12 | and they could not save that form itself with the data
inside so if they decided at that moment they had to run to a
| | 00:18 | meeting or something like that they had to have print it.
| | 00:21 | Or you had to have a button that allowed
them to click and submit it back to you
| | 00:25 | or they had to leave it open
| | 00:27 | because it would not save the data.
Nowadays in Acrobat 9 as well as in 8
| | 00:31 | we have the ability to extend the right to Reader. So for Reader
7 and later what you can do is for a form that you create,
| | 00:39 | if you come under the Advanced menu it is coming down
in Standard Pro and Pro Extended in Acrobat 9, you'll see
| | 00:46 | Extend features in the Adobe Reader. Now I'm really excited about
this and it has been in the program a couple of versions now but
| | 00:52 | they have just extended it to Standard.
So in Standard you can do this as well.
| | 00:55 | So if you click Extend Features in Adobe Reader,
| | 00:58 | take a look it is going to enable usage rights,
what it does basically is for this form,
| | 01:02 | it puts a little bit extra information in there you don't see, when
it gets to Reader, as soon as they open it couple of things pop out.
| | 01:08 | They now have under the File menu the ability to save the form.
| | 01:12 | So you will see Save Form Data for a fillable PDF form only.
| | 01:15 | That means that if they fill out the form
fields they can save that data with the file.
| | 01:19 | You can perform commenting, the Commenting toolbar, a Task button
shows up. They can sign an existing signature field, they have Acrobat
| | 01:26 | they can sign anywhere in the full version, and they can do the
sign anywhere if we take a look supported in Reader 8 or later.
| | 01:33 | So we have the ability to do this pretty easily.
| | 01:35 | When you save this, you click right now to save now.
| | 01:39 | It is going to ask you and say okay where do
you want to put this, we can save it somewhere,
| | 01:43 | I typically save a copy.
| | 01:45 | So,
| | 01:46 | So what I usually do is say that this is enabled or something
like that or number 2 or whatever you don't have to but as soon
| | 01:52 | as you enable this it is going to be set.
| | 01:54 | You can if you want to, there's a possibility to remove that
| | 01:57 | but I tend to make a second copy of it.
| | 01:59 | So I'm going to save that so it's Form Reader Enabled
| | 02:03 | and I will put it in there
| | 02:04 | and add that.
| | 02:05 | You take it, you distribute it using distribution
methods in Acrobat, you take it, you email it to somebody.
| | 02:10 | If they have 7 or later Reader they can now save the file
with the form data which is an excellent way to make
| | 02:16 | your end users happy.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
4. Comparing Acrobat and LiveCycle Designer FormsWhich application should I use?| 00:00 | Once you realize that Acrobat can actually create
fillable forms that you can put on a website
| | 00:05 | or email to someone. I myself got pretty excited. I
was like, OK, that's cool. I don't have to create a web form
| | 00:11 | or I don't have to email people or send them some Word
form or something like that. You can send them a pdf.
| | 00:17 | The next question people have with working with
these is which program should I use to create them.
| | 00:22 | Now if you are on the Mac platform, you
are going to create them with Acrobat.
| | 00:25 | You are going to create what's called
an AcroForm. That's something created
| | 00:27 | with Acrobat Standard, Acrobat
Pro or Pro Extended in verion 9.
| | 00:31 | On the Windows platform we have that same option to
create what are called AcroForms or Forms in Acrobat
| | 00:37 | but we also have a separate application, which is in the
Program Files folder, comes with Acrobat Pro and Pro Extended
| | 00:45 | and you get the ability to create forms in
there and that's called LiveCycle Designer.
| | 00:48 | So we have to decide which one we want to use.
| | 00:51 | Now the way I used to approach this is I would tell
people if you need to create a simple form, use Acrobat.
| | 00:58 | If you need to create a more complex form use
LiveCycle Designer on the Windows platform.
| | 01:03 | What does that mean to you?
| | 01:05 | That means that if you want to create
a form that starts its life in Word,
| | 01:09 | InDesign or any other program, you can use either program.
| | 01:13 | You can use LiveCycle Designer or Acrobat.
| | 01:15 | You can create a pdf, you can pull that
into the program and start to add forms.
| | 01:20 | Acrobat creates what's called an AcroForm.
| | 01:23 | Acrobat Forms usually are simpler and what I mean by that
is you don't have as many complex fields to work with.
| | 01:30 | You have a series of fields that you can use. As a matter
of fact if I go up to forms, I have got this open just
| | 01:35 | to show you. This is called acroform.pdf and I am going to
tell to add or edit fields. We go into Forms Editing Mode
| | 01:42 | and we can add, if I click up on the upper left here, you will
see Add New Field. All of these different types of fields.
| | 01:48 | So these are pretty simple. They do collect the data
you need but this is what we have got to work with.
| | 01:54 | If you want to do calculations, if
you want to do any extraneous things
| | 01:57 | with the form itself, you can use simplified field
notation, which is a way to simply add fields together,
| | 02:04 | subtract fields. You can use JavaScript. You can also just
use a very simple method of adding or subtracting fields.
| | 02:11 | If we want to do something beyond that we have got to
try and rely on JavaScript or try and hire someone to do
| | 02:17 | that to get those kinds of fields out there.
| | 02:20 | If you decide you need something
like a date field for instance.
| | 02:23 | I want to put the date or have somebody select a date. A
lot of times you are going to rely on JavaScript for that.
| | 02:28 | And that is just something that's a little
bit out of the reach of the Acrobat Form.
| | 02:31 | Now you can do it but it's not built in.
| | 02:35 | LiveCycle Designer on the other hand, if I switch over to
LiveCycle Designer, creates a little bit more complex form.
| | 02:41 | The reason why I say that is because LiveCycle
Designer allows you to create not only forms that start
| | 02:47 | from different types of objects- if you look
on the right side I will see an Object library
| | 02:51 | and my icons are small because I made them that way.
| | 02:54 | If you notice, I scroll down here we have a lot of
different things built in. You can actually simply drag
| | 03:00 | and drop content or objects on the page and use them.
| | 03:03 | You have got things like current date, country
pop-ups, US state pop-ups, all sorts of things
| | 03:08 | to work with in here that are pre-builtin.
| | 03:11 | Not a lot of JavaScript for some of these, so that's good.
| | 03:14 | You can also design in here and you can create what
are called Dynamic Forms in LiveCycle Designer.
| | 03:19 | A Dynamic Form is a form that can either connect
or sync with a database or XML or some kind
| | 03:26 | of information that's external to the form.
| | 03:28 | You can save it as a pdf, you can
save it as an XML file, there's a lot
| | 03:32 | of different things we can save out of here as.
| | 03:34 | You can also take forms out of LiveCycle Designer
and have them be pdf or html or postscripts.
| | 03:40 | There's lot of ways you can work with things in here.
| | 03:43 | LiveCycle Designer has a lot of pre-builtin custom objects.
| | 03:46 | It also has the ability to have things expand.
| | 03:49 | You can also use a language called
FormCalc, which is kind of similar
| | 03:53 | to the simplified field notation in Acrobat. Kind of.
| | 03:56 | And you can also use JavaScript
as well as some other languages.
| | 04:00 | So LiveCycle Designer allows you to create forms that can be
either built on the fly or when somebody answers a question
| | 04:06 | or clicks on a field you can actually have things expand
automatically, you can pull data in, things like that.
| | 04:12 | So we have got a big difference there.
| | 04:13 | Now one of the other things I want to
mention here is if I go back to Acrobat,
| | 04:17 | Acrobat Forms are typically called AcroForms
because they are based on the pdf model.
| | 04:22 | LiveCycle Designer forms are basically built on XML so
they are a little bit different background or backbone.
| | 04:29 | The Acrobat Forms also allow you to use
all the tools built into the program.
| | 04:33 | So if I click Close Form Editing here I could add multimedia,
I could comment on this, we could add digital signatures,
| | 04:40 | we can do just about anything we want to this to
make it a more user friendly experience, let's say.
| | 04:45 | In LiveCycle Designer, LiveCycle
Designer is a forms creation tool solely.
| | 04:50 | So if I want to add multimedia, things like that, there
are ways it can be done but it's not going to be jumping
| | 04:57 | out at you saying "here, it's
the multimedia tool," kind of thing.
| | 05:00 | So LiveCycle Designer is meant to create forms,
that's its job, its sole purpose in life.
| | 05:05 | Acrobat is great, there are a lot of good things you can do.
| | 05:08 | The other reason I might use LiveCycle Designer
is because it has pre-builtin templates.
| | 05:13 | Coming up to File, New I can see that
it takes you through a wizard here,
| | 05:16 | which allows you to setup. You can create it based on a
template. You can also do similar to what you do in Acrobat,
| | 05:22 | you can import a pdf document that's already done.
That can actually be in AcroForm that you pull
| | 05:27 | in here and you just continue working on.
| | 05:30 | You can import a Word document and things like that.
| | 05:32 | The template, just to show you,
there's tons of them built in here.
| | 05:35 | You may be able to use one of these right
out of the gate and be done with it.
| | 05:38 | So I will click Cancel to that.
| | 05:41 | One of the reasons to use Acrobat, I am
kind of bouncing back and forth, here is-
| | 05:45 | I will go back to Acrobat. Suppose you have a Word
document or an InDesign file that looks like this,
| | 05:52 | let me click off Highlight field, it looka something like this.
You can use Acrobat to detect the form fields automatically.
| | 05:58 | So it will see if there are form fields out here and
automatically put them out there the best it can.
| | 06:03 | You can then take this over to LiveCycle Designer, you can
bring it over there and work on it in LiveCycle Designer.
| | 06:10 | So this should give you some ideas of why
you would use one over the other, simply
| | 06:16 | because Acrobat creates a little bit simpler form
that you can use all of the other tools with.
| | 06:20 | LiveCycle Designer creates a little more complex form but
it does help you get started with things like templates
| | 06:25 | and pre-builtin elements and you can
create dynamic forms in LiveCycle.
| | 06:30 | So the next time you create a form, armed
with this information you should be able
| | 06:33 | to choose the correct application for yourself.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Introducing LiveCycle Designer| 00:00 | Another way to be able to create forms is using LiveCycle Designer,
so I would like to introduce LiveCycle Designer, what it is,
| | 00:07 | kind of how it works and capabilities. I have got Acrobat
Pro Extended open right now. LiveCycle is available only on
| | 00:14 | Windows and it's only available in Pro and Pro Extended.
| | 00:19 | LiveCycle Designer is a separate application, it actually
installs with Acrobat Pro and with Pro Extended 9 and it is
| | 00:25 | available in the Program files Adobe Acrobat folder
and you should go in there and see a Design folder.
| | 00:30 | There are several ways to open this application.
It is actually a separate application.
| | 00:34 | You can open it through Acrobat Pro or Pro Extended, you
can also like I just said go to the program files folder and
| | 00:41 | open it separately. Since I am already in Acrobat,
I will show you how we can open it through Acrobat.
| | 00:47 | Click in the Forms Task button up top,
you will see Start Form Wizard.
| | 00:50 | Choose that
| | 00:51 | and it comes up with Create or Edit form.
| | 00:54 | Now if you got standard, you won't see this, but we can create
from no existing form, this allows you to create from scratch
| | 01:00 | or from a template. This will launch LiveCycle Designer.
| | 01:04 | So clicking Next,
| | 01:05 | will take you over
| | 01:08 | and Adobe LiveCycle Designer should launch automatically.
It's a little interesting here because Acrobat is still seen
| | 01:14 | in the background but LiveCycle Designer is open. What we're going to
do is I'm just going to show you a simple way to get started here and
| | 01:19 | then we'll just talk a little bit about LiveCycle Designer compared
to Acrobat and how it works. When you get in the LiveCycle Designer,
| | 01:25 | LiveCycle Designer is a tool that's meant to create forms
that people can view in Acrobat or Reader or what's called
| | 01:32 | Forms ES. You can actually have forms
that are both generic PDF forms,
| | 01:38 | you can also have forms that are not only static like a
PDF form, but you can have a form that is dynamic that
| | 01:44 | connects to a database, that connects to some sort of XML file,
different things like that. LiveCycle Designer lets you create forms
| | 01:50 | in different ways. There are differences
between Acrobat and LiveCycle Forms.
| | 01:54 | And what I would like to do now is just kind of get started
really quick. We're going to create something from a blank form or
| | 02:01 | whatever the choices are here. So when you get
started creating LiveCycle, if you open it separately,
| | 02:06 | it's just going to open LiveCycle and give you a dialog box,
it says hey what you want to do. If you go through Acrobat,
| | 02:12 | it will launch you right into the New Form Assistant
and say what are we going to do to create a form.
| | 02:16 | Blank form is a completely blank page,
| | 02:18 | template. This is why a lot of people use this application
because it has a ton of templates built in here that we'll
| | 02:24 | take a look at in the later video.
| | 02:26 | If you have a spreadsheet you can actually copy/paste
from something like Excel and paste in here as a form.
| | 02:31 | You can import a PDF document. This makes it so that if you design it
in InDesign, Word, some other application, you can convert it to PDF,
| | 02:40 | import it in here and then add form fields to it.
| | 02:43 | It also means that you could take a PDF form you've created in Pro
or Pro Extended, bring it into LiveCycle and add certain things.
| | 02:52 | You can also import a Word document. If you have a Word document
that's just either simply Word document or a Word document with form
| | 02:58 | fields, some or most I should say of the form fields will be
recognized and converted the LiveCycle form fields. So you can do
| | 03:06 | a pretty good job trying to get a format.
| | 03:09 | We're just going to use blank forms just
to get it out here, just click Next.
| | 03:12 | As you go through this little wizard, it typically asks you a
lot of questions. Right now I would like you to just click Finish.
| | 03:17 | It should finish it up.
| | 03:18 | It's going to open up a blank document for you
| | 03:21 | and I would like you to maximize the window here, click in the
middle button up there and that should show you a whole thing.
| | 03:26 | Since LiveCycle is a separate application, I'd like to view it as
such, so I can see the whole thing. And we're now going to go to the
| | 03:31 | workspace, I just want to mention a few things out
here about LiveCycle that's different from Acrobat.
| | 03:36 | LiveCycle has got a lot of tools and is
devoted specifically to creating forms.
| | 03:41 | So basically everything you see out here is for forms. You're
typically not going to add things like movies or different
| | 03:48 | functionality like that, this is a forms based application and
the reason why I say that is, if you look on the right over here,
| | 03:55 | you're going to see what's called the Object Library, once again
not going to dive in too deep here, but in Acrobat if you want to do
| | 04:00 | something like put a radio button on the page, you choose the tool
and you go out and click on the page and work that way. And here
| | 04:07 | they are all pre-made for you as library items and you can drag
them out on your page or you can double click to add these.
| | 04:13 | This program comes with a lot of built-in functionality.
As a matter of fact, if you look down where it says Custom,
| | 04:20 | if you click Custom, you should be able to see that if you want to
put like a country's dropdown or things like that or states dropdown,
| | 04:25 | you can simply drag it out and place it on the page,
so lot of things we can do out here automatically.
| | 04:30 | So LiveCycle is a program that once you get into these videos
and start going through, you will be able to learn that its sole
| | 04:37 | purpose in life is create forms that could be viewed in
Acrobat or Reader or in other applications like Forms ES
| | 04:44 | and different thing like that, but you can access it
via Acrobat, you can also access it separately in the
| | 04:50 | Program Files Application folder.
| | 04:52 | If you took the time to listen to this introduction, I would
suggest you go to the next video, where I talk about the Acrobat
| | 04:58 | and LiveCycle connection.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Understanding the Acrobat and LiveCycle connection| 00:00 | Another question I get a lot is, suppose I create a form
in Acrobat and then I learn about LiveCycle Designer
| | 00:06 | and I realize that maybe I want to take that
form I created in Acrobat and dress it up
| | 00:10 | or add some extra things in LiveCycle
Designer. Can I do that?
| | 00:13 | Or suppose on the flip side, I create a form in
LiveCycle Designer, but I want to add some movies to it
| | 00:19 | or things like that, bring it back to
Acrobat and do that. Can I do that?
| | 00:23 | That's what we are going to talk about right now, simply
because it is important to understand the connection
| | 00:28 | between Acrobat and LiveCycle Designer
on the Windows platform.
| | 00:31 | So I have got a form open right now in Acrobat.
| | 00:34 | This is Acrobat Pro Extended, it doesn't matter
if you have Standard Pro or Pro Extended.
| | 00:39 | Forms in Acrobat are typically called AcroForms because
they are using Acrobat model to create the forms.
| | 00:45 | Forms in LiveCycle Designer, if I click on
LiveCycle Designer, are usually based on XML,
| | 00:50 | which is a totally different platform underneath.
| | 00:53 | If you try and mix the two, bring one over to
the other, there are possible consequences.
| | 00:58 | So one thing I want to show you is if we have
a form in Acrobat and we decide that we want
| | 01:03 | to add some extra functionality, I want to include a
database to this, I want to add some other field things
| | 01:09 | like that and we take it over to LiveCycle.
| | 01:11 | If I go to LiveCycle, we can simply
open it or use the wizard.
| | 01:15 | So if I go to File, Open, I see I have got that AcroForm
I just created. I put a couple of copies on my desktop.
| | 01:21 | I will click Open, take a look. What's going to happen here,
it's just going to say we are about to take it and turn it
| | 01:28 | into a LiveCycle Designer Form, do you want- ?
| | 01:31 | You got 2 choices here.
| | 01:32 | Do you want to create an interactive
form of fixed pages or a flowable layout?
| | 01:36 | Fixed pages typically means that it's not going to
be dynamic, OK. It's not going to start out dynamic.
| | 01:41 | Dynamic usually means, you can hook a database to it,
bring in XML data, all sorts of things we can do.
| | 01:46 | It's going to try and preserve the
appearance of the file, do the best it can.
| | 01:50 | You can place new fields, but you can't
edit the art work in here, that's the thing.
| | 01:55 | If you want to create an Interactive Form with a
flowable layout, that basically means that it tries
| | 02:00 | to make the original content editable,
but it might not look exactly the same.
| | 02:03 | I am going to crate an Interactive Form with fixed pages.
That's pretty typical, unless you want to create a database,
| | 02:09 | interactivity or other features. I will click Next.
| | 02:13 | It's going to allow me to add an Email button or
Print button and I am going to tell it not to do
| | 02:17 | that because there's already an Email or
Submit button, I should say, out there.
| | 02:21 | Finish it up, take a look, it's going to convert.
| | 02:24 | If there are any fonts missing, it
will tell you this, I will click OK.
| | 02:28 | I mean it's going to substitute automatically
and will permanently replace those fonts.
| | 02:32 | You may not get this if you do try this.
| | 02:34 | If there are any conversion issues,
sometimes JavaScript from Acrobat is going
| | 02:37 | to be commented out because it might not understand it.
| | 02:39 | Acrobat has got its own JavaScript
language. It may need to be fixed in here,
| | 02:44 | so you can actually have it update the scripts.
| | 02:46 | So I will click OK and there's the
form. You can see it out there.
| | 02:52 | Now if I try and click on some of this content,
| | 02:54 | I won't be able to because I said make it
a fixed layout, it's not editable out here.
| | 02:59 | If I click on some of these fields though, I will be able
to edit some of these, so we can also add our own fields.
| | 03:05 | If you do do this, if you take this and you save it
in here and you decide, oh OK. I have added a few things,
| | 03:11 | maybe I want to put like a date field. I will go to
custom, I have got a nice Current Date field here.
| | 03:17 | I will just drag it out in the page, drop it out there.
| | 03:19 | There's our current date.
| | 03:20 | If you take a look here, if there are certain things
that this form cannot support, it will tell you that.
| | 03:26 | Click OK. It's got it out there.
| | 03:28 | We are going to preview it, I will
click on Preview and take a look at it.
| | 03:32 | You notice it did put the date out there.
| | 03:35 | Because we brought this over from Acrobat,
it started its life as an AcroForm,
| | 03:38 | it's converting it over to LiveCycle
form. It's doing the best it can here.
| | 03:42 | Click back in Design View.
| | 03:43 | If we come out and we save this, so I will do a File, Save,
| | 03:47 | we typically save as a PDF file.
That's what it's going to save it as.
| | 03:50 | I am going to call it AcroForm 2 and I will save
it out here. You'll be able to see right here,
| | 03:58 | it's a Save As Type, static form. You can only
save a PDF that's been converted as a static form,
| | 04:02 | because we did not say it to be
a flowable layout and click Save.
| | 04:07 | Go back over to Acrobat, I will open
that up, so this is the original.
| | 04:10 | I will open up the AcroForm2 that I have got.
| | 04:17 | Take a look, it's all there.
| | 04:18 | Now here is the catch, here is the key, I should say.
| | 04:22 | If I take a look up at forms up here, notice
what's going on. I cannot edit the forms anymore.
| | 04:27 | The forms were now converted to LiveCycle forms, which
are based on XML, little bit different information,
| | 04:33 | so I am not able to edit the form fields in here.
| | 04:35 | If I want to do other things, if I come up to the
toolbars and right-click and go to Advanced Editing.
| | 04:40 | We do have the ability to still do things like Add
Links. I can come out here and draw a link if I want to.
| | 04:46 | There are things we can add to
this, multimedia, you can edit.
| | 04:49 | We can add comments, we can secure the file, we
can collaborate with it, lot of things we can do.
| | 04:54 | So if a form starts its life in Acrobat, you take it
over to LiveCycle, you edit the form fields in there,
| | 05:00 | it tends to make the form fields LiveCycle
fields. Then you can still edit things
| | 05:04 | in here, if you save it out and open it up.
| | 05:07 | Now the other way is not necessarily true. If I go to LiveCycle
Designer, what I am going to do is I am going to open
| | 05:12 | up another form and I will make sure it's not opened
right now and it is not. So I will go to File, Open.
| | 05:18 | I have got a form out here called LiveCycle form,
it's in the Exercise Files folder, open that up.
| | 05:23 | So this is the form that was created in LiveCycle
Designer. It was saved as what's called a Static Form.
| | 05:29 | If I come up to File, Save to show you that,
| | 05:31 | when you save out of LiveCycle Designer you have options.
You have got Static Form, Dynamic XML Form or XTP Form.
| | 05:39 | If you save as a PDF file, either one static or
dynamic, you can still open it up in Acrobat.
| | 05:46 | If you save it as a PDF, you can also
use a distribute method that Acrobat uses
| | 05:50 | to distribute these via email,
www.acrobat.com or a shared server.
| | 05:54 | If you save it as an XTP file, this is for different
things for Forms ES, to be able to save it as HTML
| | 06:00 | or different things you can do, you are
not going to be able to open in Acrobat
| | 06:04 | and you will not be able to distribute the file.
| | 06:05 | So I am going to save as a static form, I will just
save it out on my desktop and rewrite the old one.
| | 06:10 | Now I am going to open that over in
Acrobat, so I will go back to Acrobat.
| | 06:14 | I have got this AcroForm, I will just open up the
other one. LiveCycle form again, take a look at it.
| | 06:21 | Because it was created in LiveCycle Designer,
what's going to happen here is I can see the forms,
| | 06:26 | they are fillable everything is ready to go.
| | 06:28 | People in Reader can open this,
people in Reader can fill it out.
| | 06:31 | If come o the Forms task button,
I cannot edit the form fields simply
| | 06:34 | because it was created in LiveCycle
through a different method.
| | 06:38 | I can't distribute it if I want to, because it's a PDF.
| | 06:41 | If I go to the Advanced Editing Tools, now I am going to
right-click in the toolbars Advanced Editing, take a look.
| | 06:48 | You cannot add a lot of different things, multimedia,
links, things like that we are not going to be able to add.
| | 06:54 | If you see that these tools are available, if you
try and use Touchup Object, the Touchup Text tool,
| | 06:59 | a lot of times it won't let you do
it simply because it's locked down.
| | 07:03 | There are few things you can do. You can comment
on this, you can send it off for collaboration,
| | 07:08 | there's security you can do, but you are
limited in what you can do with this.
| | 07:13 | You really got to watch what you want to do with this, because
if start the life in Acrobat, you have more flexibility.
| | 07:18 | If you create in LiveCycle, it's going to be just a
form that you are going to distribute in most cases,
| | 07:22 | so you are not going to be adding a
lot of multimedia and things like that.
| | 07:26 | So there's a connection between the two. It is
a little bit tenuous, but you can take forms
| | 07:32 | and go back and forth between the programs.
| | 07:34 | It is just a little bit limiting if you start in
LiveCycle, but you are going to LiveCycle for a reason.
| | 07:39 | You are going to LiveCycle Designer so that you can create
a form that is either dynamic or little more complex
| | 07:44 | or even a little easier using a template.
| | 07:46 | And that way you are just going to take the form and do a
distribution of some kind or email it to somebody using Acrobat
| | 07:52 | so that's why we have the ability to do what we can do.
| | 07:55 | So this should give you a little bit more ammunition when
you start to go forward and create your forms knowing
| | 08:00 | which one you want to start in and
how you can work between the two.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
5. Creating LiveCycle Designer FormsCreating a form from a PDF| 00:00 | We'll take a look at how to take an existing PDF or PDF
form as well as mention a Word document and convert it
| | 00:06 | to a LiveCycle Designer form that you can work on.
| | 00:09 | I have got Adobe LiveCycle Designer open right now and
once again, I already mentioned this a few more times
| | 00:13 | in the next videos here, but it's Windows
only and it's Pro and Pro Extended only.
| | 00:17 | If you want to, you can go to your Program Files
folder as well as the Adobe and Acrobat folder
| | 00:22 | and find a Designer folder to open
up this application separately.
| | 00:26 | You can also go to Acrobat and start the Form Wizard.
| | 00:29 | So if you click on Acrobat over here and you go to
the Forms Task button, you'll see Start Form Wizard.
| | 00:34 | This is another way to launch LiveCycle
and you'll see on the Windows platform,
| | 00:37 | Pro and Pro Extended, you'll see no existing form.
| | 00:39 | By selecting that and clicking Next that will take you
to LiveCycle and open up what we are about to open up.
| | 00:45 | So I'll click Cancel.
| | 00:45 | I am already in there.
| | 00:47 | Go to LiveCycle.
| | 00:47 | Now if you take a look of LiveCycle, you are going to
see a nice little button up here which is create a new.
| | 00:52 | That creates a blank form.
| | 00:53 | What we are going to do is we are going to create
a form from a PDF that already has form fields.
| | 00:58 | So if you click on the arrow to the right, you'll see
| | 01:00 | that we can create a blank form for
just about any size we want here.
| | 01:04 | You also have tons of built-in
forms that you can use as templates.
| | 01:09 | These are great.
| | 01:10 | This is how I start lot of my forms.
| | 01:11 | And these templates can come in different colors, vanilla,
beige or blue, which depending on your fancy you can choose.
| | 01:17 | We can also create a new one.
| | 01:18 | This takes you into a wizard, which
allows you to pick what you want to do.
| | 01:21 | This is the same thing as coming
up to File, New up in the menus.
| | 01:25 | So choose New and you'll see the New Form Assistant.
| | 01:29 | If you had come directly from Acrobat
and you used the Form Wizard from there,
| | 01:32 | it would immediately take you into this dialog box.
| | 01:35 | Getting started, we can use a blank form, blank document.
| | 01:37 | You can create it from a template,
which is what we are going to do later.
| | 01:40 | You can create it from a spreadsheet,
Excel file, that sort of thing.
| | 01:43 | That allows you to copy and paste
cells in here to create a form.
| | 01:47 | You can import it from an existing PDF
document, which either has form field or not.
| | 01:52 | Maybe you want to have a nice design to start with.
| | 01:54 | Or you can import a Word document.
| | 01:55 | So Word document, give it a try if you have a Word document.
| | 01:58 | Maybe it's got form fields, maybe it doesn't.
| | 01:59 | It will convert it to a PDF file or whatever you choose for
Save As and if there are form fields that it can recognize,
| | 02:06 | it will do its best to recognize those
and turn those into LiveCycle form fields.
| | 02:10 | I am not going to promise anything, but it does a pretty
good job sometimes depending on what you have done in Word.
| | 02:15 | Choose Import a PDF document, click Next.
| | 02:18 | It's going to ask you where the PDF document is to import.
| | 02:21 | I'll browse for that.
| | 02:23 | I have got Form PDF Convert.
| | 02:25 | I'll open that up and click Next.
| | 02:29 | Now this could be sitting anywhere if you have it.
| | 02:31 | This is a PDF file that you want to try.
| | 02:32 | If you take a look here, this is something that you are
going to run across if you are used to working with Acrobat
| | 02:37 | and you are just getting into LiveCycle,
you really got to pay attention to this.
| | 02:40 | It's going to create a copy of the original PDF,
| | 02:43 | which makes sense because Adobe LiveCycle Designer
deals with form in a little different way.
| | 02:48 | Lot of times they are XML based forms which means they
can still be PDFs that are viewed in Reader and Acrobat
| | 02:53 | but they are just created a little different way.
| | 02:55 | Right here, it's going to say Create
an Interactive Form with Fixed Pages.
| | 02:58 | That means any form fields that I had,
it will convert into Acrobat form fields.
| | 03:03 | It will do its best and if there is a design in
the background, it's going to try and convert it
| | 03:07 | to a big picture, basically that
you really can't edit in here.
| | 03:10 | So if you want, you just want to edit the form
fields, you are satisfied with the design,
| | 03:15 | you can just create a fixed page PDF in here.
| | 03:18 | If you want to make it to where it's more
interactive with what's called a flowable layout,
| | 03:23 | it tries to make it so you can edit the
background such as pictures things like that.
| | 03:27 | You can try that.
| | 03:28 | If you look here, it says, "You may need to touch
up the document to restore to original appearance."
| | 03:32 | I just simply want to get it in here.
| | 03:34 | I am okay with the design.
| | 03:35 | Well actually this PDF we are opening was done in InDesign.
| | 03:37 | It could have been Word or anything else.
| | 03:39 | Form fields were added in Acrobat and
we are just going to open this up.
| | 03:42 | So choose Finish, it's going to go through the
document and if you come up with this dialog box,
| | 03:49 | you may not come up with this, but if you do,
it's going to ask you to substitute fonts.
| | 03:54 | Right now it's saying, this file it's creating was
using Helvetica, but it's going to substitute Arial.
| | 03:59 | Like I said, you may not even see this.
| | 04:01 | That's okay, that's actually better than what I see this.
| | 04:03 | It's going to try and substitute it with a certain font.
| | 04:07 | It will permanently replace unavailable fonts
simply because it's coming from a PDF file.
| | 04:12 | If you don't like the font it's going to use
here, you can click Change Substitute Font.
| | 04:16 | It will allow you to go out and try and pick a
different font, if you'd like and maybe bold or italic.
| | 04:21 | I wouldn't get crazy with this because this
is going to add file size and that can slow
| | 04:25 | down your end users when they fill out the form.
| | 04:27 | I'll click Cancel and just keep with there.
| | 04:29 | And if you look down where it says, "Show This
Only If Fonts Do Not Have Substitution Defined."
| | 04:33 | I tend to want to see no matter what's going on.
| | 04:36 | This is going to be permanent, so I don't
check that usually, I just click OK.
| | 04:39 | And if anything else opens up later
on, it will tell me if it needs fonts.
| | 04:43 | It almost always comes up with a conversion
summary just telling you what happens here.
| | 04:48 | What's going on is some of the things
that were converted from the PDF files
| | 04:52 | such as JavaScript may not convert properly,
because there were two different animals here.
| | 04:57 | We have got a Adobe Acrobat forms
or AcroForms and LiveCycle forms.
| | 05:00 | So JavaScript is going to be commented out and you
need to fix it if you want to in the Script Editor.
| | 05:06 | Now in a later chapter, we'll talk about the Script Editor.
| | 05:08 | For now we'll be okay with this.
| | 05:09 | Just click OK and it should open up in
untitled document that is your form.
| | 05:15 | Now this is pretty much what it looked like in Acrobat.
| | 05:18 | The colors are little bit off, that's okay, but if you look
at here you can click and start clicking on the form fields.
| | 05:24 | You better see that what LiveCycle Designer does is it tries
to highlight the active form fields in this orangish color.
| | 05:30 | As you scroll down, you'll see pretty much
everything is intact even like the hidden fields.
| | 05:34 | There were some hidden fields there.
| | 05:35 | If you click on the Submit, you'll
see there is a Submit button.
| | 05:39 | So you can if you want to take a PDF form, bring
it in here and then add different things to it.
| | 05:44 | For instance, I just want to point one thing out
here that you might want to do if you bring it in.
| | 05:48 | If you look over to the right, you are
going to see some of your panels over there.
| | 05:50 | You got the Object Library, scroll down and
you'll able to see that you have the Custom.
| | 05:57 | Now click on Custom.
| | 05:58 | what that does is it pops that area open.
| | 06:01 | Suppose you want to do like this,
you want to put dropdown for states.
| | 06:05 | In Acrobat if you wanted to do
that, you would have a hard time.
| | 06:08 | You have to copy paste from one you have done before
or you'd have to sit there and type them all in.
| | 06:11 | If you want to do things like put a digital signature
field or maybe a whole address block, things like that.
| | 06:18 | These are pre-built for you.
| | 06:20 | Even the current date.
| | 06:20 | I love this one.
| | 06:22 | So what you can do is you can click on one of
these, either double-click or you can drag it
| | 06:26 | out to the page and put it where you want it.
| | 06:28 | These are pre-built elements.
| | 06:30 | If you take a look here, it's going to tell
you, "You have converted this from a PDF.
| | 06:35 | If it doesn't support it, it won't do it."
| | 06:37 | So I'll click OK.
| | 06:38 | And you'll be able to see, this is
just not going to let you do that.
| | 06:41 | So if you want to add different things, you want
to work on LiveCycle Designer as you start to go,
| | 06:46 | just know there are limitations
out here for converting PDF files.
| | 06:50 | The last thing I want to point out is if you decide to save
this and give it to someone else- we'll do a save on this.
| | 06:55 | Come up to file.
| | 06:56 | If you notice you are going to see Save, Save As.
| | 06:59 | Right now they are both the same.
| | 07:01 | I'll click Save As.
| | 07:02 | It's going to come out here.
| | 07:03 | I'll just slap this on my desktop.
| | 07:04 | I got a lot of stuff out there right now, but that's okay.
| | 07:07 | I am going to call this PDF form and if you
look down here where it says Save As Type,
| | 07:12 | you can only save it as one thing,
an Acrobat Static PDF Form.
| | 07:16 | So I'll save that.
| | 07:17 | It is going to allow it so Reader users can open this.
| | 07:20 | You'll notice right now what it's
compatible with: Reader 9 or later.
| | 07:23 | In later videos, when we get down to it,
I am going to show you how to change this.
| | 07:27 | If you look at the chapter on Distributing LiveCycle
Forms, we'll talk about that, but if I click Save,
| | 07:32 | you should be able to open this up in
Acrobat and do certain things to it.
| | 07:35 | So it's going to save the document for you.
| | 07:36 | What I would like to do now is I am going
to over to Acrobat and just show you this.
| | 07:39 | I'll open that up, right on my desktop called PDF form.
| | 07:45 | It should open up.
| | 07:47 | You are going to see a color change here, that's okay.
| | 07:50 | You'll notice that today's date is actually working, it
did put it in there, so the JavaScript is translating.
| | 07:55 | All the forms are still here.
| | 07:56 | Some of the things we can and can't do out here.
| | 07:58 | If you take a look under the Forms Task button, you'll
notice there is no Add or Edit forms button anymore.
| | 08:04 | That's because once you get it to LiveCycle and you
start working on it, it's going to kind of cut that off
| | 08:08 | because it creates a different type of form field in there.
| | 08:10 | So we can't edit it once we get in here, but if you get
it in here you can do things like add security to it.
| | 08:15 | If you come out, you can comment on this.
| | 08:18 | If you come up to the toolbars up here and right-click
or Ctrl+click, you'll see the Advanced Editing Toolbar.
| | 08:23 | Open that up.
| | 08:25 | You'll notice you can do things
like add links, things like that.
| | 08:28 | It does allow you to add more functionality to the
PDF file and the reason why I am pointing this out is
| | 08:33 | because if you start from scratch in LiveCycle or
use some other method templates, that sort of thing,
| | 08:39 | a lot of times these things are going to be grayed out.
| | 08:40 | You cannot do that.
| | 08:41 | But opening a PDF form that's already made, doing
some different things to it LiveCycle, saving it,
| | 08:45 | bringing it back out to Acrobat, will
allow you to do some editing to it.
| | 08:50 | So this is one way to be able to work
with LiveCycle, adding different things.
| | 08:54 | I know we didn't get too far but when you get
| | 08:56 | to later videos you would be able to
see exactly what we can do in there.
| | 08:59 | So you should be able to open up an existing PDF form in
LiveCycle, make sure it translates correctly, save it,
| | 09:05 | open it up in Acrobat and do different
editing to it inside of Acrobat.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating a form from a template| 00:00 | When you are ready to create a form using LiveCycle
Designer, you can start from just about anything,
| | 00:05 | an existing PDF or Word documents.
Scratch, you can just have a blank document.
| | 00:10 | You can also start from a template.
| | 00:11 | And these are really useful if you tend to do a lot
of different things like collecting information,
| | 00:16 | sending out form surveys, things like that.
| | 00:19 | So, I am starting from Acrobat Pro Extended.
| | 00:21 | We could start from Pro or Pro Extended on Windows.
| | 00:23 | Come up to the Forms button up here.
| | 00:25 | You will see Start Form Wizard.
| | 00:27 | You will be able to see no existing form.
| | 00:29 | It's just going to say creating an Adobe PDF from scratch
or from a template, which is what we are going to do.
| | 00:34 | Later on, when you start working
with forms and LiveCycle Designer,
| | 00:37 | you don't have to open LiveCycle Designer this way.
| | 00:39 | This is going to launch LiveCycle
Designer, keep Acrobat open and allow you
| | 00:43 | to start working with the wizard to set up your template.
| | 00:46 | If you want to go into the Program
Files folder, you can do that.
| | 00:48 | Go into the Abode Acrobat folders, go into the Designer
folders and open up the application separately as well.
| | 00:54 | Click Next.
| | 00:56 | That's going to pause for a minute here.
| | 00:57 | It's going to open up LiveCycle Designer
and should open up a wizard for you as well.
| | 01:02 | You should see LiveCycle Designer open.
| | 01:04 | You should also see what's called the New Form Assistant.
| | 01:07 | This is really great to get you started.
| | 01:09 | So, there's a lot of ways we can create a document.
| | 01:11 | We are going to focus on Based on the Template this time.
| | 01:14 | So click Based on the Template,
click Next and it gives you choices
| | 01:18 | for all the different types of templates you can use.
| | 01:21 | So you will see out here.
| | 01:21 | I want to create let's say an invoice,
so I can choose Invoice.
| | 01:25 | So the right next to thumbnail, you will
be able to see all the things that it does.
| | 01:28 | It creates a whole form pretty much ready to go for you.
| | 01:32 | All you've got to do is put your content out there
and usually like a Submit button if you want to do
| | 01:36 | that and save it and send it off to people.
| | 01:39 | If you look under Select a category on top, you will see
that you have a blank option which is completely blank.
| | 01:44 | You also have the same templates
but in vanilla, beige and blue.
| | 01:47 | So, if you really want to go that route, you can.
| | 01:49 | So I will choose Invoice, click Next.
| | 01:51 | It's going to start asking you some questions here.
| | 01:53 | It's going to ask you to enter your company's name.
| | 01:56 | So let's type in.
| | 01:56 | Make sure you have Grunbyte Inc. in here.
It's going to say just some generic company name.
| | 02:01 | It always remembers if you have done this in
the past as well, you saw mine already came up.
| | 02:05 | Now, click Next, it's going to ask
you where you want to put a logo from.
| | 02:08 | It always remembers the last time you did.
| | 02:10 | You are just probably going to be blank here, that's fine.
| | 02:12 | Click Browse, it's going to ask you to go out in the folder.
| | 02:16 | We should be able to see Grunbyte logo.
| | 02:18 | There are a bunch of image file formats you can
use, png, tiff, giff, jpeg, things like that.
| | 02:22 | We are going to able to use those.
| | 02:24 | I click Open.
| | 02:25 | Now, what it's going to do is it's going to link
to that file, which means if you send the form
| | 02:30 | to someone, that picture file needs to go with it.
| | 02:32 | Later on in later videos, I am going to show you how
to change that, how to embed the picture instead.
| | 02:36 | That makes more sense when you
send this as a standalone form.
| | 02:40 | Click Next.
| | 02:40 | You can enter your information if you
want to, address, etc. City, state, zip.
| | 02:46 | You don't need to do this.
| | 02:47 | You can always fill it out as well when
you get into the form, which is fine.
| | 02:50 | Click Next and you can fill out some
different information here if you like.
| | 02:54 | Go and fill out the website address.
We'll fill out Grunbyte, Inc.
| | 02:57 | and you see mine already did it because it remembers it,
which is great. Everytime you do this. And finish the form.
| | 03:04 | We click Finish.
| | 03:06 | What that does is it creates an untitled
document here, which is the form design.
| | 03:10 | Now, click on the Maximize button here so we
can see LiveCycle Designer in its full glory.
| | 03:14 | Let's scroll up a bit.
| | 03:15 | What we are looking at here is we are looking at the
form is right over here, in Design view it's called.
| | 03:20 | Up top, you are going to see all the
menu items as well as your toolbars,
| | 03:23 | all the tools created than you can create forms with.
| | 03:26 | If you look on the right, you can see all your
palettes, How To, libraries, different things.
| | 03:31 | The reason why I am taking you on the little tour here
is because I want you to look at the How To to the right.
| | 03:35 | When you first open LiveCycle Designer, the How To will
pop open and it gives you a lot of information on how
| | 03:40 | to work with what you are doing at that moment.
| | 03:43 | So, finish creating a form based on a template.
| | 03:46 | If you take a look, you are going to see, suppose you want
to do something like save it or preview it or something
| | 03:51 | like that, you can click on these little links here and
what it does is in this area it will show you how to do it.
| | 03:56 | So it will take you step-by-step
through. So how to save, how to preview.
| | 04:00 | Now, just to show you what's going on here, this is a
LiveCycle form, which means it looks a little different
| | 04:05 | from Acrobat if you are used to Acrobat forms. Because all
these features out here are editable just like Acrobat
| | 04:10 | but you see all these orange boxes
and blue boxes and all this stuff.
| | 04:14 | LiveCycle is trying to preview all
the content areas that you have got.
| | 04:18 | If you really want to see what this looks like and with
somebody opening it in Reader or full version of Acrobat,
| | 04:23 | click Preview PDF up here in the buttons.
| | 04:25 | You will see that it's going to convert it to a PDF
file, show you a preview out in the middle out here.
| | 04:33 | And here's what it will look like when somebody
else sees this, including the purple bar,
| | 04:37 | the highlight fields buttons you can click on to
see all the fields, everything is ready to go.
| | 04:42 | Your job is to go out here and fix anything you don't
want. Invoice number, date, etc. You don't want,
| | 04:48 | let's say phone or fax, you can get rid of all that.
| | 04:50 | But it's a nice place to start.
| | 04:52 | So click back on Design view so we
can actually start working on it.
| | 04:54 | A lot of people forget to go back and forth.
| | 04:57 | You can't actually edit and preview PDF,
you've got to go to Design view to edit things.
| | 05:02 | Now, if you want to save this thing,
we can save it out, send it off.
| | 05:06 | Take a look under the File menu,
you will see File, Save or Save As.
| | 05:09 | I am going to save this thing.
| | 05:10 | It's the same thing as Save As right now.
| | 05:12 | What I will do is I will put it on
my desktop and I will call this Grun.
| | 05:15 | Now, I want to draw your attention out here.
| | 05:17 | I have got a lot of stuff out there, that's
OK, I tend to save things on my desktop.
| | 05:21 | You will see Save as type right here.
| | 05:23 | You have got four things you can save as.
| | 05:25 | You have got two types of PDF and you have got XDP and TDS.
| | 05:30 | The two types of PDF are if you want to view this in
Reader or Acrobat, so you need to save it as one of these.
| | 05:35 | A static form PDF is like an Acrobat form where it
doesn't have any database connectivity or anything
| | 05:41 | like rounded corners or things like that.
| | 05:43 | Dynamic XML Form is where you can actually work with
data, some of the properties that you can do in here
| | 05:47 | like drop shadows and rounded corners and things like that.
| | 05:50 | XML Form is typically for Forms ES, which is a
separate application or separate way of doing things.
| | 05:56 | That allows you to take this file, this LiveCycle
Designer form, and be able to save it as a PDF,
| | 06:01 | as HTML, PostScript, all of different kinds of file formats.
| | 06:05 | That's a pretty special case.
| | 06:06 | Or a template, you can actually save this as a
template that later on you can open up as well.
| | 06:11 | What I am going to do is I am going to save this as a
static form because I want to open it in Acrobat and Reader
| | 06:15 | and there's nothing crazy going on out there,
no database connectivity or anything like that.
| | 06:19 | The thing I want to point out here is that it's only
compatible with Reader 9 or later or Acrobat 9 or later.
| | 06:25 | That means if somebody in 8 Reader or 8 Acrobat opens this
up, what's going to happen is they are going to get a dialog
| | 06:30 | that says something like it may not be compatible with
this version but you can probably still fill it out.
| | 06:35 | In later videos, I am going to talk to you
about how to save with forms compatibility.
| | 06:39 | It's a little bit different scenario and
it requires a little different setup.
| | 06:42 | But for right now, I am just going to save it out there.
| | 06:44 | Your document is going to be saved.
| | 06:45 | You could then send it to somebody, distribute it.
| | 06:47 | It doesn't have anyway to submit the information back.
| | 06:50 | They can save it if they want but they
can't go out and distribute it back.
| | 06:54 | That's working with buttons and we will take a look at
that in the later video, Working with LiveCycle fields.
| | 06:58 | I just wanted to get you up to speed so now you can
actually open up one of the templates, start to look at it,
| | 07:03 | start to think about, start to edit the fields as
well as save the file so you can work on it later on.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating a form from scratch| 00:00 | We'll take a look at how to create a
LiveCycle Designer form from scratch.
| | 00:04 | You'll be able to go through and create a document from LiveCycle
that is designed and created intentionally and specifically
| | 00:10 | within LiveCycle Designer using all the tools available.
| | 00:13 | So from Acrobat Pro, Acrobat Pro Extended, on the
Windows platform, we can open up LiveCycle Designer.
| | 00:19 | Clicking the Forms Task Button up top and you will see
this Start Form Wizard, choose that and if your want to
| | 00:25 | in the beginning here when we go through and actually start
creating forms you can use Acrobat to open LiveCycle by choosing
| | 00:31 | No Existing Form.
| | 00:32 | And what that does is it will launch LiveCycle Designer and
launch a wizard which allows you to create a form from scratch,
| | 00:38 | your template or existing documents.
| | 00:40 | If you want to, later on as you are getting more familiar with
LiveCycle Designer- it's in your Program Files folder, you need
| | 00:46 | Adobe Acrobat folder and a Designer
folder you can open it separately.
| | 00:50 | Click Next.
| | 00:51 | What that will do is that will launch LiveCycle Designer.
| | 00:55 | You should see LiveCycle Designer open up and
you should see the New Form Assistant start.
| | 00:59 | We can use a blank form if you want to, it's what we are going
to do and this is usually if you want to start with just like
| | 01:05 | starting in Word or some program like that InDesign, you get a
completely blank document. There is no templates or anything going on,
| | 01:11 | going on and you want it to start from scratch. That's how we're
going to build most of the forms throughout the later videos.
| | 01:15 | So choosing Use a Blank Form,
| | 01:17 | click Next.
| | 01:19 | It's going to ask you a page size you would like to use. By default
it's going to use something like an 8.5x11 or a letter size document.
| | 01:25 | If you click on the page size pop up you'll
notice all the different page sizes you have got.
| | 01:30 | We're going to leave it at default.
| | 01:31 | If you want to go Portrait or Landscape you can change that
as well and you can also have a multi-page form inside of
| | 01:37 | the LiveCycle Designer. This is really pretty
incredible. You can do that in Acrobat as well.
| | 01:41 | So we are going to do this one page right now.
| | 01:43 | If you look down here you're always going to notice this little light bulb.
The light bulb is going to be your friend, it's going to help you figure out
| | 01:48 | how you do things later on, you can see right here all form settings
can be changed later using Object palette, we'll look at that.
| | 01:54 | So click Finish.
| | 01:58 | That should open up an untitled document and what I'd like to do
is I'd like to maximize or get Adobe LiveCycle Designer out here
| | 02:04 | and we got it ready to go.
| | 02:06 | If you notice you are going to able to see that we got these
little dots out here, this is a little grid we can use,
| | 02:10 | you've got a box, you can scroll up over here, use this scroll bar.
| | 02:13 | You got a box inside this is where your
forms are going to go inside this little area,
| | 02:17 | all other tools you need are available up top in your
toolbars or menus or on the right hand side over here in the
| | 02:23 | palettes typically to start with.
| | 02:25 | So we have got this open as a blank document, nothing going on,
| | 02:28 | so this is all ready to be saved now.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Saving a LiveCycle form| 00:00 | We'll take a look at saving a LiveCycle Designer form now.
| | 00:03 | It may seem really simple from the outside, you open
up a form from a template, from scratch, from PDF,
| | 00:09 | from Word and you save it, as simple as that.
| | 00:11 | But there's a few things you've got to pay attention to.
| | 00:14 | When you go to File, Save As to save the document, it will
ask you several different things you want to save it as,
| | 00:18 | as static form, dynamic form and more, but the
first thing you want to do is this before you save.
| | 00:24 | Come up to File, take a look at
what's called the Form Properties.
| | 00:27 | Choose Form Properties.
| | 00:29 | These are really important in some cases because with Form
Properties, you can do things like you could do in Acrobat.
| | 00:34 | You could set a title, you could set a
description and these things can be searched
| | 00:38 | on later on if possible, if it's allowed.
| | 00:40 | If you take a look at Defaults,
this is where we are going to go.
| | 00:43 | Defaults are really important because
it says "Choose version to run form in."
| | 00:48 | You've got to really tell it who your audience
is for the form, this is only for this form.
| | 00:53 | So, if you choose this right here, you are
going to see we have got Acrobat 9 or later,
| | 00:56 | or Reader 9 or later, 8.1, 8.0, 7.05, 6.02.
| | 01:00 | So, it's important that you understand your audience
and what version of Acrobat they might have.
| | 01:05 | If you are not sure, you might save it back to
previous versions just to kind of cover your bases
| | 01:10 | because if you save it for Acrobat
and Adobe Reader 9 or later.
| | 01:14 | You need to save it out.
| | 01:15 | If they have previous versions, it might come up with
a dialog box that says "This was intended to be used
| | 01:20 | in a later version of Acrobat, you may need to
upgrade to Reader 9 if you don't have it already."
| | 01:24 | So, what I tend to do is I tend to
go to the lowest common denominator.
| | 01:27 | You want to be careful sometimes with this because
LiveCycle Designer allows you to do a lot of fancy stuff
| | 01:33 | and if you choose a version that's too far back, some
of that stuff will break. Meaning it's like drop shadows
| | 01:40 | or something like that, just won't perform because
previous versions would not allow you to do that.
| | 01:44 | So you need to test, that's what I am trying to say here.
| | 01:46 | So, we've got Acrobat and Adobe Reader 8 or later.
| | 01:49 | I am going with that.
| | 01:50 | Look out here, there's a lot of other
things we can do like information,
| | 01:53 | like Form Locale, what language it's going to be in.
| | 01:56 | There's a lot of scripting things you can look at.
| | 01:57 | We'll look at all these things in later videos.
| | 02:00 | But for right now, we need to click OK, come up and save.
| | 02:05 | You can either do File, Save As, or you can click
the Save button because it has not been saved yet.
| | 02:09 | It's going to ask you where you want to put this.
| | 02:11 | I will set this out on my desktop and I
will call this Grun Form, for Grunbyte form.
| | 02:19 | If you look down here, you are going
to see it says "This form is compatible
| | 02:21 | with Acrobat and Adobe Reader 8 or later."
| | 02:24 | Like I said, this is something you have to keep in mind
when you save all your forms out here just to make sure
| | 02:30 | that they are going to be compatible
with your previous versions.
| | 02:33 | Click Save As type, and you have got three
different things you can save as basically.
| | 02:38 | I will skip down to template because
that's not included in the three.
| | 02:41 | A template, if you want to let's say you are designing this
and you realize that this form you create, you can use again
| | 02:47 | and again, maybe just change it up a little bit.
| | 02:50 | You can save it as a template somewhere where it's not going
to move, where it's not going to be deleted on your server
| | 02:54 | and your hard drive, and next time you want to open it,
you can simply open that and it will open a copy of it.
| | 02:59 | So there's a way for you to repeat or keep doing
the same things, same form over and over again.
| | 03:04 | If you want to, you can choose
what's called a Static PDF form.
| | 03:07 | Static PDF form is one where there's really no response
to user interaction, which means if somebody clicks
| | 03:14 | on a button, a bunch of form fields aren't going
to suddenly show up or it's not going to interact
| | 03:18 | with the server unless they click Submit.
| | 03:20 | That's a static PDF form.
| | 03:22 | What you see is what you get.
| | 03:23 | A Dynamic XML form is a form that, suppose, they
click on a button in response to a question,
| | 03:29 | it can actually go up to a server and refresh the page.
| | 03:33 | Maybe if they are in a table and
they fill out couple of the things,
| | 03:36 | they can actually add more rows
dynamically, different things like that.
| | 03:39 | If you do those in LiveCycle and you want those to appear
in the PDF, you need to make sure save as this format.
| | 03:45 | In Adobe XML Form, XDP is typically
used for something called Forms ES.
| | 03:49 | It's a little bit more advanced, it means that you want to
take this form and maybe save it out as something different,
| | 03:54 | like HTML or PDF or PostScript and may
be have it built on the fly as you work.
| | 03:59 | So, these are the different things we can do.
| | 04:01 | I typically save either static or dynamic and right now,
it's going to be static, so I will choose Static here,
| | 04:07 | click Save, and that should save it for us.
| | 04:10 | Now, if you want to test this out, you could- it is a PDF
file so you could open it in Acrobat, take a look at it,
| | 04:16 | check it out on the version and it will open for you.
| | 04:19 | If you also want a preview in here, there's the Preview
PDF button right here at the tab that will allow you
| | 04:24 | to see what it's going to look like to your end users,
which is really not very exciting at the moment.
| | 04:28 | But, click back in Design view, you
should be able to see your design
| | 04:31 | and we are ready to put all the content out here.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using the LiveCycle workspaces| 00:00 | We will take a look at the LiveCycle Workspace now and
how to work with the palettes and things like that.
| | 00:05 | So we have got grunform.pdf open right
now, if you want to open that up you can.
| | 00:10 | If you look out here you are going to see
that we have got our menu bars up top,
| | 00:12 | which is pretty typical for every
application you have got out there.
| | 00:16 | You will be able to see the toolbars right below
that, very similar to Acrobat in some ways.
| | 00:20 | All the different toolbars actually have a
little gripper, I like to call these gripper edges,
| | 00:23 | or gripper bars that you can
click and drag and move this with.
| | 00:26 | If you look below then you will see a couple of
tabs out here, the Design View and the Preview PDF.
| | 00:31 | You will also see on the right side over
here all the palettes we have available.
| | 00:36 | So, there's a lot of them in here. So you can change any one of
these up or you can close them and you can do all sorts
| | 00:40 | of things and the other thing about LiveCycle
I want to mention is if you close all the forms
| | 00:44 | that are open, sometimes if you came from Acrobat
and you open LiveCycle it will close LiveCycle
| | 00:50 | when you close the last form that's open. So it will
do that sometimes, you just got to be aware of that.
| | 00:55 | Looking out here, if you look under the Window
menu, you will notice that there's all the toolbars,
| | 00:59 | palettes, everything we have got is right here.
| | 01:02 | You will see your toolbars generically
are sitting right here.
| | 01:06 | If you turn this off, the toolbars will disappear.
| | 01:08 | If you turn this on the toolbars will
reappear, so you can do that pretty easily.
| | 01:13 | You will also notice that down here all these
little palettes, any one that's open right now
| | 01:17 | or showing I should say, has a checkmark next to it.
| | 01:20 | So, you see Object Library over there as a checkmark.
| | 01:23 | How To also has a checkmark, so those are showing.
| | 01:26 | If you want to see different palettes
in here, you can just choose its name.
| | 01:29 | One of the palettes you are going
to work with all the time is going
| | 01:32 | to be called the Layout, this is what I tend to use a lot.
| | 01:34 | So if you click Layout it will show you the Layout
palette on the right side of here, it's docked,
| | 01:39 | and it will also usually open up a companion palette
and Object and Layout kind of go hand in hand.
| | 01:44 | They're two things you are going to use a lot.
| | 01:46 | Now, with the palettes on the right side over here,
| | 01:48 | if you want to close these little guys
up, you can do it in a couple of ways.
| | 01:51 | If you want to close an individual palette you
will notice there's a little X next to the word
| | 01:55 | on this tab, you can close that palette individually.
| | 01:58 | If you do that, you may have one or two tabs left.
| | 02:01 | If you want to close the entire group, you will notice
there's a little group bar here, this little blue bar,
| | 02:06 | you are going to see an arrow up here, which
allows you to expand it or not, as well as an x,
| | 02:11 | which closes the whole window here, the whole group.
| | 02:15 | So, if you come up to the arrow there and click on
it, if it's already expanded it will be expanded.
| | 02:19 | If you click on the x, it will close that and
we'll have pretty much what we had before open.
| | 02:24 | Now, if you want to move these around, you will notice there
are dividing lines between the different groups out here.
| | 02:30 | So, if you come to the dividing line here above that
blue bar you will see double arrows. You can click
| | 02:35 | and drag up to change the size of each one of these
| | 02:38 | and sometimes it gets a little testy,
you can pull it up a little more.
| | 02:41 | If you come to the blue bar for the group,
if you double click on that what that does is
| | 02:46 | that actually makes it free floating,
so you can drag it around
| | 02:49 | and put it wherever you want to, so
I could set it over here if I want it to.
| | 02:52 | If you double-click back on the blue bar, it has a tendency
to stick it back where it was when you first double-clicked.
| | 02:58 | If you want to take a look at the right side over
here, you can actually collapse this whole area.
| | 03:02 | There's a little gripper right here with an arrow, if
you click on that that will collapse the right area.
| | 03:07 | If you click on it again it will open it up.
| | 03:09 | If you think it's too wide, choking off some of your
workspace out here, you can come to the dividing line,
| | 03:14 | drag to the right or drag to the left and make
it a little bit bigger or a little bit smaller.
| | 03:19 | Now, if you look on the left side of your workspace
way over here, you are going to see the same kind of thing,
| | 03:22 | a little blue bar. If you click on that little
gripper right there, what it's going to do is
| | 03:26 | it's going to pop open a series
of palettes on the left side.
| | 03:29 | These palettes over here, some of them are a little bit
more advanced like your PDF structure, your data view,
| | 03:35 | different things, you are going to see all the tabs up here.
| | 03:37 | These are under your Window menu as well. For right now
we will keep these off to the side kind of collapsed
| | 03:43 | in the sides, so if you click on the gripper
there, the arrow, it will collapse those.
| | 03:46 | If you go back under the Window menu and
take a look, like I said before, you are going
| | 03:50 | to see all the palettes out here
that you could possibly open.
| | 03:53 | Some of these will actually float out here when
you open them like the font or a paragraph.
| | 03:58 | I also want to show you the Script Editor. This is
something that if you decide to use let's say calculations
| | 04:04 | or things like that to be able to add fields, you know
all sorts of things you can do with calculations.
| | 04:09 | Open the Script Editor and what this does is it pops open
below your toolbars, it's actually part of the toolbars,
| | 04:15 | and above these tabs here and you will see it right here.
| | 04:17 | This is called your Script Editor,
something that's really important later on.
| | 04:20 | If you want to close it or remove
it, you could go back to Window
| | 04:24 | and just simply click on- take a
look under here- Script Editor.
| | 04:28 | The other thing we can do to close it is to come to this
little gripper on the left, click and drag out, pull it off,
| | 04:34 | this allows you to do two things. It
allows you to float it or simply close it.
| | 04:38 | So, if you click Close, it will close it up for you.
| | 04:39 | Now, the last thing we are going to talk about with
the workspace out here is the ability to reset it.
| | 04:45 | So if you have opened palettes, closed palettes,
worked with toolbars, done some different things,
| | 04:50 | if you come under Window, you have
the ability to reset your workspace.
| | 04:54 | Coming to Workspace, you will see Left
palettes, Right palettes and Floating palettes.
| | 04:59 | Right now all of them are collapsed or closed except
for the right palette because it has got a checkmark.
| | 05:04 | If you choose Left palettes it will un-collapse the ones
on the left like we did earlier, we don't want to do that.
| | 05:10 | If you choose Floating palettes, any that
were floating or could float will open up.
| | 05:14 | If you choose Reset palette Locations that
will allow you to reset where they were back
| | 05:19 | to their original states, so choose Reset palette Locations.
| | 05:23 | It runs a little script, kind of
gets everything back where it was,
| | 05:26 | takes a second here, but then you should be good to do.
| | 05:28 | I tend to do this a lot when I get started.
| | 05:30 | Managing the workspace, managing the palettes and
the toolbars is going to be kind of a full-time job
| | 05:35 | because you have only got so much room to work with
and you are going to need a lot of these out here.
| | 05:39 | So, this should at least give you an idea of how to
work with the workspace, set things up and reset it
| | 05:44 | if you get into a little bit of a trouble.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Adding graphics| 00:00 | We will take a look at adding pictures to your form now.
| | 00:03 | So if you are just joining us, make sure you are in
LiveCycle Designer. It's in the Program Files folder,
| | 00:07 | Adobe folder, Acrobat folder and then Designer
folder, and make sure you open up grunform.pdf.
| | 00:12 | It's a blank document for the most part.
| | 00:14 | When you work in LiveCycle Designer, you can add images
just as simply as you could in Word or other applications.
| | 00:21 | If you look in the right side, I have got this
document open and I am scrolling to the top.
| | 00:24 | You will see the Object Library palette.
| | 00:27 | Now, the Object Library palette,
you should see My Favorites in here.
| | 00:30 | Make sure that that is open.
| | 00:32 | The way you can do that is you click on the arrow here.
| | 00:34 | Make sure it's pointed down so you can
see all the content of that category.
| | 00:38 | When you start to put things on the page, you are typically
going to come to your Object Library to be able to do that.
| | 00:43 | Now, in the Object Library, My Favorites, you will see things
like images, drawing objects like circles, boxes, lines,
| | 00:50 | as well as some of the fields that you are going
to be using like radio buttons and the like.
| | 00:54 | If we want to put an image out here, the way it
typically works is I will drag an image on the page,
| | 00:58 | it's a static image , which displays certain
file types and you can see those here.
| | 01:03 | Then we change the image up a little bit, you
change its size, structure, that sort of thing.
| | 01:07 | So, click the image icon here, drag out on the page.
| | 01:10 | You can also double-click to get it on the page.
| | 01:12 | Just drag it on the corner, it will open a
icon right up here, a logo right up here.
| | 01:15 | To insert the picture, right now
it's blank, double-click on the box.
| | 01:20 | It will open up the dialog box
here asking where you want to go.
| | 01:23 | Now, take a look and you should see in your
folder there we have got Grunbyte logo.
| | 01:27 | You'll also see all the different
image file types you can save as.
| | 01:30 | Try not to go too big in file size.
| | 01:33 | Open it up and it should place it out there.
| | 01:35 | The picture should be fit to the box.
| | 01:38 | If it's not, it might have gotten really
big but it should be fitting to the box.
| | 01:42 | Once you get the picture out here, if you decide that
you don't like the picture, if you want to delete it,
| | 01:47 | it's still selected, you can simply press Delete.
| | 01:49 | If you want to change the picture to maybe another picture,
double-click on the picture right here and it should open
| | 01:54 | up the same dialog box saying "Where's the image file?"
| | 01:57 | I will just cancel. So we want that picture.
| | 01:59 | Once it's out there, if you want to,
we can resize this box a little bit.
| | 02:02 | Come to the corner and click and drag to resize.
| | 02:04 | You don't have to worry about holding
anything down, just resize.
| | 02:06 | And what it's going to try and do is fit the picture in.
| | 02:09 | Sometimes pictures won't fit, they don't work.
| | 02:12 | You've got to kind of work with them a little bit more.
| | 02:13 | So with its selected, we are going
to open up a different palette.
| | 02:17 | Come under Window and you will see that
we have what's called the Layout palette.
| | 02:20 | Choose Layout, that opens up the Layout and the Object
palettes and put some on the right side of the workspace.
| | 02:27 | Click on the Object tab here.
| | 02:28 | They are always both open at the same time.
| | 02:30 | When you work in LiveCycle Designer, if you click on
anything on the page, the Object palette is going to be
| | 02:36 | where you are going to go typically to see
most of the properties for that object.
| | 02:40 | So with the image selected, you will be
able to see right here it says type image.
| | 02:44 | The URL is right here, it's telling it where it's located.
| | 02:46 | If you wanted to pick a different picture, you could
also come here and browse for different picture.
| | 02:52 | Here's the big one, this is why we are coming over here.
| | 02:54 | If you put a picture in LiveCycle Designer, what it does
is it links to the image, which means if you send the form
| | 03:00 | to someone, distribute it, you have
to send the image with it separately.
| | 03:04 | And that just becomes a pain in the butt.
| | 03:06 | So what we need to do is we need to embed the
image data , which means it will send the picture
| | 03:10 | with the form and it will embed it in the form itself.
| | 03:13 | So choose embed image data.
| | 03:15 | This is why you want to keep the file size down
so it doesn't make your form so big in size.
| | 03:19 | You look at sizing here, you are going to see that we
have three options here, scale image proportionally,
| | 03:24 | scale image to fit rectangle and use original size.
| | 03:27 | I have seen it where Use Original Size is set up by default.
| | 03:31 | If you choose Scale Image Proportionally,
make sure that is selected.
| | 03:34 | What that allows you to do is as you resize the box out
here, come to a corner and resize no matter what you do
| | 03:39 | with the box, make it tall, make it wide, it
always tries to fit the image in proportionally.
| | 03:44 | We will not stretch or fit the picture.
| | 03:46 | If you come back over the Object palette, if you choose
Scale Image to Fit Rectangle, you've got to be careful
| | 03:51 | with this one, it's going to try and squish it to fit in.
| | 03:53 | We do not want to do that in most cases.
| | 03:56 | And if you choose Use Original Size, it
forces it to be 100% and you cannot resize it.
| | 04:02 | The moral of the story is make sure
you choose Scale Image Proportionally.
| | 04:06 | You should then be able to come to
a corner, click and drag to resize.
| | 04:09 | Make it a little bit bigger, a little smaller
and you could kind of fit it where you want it.
| | 04:13 | Notice, as you drag your cursor, it's snapping
to little guide, the little grids out here.
| | 04:17 | Now, what I tend to do is I tend to close out the box
a little bit just to make it so it's not quite so big.
| | 04:22 | So when you work with pictures, you want to embed
them, you want to make sure that you size them
| | 04:26 | or scale them proportionally and there's a
lot of other things we can do with objects.
| | 04:29 | But as we start working with forms,
we will start to get into those.
| | 04:32 | So, you should now be able to place pictures on the
page, edit them a little bit, embed the image data
| | 04:37 | and start to make the form a little
bit more like you like it to look.
| | 04:40 | If you are going to move on to next videos where start
talking about pictures and different things like that,
| | 04:44 | you might want to save this so you can continue on.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Adding text| 00:00 | LiveCycle Designer can also be used as
sort of a design tool for your forms.
| | 00:05 | So not only can we add pictures, graphics, things like that
| | 00:08 | but you can also add text that you
directly type into the program.
| | 00:11 | We will take a look at how to add text
and do a little bit of format into it
| | 00:14 | so if are just joining us you can open up grunform_text.
| | 00:18 | I am just continuing using the same document
here with this logo out here and if you look
| | 00:21 | to the right you should be able to see
your Object Libraries sitting over there.
| | 00:25 | If we want to add some text to the page we need to
add a little text bus so this is for tools there,
| | 00:29 | for doing things like headlines or
extra text you need to put on the page.
| | 00:33 | So you can either double-click or click and drag out on
the page, drag it out here and you will feel it snapping
| | 00:38 | out here , which is good because
it helps you align things up.
| | 00:42 | Once you release your cursor should be in there and what
we will do is we will type in conference registration.
| | 00:52 | Now notice as even if you misspell things, notice
as you type in what happens to that little text box.
| | 00:58 | That little area, it's going to consistently open up.
| | 01:00 | So it actually expands to fit the text you
type in either vertically or horizontally.
| | 01:05 | If you want to put another line of text out there
you can press Enter or Return to put another line
| | 01:10 | and there's also other ways to do this and we
will take a look at that in just a little while.
| | 01:13 | But let's go ahead and delete that
Return if you did put a Return.
| | 01:16 | What I would like to do is change
some of the formatting here.
| | 01:19 | We are in editing mode so we are in text editing mode,
which basically means that if you put your cursor
| | 01:23 | in there you can select the text and edit it.
| | 01:25 | So what I would like to do is I would like you
to select Conference Registration and I tend to do
| | 01:29 | that by clicking three times, you can also drag across.
| | 01:32 | You do need to be careful with dragging
across because if you are not in the box
| | 01:36 | and you see a little i-beam right there you can
actually move it if you are off on the edge
| | 01:40 | or you can do something different,
which you don't want to do.
| | 01:42 | So with it selected look over the toolbars you
will be able to see the font family right up there.
| | 01:46 | I have got Myriad Pro right now.
| | 01:48 | If you click on the font family you
will be able to see a popup menu.
| | 01:50 | Now you can choose anything you have
got on your system for the most part.
| | 01:54 | I would really try and be careful not to go
crazy with the number of fonts you put out here
| | 01:58 | because every time you add a font, ultimately when you send
this off what's going to happen is they are going to have to be
| | 02:03 | embedded or the other end user's going to have to have these.
| | 02:05 | So I typically keep it as simple as possible.
Myriad Pro is a little crazy but you can try that.
| | 02:11 | I usually stick with Arial, Times, things like
that. You will be able to see that the font size is
| | 02:14 | to the right there, so we can make it a
little bit bigger and I would like to do that.
| | 02:17 | Click on the font size and let's make it
something like 26 point. That looks pretty good.
| | 02:22 | You can bold it if you want, italicize it, underline.
You will see all those up there in the toolbar.
| | 02:26 | You can also change the alignment, you have got
left, center, right. Now these are not alignments
| | 02:30 | on the page, these are alignments
within this little box the text is in.
| | 02:33 | The other thing we can do is we have a lot
more formatting options available to us.
| | 02:37 | That you don't see out here necessarily, so if you come up
to the Window menu, you will learn that eventually as you go
| | 02:42 | through you will find shortcuts to do this.
| | 02:44 | You will see you have the Font and the Paragraph palettes.
| | 02:47 | Open up Font and what happens is both palettes open
up. You should be able to see them floating over here.
| | 02:53 | Grab it by the title bar, the blue bar up top and
you can drag these just about anywhere you want to.
| | 02:58 | I will drag them right out here and let it go.
| | 02:59 | So in the Font palette you will see some of the same things
| | 03:02 | that we saw. We have the font right here, the font family,
you have got the size to the right. You have got bold,
| | 03:07 | you have got italic, you have got underline. There's
a lot of different things you can do that too.
| | 03:11 | You also have strike through, underline right here,
a font color and if you click on the font color here,
| | 03:17 | at the A, you will be able to see you
can change the color if you would like.
| | 03:19 | I will try something a little different.
| | 03:21 | I don't get crazy with this a lot of times.
| | 03:23 | So you got a nice color and it's hard to tell out
there because it's actually selected right now.
| | 03:28 | You also have some other options
for what's called Baseline Shift.
| | 03:30 | This allows you to take like a
registration mark and move it up or down.
| | 03:35 | You can do horizontal and vertical scale, which
scales your text. That's the two right here.
| | 03:39 | That stretches and squishes your text, very technical
terms. You don't really want to do that too often.
| | 03:44 | And you can do like letter spacing here, which is
usually kerning or tracking, which I tend not to do.
| | 03:49 | Auto Kern, if you turn that on, tries to
automatically change the spacing between the letters
| | 03:53 | so they look a little bit better. Sometimes that helps.
| | 03:56 | Click on Paragraph, the Paragraph tab. We have the ability
to align. These are just aligning in the box. Align left,
| | 04:01 | center, right. You can see it's not going to do too
much out there because it's in that little box.
| | 04:06 | You can also align it vertically, top, middle, bottom.
| | 04:08 | We have Indents, which are paragraph indents.
| | 04:10 | If you want to want to push the text in from the edge
of the box, the left or right edge, you can do that.
| | 04:15 | You can also apply spacing above or below each paragraph.
| | 04:19 | So that will be above each one.
| | 04:21 | So it is just a bunch of simple text here. We're going
to kind of leave it alone. Go ahead and close the Font
| | 04:25 | and Paragraph palettes. You can click on the big X here
to close both and the last thing I want to do when we talk
| | 04:30 | about text is come up under Window and I want
to open up what's called the Layout palette.
| | 04:36 | This is going to open up the Layout and the Object palettes,
should put them on the right side of your workspace
| | 04:41 | and anytime you have any objects on the page, a logo,
textbox, text field, whatever, and it is selected if you come
| | 04:49 | to the Object palette here it will
tell you what type of object it is.
| | 04:53 | So right now it is just a textbox.
| | 04:55 | There's a lot of things we could do if there's lot more
text in here, but we have a simple single line of text.
| | 05:00 | Now if you click on the Layout palette tab you will see
right there, there's a lot of things we can do here.
| | 05:05 | Now we have what's called Expand To Fit.
| | 05:06 | With these on, if you turn these on,
what's going to happen is the width
| | 05:10 | and height are going to automatically expand to fit the box.
| | 05:13 | With these off it is going to make it
so the text wraps in the box shape.
| | 05:17 | Now let's talk just a second about the
box out here. I keep mentioning that.
| | 05:21 | This box or this text is inside- if you come
to the edge, you will see a crosshairs kind
| | 05:26 | of show up like a 4 arrow deal.
| | 05:28 | If you click on an edge you will select the box itself.
| | 05:31 | If you come to the center now, you
will see that you have four arrows.
| | 05:35 | If you want to you can move or re-
shape the box as you see it here.
| | 05:39 | You always got to look at the edge of the
textbox itself to tell you what's going on.
| | 05:43 | If you click and drag in the middle you will move the box.
| | 05:46 | If you want to resize this you can come
go a corner or the edge, click and drag,
| | 05:51 | and let's say I want conference registration to be split,
what it will do is it will force registration to go
| | 05:56 | to the next line and if you do that this box
will usually no longer expand to fit text.
| | 06:01 | It will automatically kind of say
that's the widest we will go
| | 06:05 | and as you add text it simply pulls the
textbox down and makes it taller for you.
| | 06:09 | I don't want to keep it wider so let's click and drag
to the right here so you can see registration on that line.
| | 06:13 | And if you notice here, if you make the
textbox too small, you will see a red plus.
| | 06:17 | A red plus means the text does not fit in the box.
| | 06:19 | So I am going to make sure that I click
and drag that open so you can see the text.
| | 06:23 | And the other thing is when you are moving a box or editing
the shape of it or size of it, if you want to get back
| | 06:28 | to editing text, if you double-click you will
get back in your text and you can start typing.
| | 06:33 | If you are in typing text here, you can select
the text do your thing, you will notice the color
| | 06:37 | of the edge of the box here- a little different.
| | 06:39 | If you want to move the box or reshape it, you can
come to the edge or come to a point and do just that.
| | 06:45 | So that allows you to quickly and
easily edit that or change that.
| | 06:48 | If you decide you want to delete the
box itself, you have to select the box.
| | 06:51 | So I would come to the edge or corner, click, you
will see the box that's selected and press Delete.
| | 06:56 | There are several ways to be able to do that.
| | 06:58 | Understanding how text works in LiveCycle Designer
can be very important because you going to want
| | 07:02 | to put the scripted text or headlines on the page
to make it so your end user can find information
| | 07:07 | and fill out the form just that much easier.
| | 07:10 | If you are going to keep going, you
might want to save your file right now
| | 07:12 | by doing a File, Save and we will move on to the next video.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Drawing objects| 00:00 | We'll take a look at how to add some graphics
elements to the page such as boxes, circles and lines.
| | 00:06 | So by the end of this video, you should feel
pretty comfortable with the different types
| | 00:09 | of drawing tools you can use in LiveCycle Designer.
| | 00:12 | If you are just joining us, you can open up grunform_draw
and that will have the text and the picture out there
| | 00:16 | so you can just start adding some objects.
| | 00:19 | A lot of times, you want to add a little bit of dressing
to the file just so that you can separate content
| | 00:23 | by drawing a line or by simply
having a box of color out there
| | 00:27 | so that you can kind of separate
different parts of the form.
| | 00:29 | Make it not so monotonous.
| | 00:31 | So, if you look over in the right, you
are going to see your Object Library.
| | 00:33 | You should be able to see My Favorites.
| | 00:35 | Make sure the arrow is pointing down;
otherwise you can click to open that up.
| | 00:38 | And you will see that we have a bunch
of different drawing tools out here.
| | 00:41 | If you've worked in Illustrator or Photoshop,
things like that, especially Illustrator,
| | 00:46 | a lot of times when I say drawing tools,
it means that you have the ability to draw.
| | 00:50 | We have a limited ability to draw inside of LiveCycle
Designer simply because there's a lot of things
| | 00:55 | that are already created for us that we simply drag
in the page or use and then reshape or resize or edit.
| | 01:01 | So we are going to add just a simple line on the page and
a lot of the properties we apply here are going to apply
| | 01:06 | to the circles, rectangles and
different things we can set up.
| | 01:09 | So I want to put a line so you can
simply click and drag the line out.
| | 01:12 | You can also double-click to get it on the
page. Put it below Conference Registration,
| | 01:16 | you'll feel it snap in there,
release and you've got yourself a line.
| | 01:21 | Now, to change the line size, style, things like
that, we can simply drag to change the size.
| | 01:26 | If you come to the line, you are going
to notice there's two points on it.
| | 01:29 | If you don't see that, you want to click on the line again.
| | 01:32 | Come to one of the edges of corners here, click, hold
down and pull away and you will notice that as you drag,
| | 01:37 | you can simply make the line bigger or smaller.
| | 01:40 | Now, if you drag all way cross, I'm going to
come to the edge, you are going to be able to snap
| | 01:43 | to that purplely blue line there,
that's kind of the edge of the form,
| | 01:46 | and release your mouse and that should make a straight line.
| | 01:49 | Now, if doesn't, that's OK, we can fix that pretty easily.
| | 01:52 | Now, once you draw a line, if you want
to delete it, you simply press Delete.
| | 01:55 | If you want to copy it, we can copy it using Edit, Copy.
| | 01:58 | If we want to change the properties,
we have to open up our Object palette.
| | 02:01 | Come to the Window menu, choose Object.
| | 02:04 | You will see that we've got Layout
and Object. Both will open.
| | 02:07 | Take a look. If you choose Object, only Object will open
and you will be able to see that if you click on an Object,
| | 02:11 | you want to look at the Object palette because
it's going to show you what kind of object it is.
| | 02:16 | It also shows you usually some
appearance options you have got.
| | 02:19 | If you look at Appearance here, if your line was a little
bit screwed up, just watch. If I take this and drag it down,
| | 02:24 | if it did something like that, if you look in here,
| | 02:26 | you are going to see that you've
got four buttons for types of lines.
| | 02:29 | If it didn't do it perfectly straight across
horizontally, you can simply choose Horizontal Line
| | 02:33 | and it will force it to be a horizontal line.
| | 02:36 | You can also change it to a Vertical
Line and that's going to kind
| | 02:38 | of make it disappear. It jumps to the left over there.
| | 02:41 | You can also make it do a from left to right,
top to bottom and the other way around as well.
| | 02:45 | I want to make sure that it's a horizontal line.
| | 02:47 | It's kind of rotating around one
point, the left point over there.
| | 02:50 | And you can change the color, the size
and the style of the line as well.
| | 02:54 | So if you look where it says Line
Style, click Solid, that popup menu.
| | 02:58 | You can change it to a dashed, to dotted, different types of
things you can do. I'll do something like a dotted line maybe.
| | 03:03 | And if you want to make it a little
bit bigger, it's pretty small.
| | 03:05 | You can change the value just to the right here.
| | 03:07 | If you double-click on that value, it will select it.
| | 03:09 | You've got to be real careful.
| | 03:11 | This is in inches, so if you type
in 1, it's going to be really big.
| | 03:14 | So I might just do like 0.01 and
there we go, it's a little bit bigger.
| | 03:18 | If you want to zoom in just like
Acrobat, you will see a plus
| | 03:21 | and a minus right up here in the toolbars at the very top.
| | 03:24 | You can kind of zoom in and take a
look at it if you want to do that.
| | 03:27 | You can also change the color of the line.
| | 03:28 | So if you click on the Line Color right here,
we can try something a little bit different,
| | 03:32 | maybe match my text color, and there's a line.
| | 03:34 | Now, if you want to, you can move it wherever you want.
| | 03:36 | If you click to make sure it's selected, it
should tell you it's selected over here in Object.
| | 03:41 | You can either use your mouse to drag up and down and
what that does is snaps it to the grids out there.
| | 03:47 | If you also want to, you can use your arrow keys.
| | 03:50 | Use your arrow down key and your arrow up
key, you can move it around a little bit.
| | 03:54 | So, when you work with drawing objects in LiveCycle
Designer, you have a lot of starting points,
| | 03:58 | circles, squares, lines that you can work with.
| | 04:00 | You should now be able to put one on the
page and do some appearance properties to it.
| | 04:05 | So, to ensure that our page fits back in our window, come
up to the View menu, choose View and you will see a lot
| | 04:10 | of different ways to fit the page including
the width, the page itself and actual size.
| | 04:15 | Choose Fit Width and that should fit the
width of the page like we saw earlier.
| | 04:19 | Make sure that you save this document
and keep it open if you wish to continue.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Working with drawing aids| 00:00 | We will take a look at how to work with
drawing aids, things like guides and rulers.
| | 00:04 | These things are going to help you to
work a little bit faster inside of you
| | 00:07 | and also take away a little frustration
if you start working.
| | 00:10 | So, I've got a grunform.PDF open.
| | 00:12 | If you are just joining us, you can open up grunform_aids
and we have got some things on the page here.
| | 00:18 | If you have been following along,
you notice that as we click on things
| | 00:21 | and we move them, they snap to the grid that's out here.
| | 00:24 | You can see these little dots out here,
there's a grid on the page automatically.
| | 00:28 | Come to the logo on top and click on the logo to select it.
| | 00:30 | And if you want to move it, just come anywhere inside
of it, click and drag and you will feel it start to snap
| | 00:35 | and it will also give you a little tool tip,
the measurements of where you are locating it.
| | 00:39 | Now, I want to keep it up there
and I want to show you something.
| | 00:42 | Let's say click on the line down there and you
decide you want to move it just a little bit.
| | 00:46 | If you click and drag that line up or
down, what it's going to do is it's going
| | 00:50 | to snap it in large chunks, large increments there.
| | 00:53 | If you want to move it just a little bit,
you need to tell it not to snap to the grid.
| | 00:57 | So, if you look out here, you should
see that the rulers are out by default.
| | 01:01 | You can see them sitting right there.
| | 01:02 | Matter of fact, if you come into the View menu,
you will see that we have our rulers right here.
| | 01:06 | We also have what's called the Grid and Snap to Grid.
| | 01:10 | These are two functions that are turned on by default.
| | 01:12 | The Grid is the series of dots out
here, vertical and horizontal dots.
| | 01:16 | Snap to Grid tells it to snap directly to that grid.
| | 01:19 | Now, if you would like to, you could simply
turn off Snap to Grid and still see it.
| | 01:23 | So, turn off Snap to Grid, come out with this line.
| | 01:27 | And if you just click and drag up and down, you will notice
that you can move it in smaller and smaller increments.
| | 01:33 | Now, this does mean also that you
can shift it left to right sometimes.
| | 01:37 | This line is snapping to the edge of
the form, so it won't let you do that.
| | 01:40 | But you can move it up and down in
ever smaller increments if you want to.
| | 01:44 | If you use your arrow keys up or down on
your keyboard, you will be able to see
| | 01:48 | that you can move it really in small increments up and down.
| | 01:51 | So I am using my up arrow keys right now.
| | 01:53 | If you are out here and you starting to
draw and you want to get things lined up,
| | 01:56 | you have got the grid to be able to do that to snap to.
| | 01:59 | You can also do things like add rulers or guides or
different things to be able to make it easier for you.
| | 02:04 | If you come to the ruler out here, you will be
able to see that we can add guides to the page.
| | 02:09 | Guides are drawn out.
| | 02:10 | They are not going to be same with the PDF.
| | 02:11 | They don't always let you print and I usually turn them off.
| | 02:13 | But they allow you to line things up.
| | 02:15 | So, if you want to put a guide on the
page, there's a couple ways to do this.
| | 02:18 | Suppose I want to put a vertical guide out here.
| | 02:20 | If you come to the horizontal ruler about 6" and
double-click, it will open up your drawing aids.
| | 02:26 | Now, what happens here is the drawing aids, it pretty
much doesn't matter where you click, we just tried 6".
| | 02:31 | Where you double-click, the drawing
aids allow you to set guides out here.
| | 02:35 | Now, there are several ways to put guides
on the page, I want to point this out.
| | 02:38 | This way, what we are going to do is we have a lot of
the options we just saw up in the menus, Show Grid,
| | 02:43 | Snap to Grid, Show Guidelines, Guides basically,
these are the things we are about to draw.
| | 02:47 | You have got your horizontal and vertical
rulers as well as what's called long crosshairs.
| | 02:52 | Just to show you this, if you take your cursor right here
| | 02:53 | or move your cursor around, you
will see you just have the arrow.
| | 02:56 | If you turn on long crosshairs, you move your cursor
out, you will be able to see the long crosshairs.
| | 03:00 | This helps you sometimes to line things up on the ruler
so you can see it a little bit easier like 2 and 2.
| | 03:05 | Usually, this would drive me crazy.
| | 03:07 | So I will turn this off.
| | 03:08 | Object boundaries are typically the edge of the box ,
| | 03:11 | which can really be helpful things
or kind of sticking over each other.
| | 03:14 | And right down here is where you
can actually set guidelines.
| | 03:17 | If you want to set a guideline, let's say a vertical
guideline of about 6", come right here to vertical guides.
| | 03:23 | You are going to click Add, and what it
does it says "where do you want to put it?"
| | 03:26 | I will type in 6, press Return or Enter usually or
click somewhere else and it sets a guideline at 6".
| | 03:33 | Now, this is a very manual way of setting guidelines.
| | 03:36 | If you want to, you can come out
here and once you get them out there,
| | 03:39 | you are going to see this little
arrow on the 6" ruler out here.
| | 03:42 | You can actually move this around if you click and drag.
| | 03:45 | So once they are out there, you can drag them.
| | 03:47 | So, we can set up guides vertically
as well as horizontal if we want to.
| | 03:51 | I am going to close this little drawing edge thing up.
| | 03:54 | If you also want to do this, you
can come up to this corner up here.
| | 03:57 | There's 5000 ways to do everything.
| | 03:59 | It seems some ways are better than others.
| | 04:01 | If you come up to that little corner right there and
you double-click on that, that will open the same thing.
| | 04:05 | I am going to close that up.
| | 04:07 | If you want to draw other guides, what you can do is this.
| | 04:10 | You can come up to that corner, instead of doing
it by numbers, you can click, pull straight down
| | 04:15 | and you can pull a guide out of that area.
| | 04:18 | So, suppose you want to put a guide at about 2", actually,
let's go to about one and three quarters roughly,
| | 04:23 | right about there, let go and you
have got yourself a guideline.
| | 04:26 | Same thing, if you want to come and put a vertical
guide out here, come to the corner, click and drag out,
| | 04:31 | drag it to about let's say 41/2" release
and you have got yourself a guide.
| | 04:36 | If you want to, you can get rid of guides pretty easily.
| | 04:38 | If you click on one of the guides and drag it right
back over here and release it, it will go away.
| | 04:44 | You can do the same thing for horizontal guides.
| | 04:45 | If you click and drag, drag it let's say straight up
right back to where it started, you can get rid of those.
| | 04:50 | With guides, there's one more thing we
can do, actually a lot of things we can do
| | 04:54 | but one more thing I want to show you here.
| | 04:56 | If you come up to the corner and you
click and hold down and drag away,
| | 04:59 | you can actually set a crosshair of guides out here.
| | 05:02 | So, if you want to put something and pinpoint it let's
say right out here in the center, as soon as you let go,
| | 05:07 | it's going to put two guidelines out there for
you and you could even go out and grab each one
| | 05:12 | and move it independently still or you can get
rid of them by simply clicking and dragging,
| | 05:17 | dragging it towards the corner rather and get rid of those.
| | 05:20 | What I would like you to do is I want to have a guide,
horizontal guide that I set out here at about 11/2" roughly.
| | 05:27 | So I will drag it right up here, release the guide and
there's the guideline, you should see it out there.
| | 05:31 | And I will get rid of this vertical one out
here since this is kind getting in the way.
| | 05:34 | So, if you click and drag that one, drag it all the
way to left again, put it right back where it started,
| | 05:38 | you should have just the one guide on the page.
| | 05:41 | So, that's the way to actually set
out guides working with the Grid.
| | 05:43 | If you want to change the Grid itself,
the Grid is a little bit smaller.
| | 05:47 | You can see the dots out here.
| | 05:48 | If you want to change how the Grid
works as well, you can do that.
| | 05:51 | The Grid allows you to put smaller and larger increments
and we actually saw it in the dialog box we are just in.
| | 05:56 | If you come to the corner up here and
double-click, you can get the drawing aids again.
| | 06:00 | You will see that we can actually
change the origin on the ruler.
| | 06:04 | So, where the 00 starts, it always starts near
upper left corner of the page to start with.
| | 06:08 | If you want to get it out here, maybe on the center
or somewhere like that, you can change its origin.
| | 06:13 | And the intervals right here, these are how many of these
little dots or how many grids that we have per inch.
| | 06:20 | If you want to change that, you can come
in here where it says something like 8.
| | 06:23 | And maybe you want to have finer increments.
| | 06:25 | You can type in bigger numbers in here so
I can go to like 10 or something like that.
| | 06:29 | And what that does you can see it out
there, it puts more dots on the page itself.
| | 06:33 | So, that will make it so that you have
finer increments as you move objects.
| | 06:37 | Now, I am going to set that back
to 8 because I think that's going
| | 06:39 | to make me seasick but it can help you out a little bit.
| | 06:42 | So, there we go.
| | 06:43 | So we've got guideline.
| | 06:43 | I am going to close this up, you can see the guideline at
the very bottom where it says horizontal, close this up
| | 06:49 | and we have got ourselves the ability to add
things like rulers, guidelines, you can go out here
| | 06:54 | and change the grid itself all to make
it easier for you to move objects.
| | 06:58 | If you decide that as you are moving an object like this
picture up here and it's snapping to some other grids
| | 07:03 | or guides and you don't want that, you can turn that
off by going under View and turn off Snap to Grid.
| | 07:09 | Just for right now, I want to make sure
that that is turned on so as we keep going,
| | 07:12 | it's going to make it a little bit easier.
| | 07:14 | So go ahead and choose Snap to Grid and so that's still on.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
6. Working with LiveCycle FieldsCreating text fields| 00:00 | When working with a LiveCycle Designer form, the biggest
part about the form is not the design necessarily,
| | 00:06 | that is great, but it's the form fields that we need to add.
| | 00:09 | So, what we are going to do is we are going to
start out by looking at how to create text fields.
| | 00:14 | I've got grunform_fields open right now , which
has a little bit of content and a header up there,
| | 00:19 | and we are going to start up by putting just a simple
field out here, which asks for somebody's first name.
| | 00:24 | Within the right side, you should see your
Object Library palette over the there.
| | 00:27 | You will notice that in My Favorites, the ones we are
going to typically use, you will see a text field.
| | 00:33 | I love these little icons because it tries to show you
which one of these are fields and which ones are not.
| | 00:37 | A little pencil right there's saying that
it is going to be editable by someone.
| | 00:41 | So, for us to use the text field, we can
either double-click or drag it on to the page.
| | 00:46 | I tend to drag.
| | 00:47 | So we drag out here, put it right
below conference registration.
| | 00:50 | You should see this light blue line here,
there's like purplely blue line, that's a guide
| | 00:55 | and release and you have got yourself text field.
| | 00:57 | Now, the way the text field works
in here is you have it captioned
| | 01:01 | to left typically and you have the field to the right.
| | 01:02 | They will both go out together and they
are treated as one unit or one object.
| | 01:07 | So, if you decide to move this, come anywhere in here
and click and drag, it's going to move both of them.
| | 01:12 | So you can move it anyway you want to on the page.
| | 01:14 | If you want to resize it, you can do that as well.
| | 01:17 | If you come to a corner or a side,
click and drag, it will resize it.
| | 01:21 | Now, typically what happens is it resizes
the field itself, not this text on the left.
| | 01:27 | Now, if we want to edit the text in left, if you
double-click on text field over there that you go
| | 01:31 | to your cursor in there, go and type in first name.
| | 01:34 | So, yeah, there we go, and we have got our field all set.
| | 01:39 | Now, whenever you drag a text field on the page and you
create a text field, you want to go out and you want
| | 01:44 | to change a few properties for the text field,
namely, every field needs to have a separate name.
| | 01:49 | This is just the way forms work.
| | 01:51 | LiveCycle Designer will put a name
on the field automatically
| | 01:54 | but you really want to make sure you put what you want.
| | 01:57 | So, we are going to go out and
set up some properties for this.
| | 02:00 | So, with this selected, you can click on it one
more time, you are going to see these four arrows.
| | 02:03 | Click on it one more time, that will get you to the orange.
| | 02:05 | The orange typically means you have a
field and a text that to the left selected
| | 02:09 | and you can move it or resize the whole thing.
| | 02:12 | Come to the Window menu, you will see
the Object as well as the Layout palette.
| | 02:16 | If you click on Layout, it will open both Object and Layout.
| | 02:19 | It will pop that open.
| | 02:21 | On the right side of your workspace,
you will see the Object palette.
| | 02:24 | Click on that first and notice what we get here.
| | 02:28 | Now, as you are working in LiveCycle
Designer, a lot of times,
| | 02:31 | you can have a lot of different types of palette open.
| | 02:33 | And as you click on one or another or open another one, what
happens is the previous ones tend to kind of collapse up.
| | 02:40 | Now, I tend to close the Howto.
| | 02:43 | Keep it open for the moment but I will
probably be closing it eventually.
| | 02:46 | The Object palette is really important simply
because whenever you click on something on the page,
| | 02:51 | the Object palette is going to show you most of the
properties for that object; things like what its name,
| | 02:57 | what kind of field is it, that sort of thing.
| | 02:59 | You have got three tabs up here to focus on.
| | 03:01 | You have got the field tab, which is pretty
much most of the properties for the field itself.
| | 03:06 | You have got a value tab.
| | 03:08 | This allows you to tell what can go
in the field like is it optional,
| | 03:12 | can you put a pattern in there, that sort of thing.
| | 03:15 | And you have also got the binding tab.
| | 03:16 | The binding tab is mostly for, if you have data
coming from an external source or something like that,
| | 03:22 | like some body's name coming from the database, you can
bind it to this field and have it fill out automatically.
| | 03:26 | The reason why we are coming to the binding
tab is because of the name right here.
| | 03:30 | This is probably the most important thing in here.
| | 03:32 | We have to name this.
| | 03:33 | So we will call this First Name.
| | 03:35 | When I name fields, I typically try and keep it
lowercase, no spaces in the name, this is my own style.
| | 03:41 | I try not to do too many crazy characters.
| | 03:44 | You can use numbers, but don't use like
exclamation points, things like that.
| | 03:47 | This is the name of the field.
| | 03:49 | The reason why this is important is because
when somebody sends you this form data back,
| | 03:53 | typically it sent you the name of the
field as well as what they typed in.
| | 03:57 | So, that will become important.
| | 03:59 | Now, for the field itself, we have
got a lot of changing we can do.
| | 04:02 | Come back to the field tab.
| | 04:04 | If you look right here where it
says Type is a text field right now.
| | 04:08 | Great thing about LiveCycle Designer is you can change a
form field to anything you want without having to delete it.
| | 04:14 | Suppose, you want this to be a
button instead, click the popup menu
| | 04:18 | and you simply choose what kind of button you want it to be.
| | 04:21 | It will force it to be a different field.
| | 04:23 | This is really great.
| | 04:24 | If you're used to work with Acrobat
forms, that can be kind of frustrating.
| | 04:28 | You are going to notice the caption here.
| | 04:29 | Caption is what appears to the left.
| | 04:31 | You can either change it out there in the design view
or you can change it over here in the caption field.
| | 04:36 | You will notice the appearance below.
| | 04:38 | By default, you have a sunken box.
| | 04:40 | If you click on the arrow to the right, you will be able
to see that you can change the box itself to be none ,
| | 04:45 | which means you don't even see the outline
of the field, you can make it underline ,
| | 04:49 | which I have seen a lot, you can make it solid.
| | 04:52 | And sunken box just looks a little bit more 3D.
| | 04:55 | So, what I will try and do here is I will make it underline.
| | 04:58 | This is underline, and take a look, this
is where a lot of forms coming from Word
| | 05:01 | or other places, look just a line underneath.
| | 05:05 | Below that, you are going to see that
you have got a lot of other options.
| | 05:08 | Now, I want to point out one more thing in that
appearance menu because this is something that people do
| | 05:13 | and don't realize it's not going to happen for them.
| | 05:15 | So, click on the popup menu.
| | 05:16 | You will see that you can actually set
a custom setting for your appearance.
| | 05:21 | Click Custom and what this does is it
opens up this custom appearance dialog box.
| | 05:26 | Now, you can change the borders or the edges of
the field itself independently if you want to.
| | 05:33 | So, if you look where it says Edit Edges,
we can do it together or individually.
| | 05:37 | If you do it individually, you can set the
style so you can solid, dashed, dotted,
| | 05:42 | etc. You can set the size and you
can set the color typically.
| | 05:47 | Now, the thing about working in here is if you
get out here and you start working with this,
| | 05:51 | I try not to get crazy with this because
there's so much you can do in here.
| | 05:55 | I tend to do them all at the same time.
| | 05:57 | So, clicking on edges here instead of doing edit
individually, I will choose edit together usually.
| | 06:02 | That will say that right now they are
mixed because it's only in underline.
| | 06:05 | If I choose a solid box, it will
put a solid box when we click OK.
| | 06:10 | You can change the size of the
line around the box if you want to.
| | 06:14 | You've got to be really careful, don't
go too big, it will get really huge.
| | 06:17 | And you can change the color if you want to do that.
| | 06:19 | I am going to go to the dark gray.
| | 06:21 | By looking down here with these corners, you are going
to see that you can actually set up a rounded corner,
| | 06:26 | fancy corners, I don't know what they call, inverted,
| | 06:29 | etc. The thing about the corners though is they
will not show up if you save this as a PDF file.
| | 06:36 | It's got to be dynamic XML form
to be able to see these things.
| | 06:40 | In most cases, I would totally suggest don't
go that route with corners and things like that
| | 06:44 | because it just adds file size as well but you can,
| | 06:46 | you are going to see a background fill
you can change the fill of the box.
| | 06:50 | I tend to put a white color in there, a solid color.
| | 06:53 | You can if you want to put a linear pattern in there.
| | 06:57 | Linear pattern allows you to go from one color to another.
| | 06:59 | It's sort of like a blend or a gradient
if you are used to hearing that.
| | 07:03 | So you can blend from one color to
another, left, right, top, bottom.
| | 07:07 | You can also put a pattern in there.
| | 07:09 | You can make it a radio blend.
| | 07:10 | I once again would try to keep it in control here because
this is all great stuff but it all adds to file size.
| | 07:18 | So I will choose Solid and I tend
to put a white color in there simply
| | 07:21 | because you can see right there it's already white, simply
because if I put a background color or a box behind this,
| | 07:27 | it won't show, you won't see the box except for the outline.
| | 07:30 | So now, it's pretty good.
| | 07:31 | Click OK. To get your box out there, you
should see the border all way around.
| | 07:35 | There's no preview.
| | 07:36 | You've got to click OK.
| | 07:37 | Now, we have Allow Multiple Lines.
| | 07:39 | It allows people to type in multiple lines so it scrolls.
| | 07:42 | We don't want to do that for first name.
| | 07:44 | You can limit the number of characters.
| | 07:46 | You turn that on.
| | 07:47 | You would simply type in and tell it how many
characters to limit to, like 230 or something like that.
| | 07:53 | You can limit the length to the visible area.
| | 07:55 | That means that it won't go beyond field edge here.
| | 07:59 | Combination of these allows you to
chunk it up into different characters.
| | 08:03 | This is usually for a social security number
where you see like the number, number, number.
| | 08:08 | There's a line between each number and I am
not going to do that, we will turn that off.
| | 08:13 | Under field format here, if you click Plaintext
Only, you can make it so it's rich text.
| | 08:17 | Rich text means you can make it bold
or change the colors, things like that.
| | 08:21 | Once again, I keep it as simple as I can.
| | 08:23 | If you want to set up what's called a pattern
validation, a data pattern, things like that, we can.
| | 08:29 | We will get to that in a later video.
| | 08:31 | The presence is really important.
| | 08:33 | By default, it's visible.
| | 08:34 | You can make it so it's visible
only on screen but not printing.
| | 08:38 | You can make it visible when it prints, but not on screen.
| | 08:41 | You can make it invisible.
| | 08:42 | You can make it totally hidden.
| | 08:44 | Or you can make it if somebody does like duplex printing or
something like that, one-side or the two-side printing only.
| | 08:49 | Now, there are reasons why you are
going to make it screen or print only.
| | 08:52 | Screen only, I might put a picture out
there and if I don't want to waste a lot
| | 08:55 | of ink, I could say "make it just print only."
| | 08:58 | Invisible typically is for fields that are
sending data that you don't want the user to see.
| | 09:03 | That's not being bad, it's just the way it works.
| | 09:06 | If you want to, you can change a different locale.
| | 09:08 | There's tons of languages built in here.
| | 09:10 | The default locale is what you are set at right now.
| | 09:12 | I am in English USA.
| | 09:14 | You can set it to the viewer system locale
so it will try and change the language.
| | 09:18 | I don't mess with that too much.
| | 09:20 | You've got to be careful with it
because of foreign language differences.
| | 09:24 | Click value up top.
| | 09:25 | And if you take a look when you get a text field out
here, you can tell it so that it's user entered ,
| | 09:30 | which makes sense, you want people to enter in here, but
you can make it so it's Optional, Recommended or Required.
| | 09:36 | Recommended will say you might want to fill
this out if you haven't, you don't have to.
| | 09:40 | And Required, you have to fill this out to submit the form.
| | 09:44 | Calculated is typically if you have a series
of numbers and you want to calculate or add
| | 09:48 | or subtract, things like that, perform a calculation.
| | 09:51 | Read Only means they can't enter a custom,
they just have to accept what goes in there
| | 09:55 | as the calculation or you can have the user override this.
| | 09:59 | Protected, basically it's locked.
| | 10:01 | And Read Only, you can only read it.
| | 10:03 | This is for just data basically.
| | 10:05 | The default is the default.
| | 10:07 | It shows up in the field as the user looks.
| | 10:10 | I tend not to do this too often.
| | 10:11 | Later on, we will do it for a text field.
| | 10:14 | You can also set up what's called a Validation Pattern.
| | 10:17 | This basically means that it can validate
against a number, date, things like that.
| | 10:21 | We don't need to do it here.
| | 10:22 | And we have already taken look at binding.
| | 10:25 | For every field you have got in
the page, if you click Layout,
| | 10:27 | layout once again will show you a
few things out here that you can do.
| | 10:30 | You have got the position.
| | 10:32 | X and Y is where it's located on the page.
| | 10:35 | X position is how far from the left edge.
| | 10:37 | Y is how far from the top edge of the page.
| | 10:40 | The width and the height, you can type
those in here or click and drag out here
| | 10:44 | to change the size of this if you want to.
| | 10:45 | You will see Expand to Fit, that typically
means if I type in text to things like that,
| | 10:51 | it will expand this area to fit the text I typed in.
| | 10:54 | The Anchoring is if you want to rotate or things like
that, it depends on where it's anchored, upper left,
| | 10:59 | lower right and we will take a look at that right now.
| | 11:02 | You've got margins you can put in here if you want
to put the text in from any edge, from the left,
| | 11:07 | from the top, from the bottom and from the right.
| | 11:09 | You have got all margins in here.
| | 11:12 | Caption is what we are looking at right here first name.
| | 11:14 | If you really want to, you don't
have to put it on the left side.
| | 11:17 | If you choose left, you can put it on the
right, you can put it on the top of it,
| | 11:21 | you can put it on the bottom or have no caption.
| | 11:23 | I will choose left because that's pretty typical.
| | 11:26 | And the Reserve is something that's really important.
| | 11:30 | If you take a look at the text field and you look at it
really close and you think maybe there's too much gap
| | 11:34 | between the text and the field itself, you
can do one of two things to combat that.
| | 11:40 | You can come out here and click on the left edge of the
field, you will see the binding line there and arrows.
| | 11:45 | You can click and drag to the left.
| | 11:46 | That will try and change up that area
there so you have less area to show.
| | 11:50 | You can also change what's called a Reserve.
| | 11:52 | The Reserve is the width of that caption area.
| | 11:56 | I literally type in the Reserve here because
I want all of my caption areas to be the same.
| | 12:00 | So type in 0.8.
| | 12:02 | You don't have to do the "in,"
it remembers that or knows that.
| | 12:04 | Press Enter or Return and take a look
out there at the first name caption.
| | 12:08 | It's going to make it 0.8" wide from the left edge
here right in the left edge of the field there.
| | 12:14 | So, that area is 0.8".
| | 12:16 | So, when you are working with text field,
there's a lot of things we can do out here.
| | 12:19 | We can also increase the height by
dragging if you want to do that.
| | 12:22 | You've got to be careful though because sometimes
it's going to say we will make it multiple lines.
| | 12:26 | If you ever do anything out here and this dialog appears,
it's usually because you are doing something a little
| | 12:32 | out of the ordinary and I would just kind of watch that.
| | 12:34 | So I will click OK.
| | 12:35 | It's telling me right now but I have
just told it to make it multiple lines.
| | 12:39 | If I come back to the Object palette
over here, come to field, take a look.
| | 12:43 | I am going to make sure Allow Multiple Lines is not selected
| | 12:47 | and I will just drag it close a little bit
more so we can get it back where it was.
| | 12:51 | So, that's working with text fields,
a lot of things we can do there.
| | 12:54 | You should be able to go out and place
multiple types of text fields, give them names,
| | 12:58 | change their field appearances, things like their patterns
or any values you might want to associate with them.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Grouping content| 00:00 | Now we'll take a look at how to group objects.
| | 00:03 | If you're just joining us you can open up grunform_fields_groups. You
should see exactly what I see out in the page out here and when you're
| | 00:09 | working in LiveCycle Designer, there are times where you want
to be able to position things in such a way that if you move
| | 00:15 | one, all of them move. Like a header for instance.
| | 00:19 | We've got a logo up here in the corner,
| | 00:21 | We've also got a little text box here and a line that was drawn
right below. It's hard to see all the stuff simply because
| | 00:28 | there's a bunch of boxes showing up on here as well as gridlines, things like that. First of all, I'd like to show you how to group
| | 00:34 | things so that it's a little bit easier to find where things
are located and how they work together. So if I move the logo,
| | 00:41 | I want the text and the line to move as well.
| | 00:44 | So we're going to group them.
| | 00:46 | To select objects out here, if you click on the Grunbyte,
if you hold on the Shift key, You can click on multiple
| | 00:52 | objects. If you come to line there, hold the Shift
key, click on that, you can select that as well.
| | 00:57 | Now another way to select objects here, which I find to
be a little bit easier at times, is to drag around them.
| | 01:03 | So click somewhere where there's nothing.
| | 01:06 | Come up here. I'm going to come where
there's a blank area in the corner
| | 01:10 | and click drag, and here's the key. You've got to go all around each
object you want to include here to select . We're just selecting them first.
| | 01:17 | So I'm not going to go around First Name, I'm just going to go around
this line here. Release the mouse button and that should select all three
| | 01:23 | objects at one time.
| | 01:24 | Now we're going to group those together.
| | 01:26 | So if you come up under the Layout menu, if you like
shortcuts you can also right-click out there, you'll see Group.
| | 01:31 | Choose Group.
| | 01:33 | They are now grouped together. You can see there's a solid box
or a box around all three and a group basically means if you move
| | 01:39 | one, they'll all move as a group. Now if
you've worked with groups in other programs.
| | 01:45 | This program, they're a little bit different at times.
| | 01:48 | Click somewhere to deselect
| | 01:50 | and come up to the logo and click on the logo.
| | 01:53 | Now in other programs, other Adobe application,
you might expect if you click an object in a group
| | 01:58 | that the whole group would select.
| | 02:00 | Bu that's not the case here.
| | 02:02 | It lets you still select independent
objects. If you want to select the group,
| | 02:07 | I typically come where there's nothing in between, let's say.
You'll see a highlight show up and it'll say Group and if
| | 02:13 | you click between them, it will select the group.
| | 02:16 | If you click and drag somewhere where there's no object,
you can move the group up and down or wherever you want to put it.
| | 02:22 | That's actually a good thing because if you click on the text
over here you can still move that independent of the rest
| | 02:27 | of the group, but it's still all grouped together, which
is really important. So I'll move that down just a little bit
| | 02:33 | by undoing. I'll go to Edit,
| | 02:35 | Undo and that should move it back where it was.
| | 02:38 | As a group of objects, if you decide you want to add something
to a group, this is where it's a little interesting. You get
| | 02:43 | used to it and I really like this. Suppose that we had this First
Name field, and I wanted that to be part of the group so that
| | 02:49 | it would move with the whole group.
| | 02:52 | You can take any object and drag it within
the group and it becomes part of the group.
| | 02:57 | So come to the First Name field here,
| | 02:59 | click on it to select it,
| | 03:00 | click and drag.
| | 03:02 | Come up towards the group and what you're going to notice are the little teeny arrows in the corners over here. You'll see that arrow
| | 03:07 | right there. If you release right now, that
means it's going to become part of that group.
| | 03:12 | So if you come where there's nothing and click,
| | 03:15 | click and drag, you'll see that you
now have it as part of the group.
| | 03:18 | It's an easy way to add objects to a group, simply just dragging
them inside of the grouped area. They're got to be in there, in
| | 03:24 | the box. If you don't want something the part of group you can do
this. Just click on the object again, I'll drag it outside the group
| | 03:31 | put it let's say down here again and release.
| | 03:34 | And if you take a look, you're going to see that
as it goes around, it's still going to be part of it.
| | 03:38 | To remove it from a group, we're going to ungroup them.
| | 03:42 | So come to Layout.
| | 03:43 | I'm making sure it's still selected here. If you look right now,
you going to see Group and Ungroup are not selected. This is the
| | 03:49 | interesting thing/part of LiveCycle Designer.
You have to have the group selected, not the object.
| | 03:54 | So I've got just the object selected,
| | 03:56 | so if I click somewhere where there's nothing,
| | 03:58 | come to the middle here, click on Group.
| | 04:01 | Come to Layout. You'll see now Ungroup. Choose Ungroup.
| | 04:04 | Everything is ungrouped.
| | 04:06 | Click to deselect.
| | 04:08 | And I just want to group these together. Now, so we're just going
to click and drag across to select just the line, the conference
| | 04:13 | registration and the logo.
| | 04:15 | Select them all,
| | 04:16 | you've got to go all the way around.
| | 04:18 | Come up to Layout.
| | 04:19 | and group them together. Grouping makes it easier for you
to keep track of things, make it so that if you move one, they
| | 04:25 | move as a whole. If you intend it to be that way. So
groups can be very useful once you learn how they work.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using custom objects| 00:00 | We are going to take a look at how to add
custom objects from the Object Library now.
| | 00:04 | These are things that can make your life a lot easier.
| | 00:07 | It's like an address block or a country's popup menu.
| | 00:09 | I have got Grunform_field still open and if you are
just joining us you can open up grunform_fields_custom
| | 00:16 | on the right side over here you are going to see
Object Library I have got the Custom tab open.
| | 00:20 | Now what I have done is I have actually changed the size
of these in a previous video so if you want to change
| | 00:25 | and make these little icons to
match mine if you click on the arrow
| | 00:28 | to the right here you will see view you can make these
icons large, small or sort them however you want.
| | 00:33 | I will make this smaller so more fit in.
| | 00:35 | You are going to notice that we have
got a lot of custom objects built in
| | 00:38 | and these may seem more advanced
but they really help you a lot.
| | 00:43 | Instead of us going out to the page and putting out
8 different fields that have first name, last name,
| | 00:48 | country this sort of thing you can just simply drag
out an address block and it's all pre-made for you.
| | 00:54 | You then go in and edit what you wanted to do and say what
you want to say and you have got yourself an address block.
| | 00:59 | So click and drag address block out there.
| | 01:01 | Drag it where you want you will feel it snapping in.
| | 01:03 | If it's not snapping it's because
your Snap to Grid is turned off.
| | 01:07 | You go under view and make sure
the Snap to Grid is turned on.
| | 01:11 | We got those out there now if you click somewhere
to deselect you can see all the fields on the page.
| | 01:17 | Now what I would like to do is we
have got first name out here already
| | 01:19 | and we have got name I want to make name last name.
| | 01:22 | So if you come to the word name there if you double
click on it you should be able to type in last name.
| | 01:30 | You will also notice that the field here the first day
| | 01:33 | in field the caption this is what's called the
caption it's a little bit wider than the rest.
| | 01:37 | I want to make them all the same.
| | 01:39 | Now you can if you want to click and drag the dividing
line here on the left side of the field to the right to try
| | 01:45 | and visibly match this field here but it's going to
take you a long time and it's not going to be perfect.
| | 01:50 | So what we are going to do is we are going to change the
caption size for each one of these to match the first name.
| | 01:56 | So click on the first name field to
select it, go up to window we are going
| | 02:00 | to open up the layout palette so choose layout.
| | 02:03 | I will typically will put it on the right
side over here and open up layout and object.
| | 02:08 | You will see under layout we have
the position of the caption ,
| | 02:11 | which is on the left typically and you will see the reserve.
| | 02:14 | The reserve is once again if you look
at the previous video I was talking
| | 02:17 | about the text fields these are
working with the width of the caption.
| | 02:21 | I want the width of the caption
to be the same in all of these.
| | 02:23 | So what we are going to do is we are going to
select last name, address, city and country
| | 02:26 | and change the reserve to match
this one , which is 0.8 inches.
| | 02:31 | Click on the Last Name, hold on the Shift
key, click on address, city and country,
| | 02:37 | come to reserve you can double click in there to select
that value down there and type in 0.8 you don't have
| | 02:43 | to do the IN because it will remember that.
| | 02:45 | Press enter and it will make him all the same.
| | 02:48 | Now the last thing we need do here is we placed it out
it's just like you draw in all these text fields yourself.
| | 02:54 | If you click on the Last Name field we changed the
caption and I want the field name to match so if you come
| | 03:00 | to the object palette you are going to see the binding
tab it just takes getting used to all of these things.
| | 03:05 | We are going to change the name of the field to last name.
| | 03:08 | And if you really want to change the names of these fields
so that when the data is sent to you that you understand
| | 03:15 | and you know what they are as you click on
each field you will see the name located there.
| | 03:20 | Once again click on the first name field you will see
| | 03:22 | that it is also called first name
so it's matching what I did there.
| | 03:26 | The name you can mention in all these you want it
to be lower case very few spaces if we can avoid it.
| | 03:31 | Numbers were OK in some cases things
like that, keep it really simple.
| | 03:35 | And I will take the first name field here let's just drag
that open a little bit, make it a little wider so click
| | 03:40 | on it to select it, come to the right,
click on that dot and you can just drag it
| | 03:44 | over here and kind of try and snap it in place.
| | 03:47 | We will get it pretty close snap and it's not perfect.
| | 03:50 | If we wanted to get that perfect what you
could do is come to the Layout palette here.
| | 03:54 | You will see that you have a width here.
| | 03:56 | If you click on the last name and look at the width
4.2 you could do the same thing the first name.
| | 04:01 | So you click on First Name, come to width there I
will double click to select that and type in 4.2
| | 04:08 | and press Enter or return and that should do it.
| | 04:10 | Now if you didn't have the Snap On you could probably
put a guideline and have it snap to the guideline
| | 04:15 | but that's doing it numerically I think
can be a little bit easier at times.
| | 04:19 | So we got ourselves a nice little address block ready to go.
| | 04:23 | If you start working with Form Fields inside of LiveCycle
Designer you are going to realize pretty quickly that over
| | 04:29 | in the Object Library if you go over to the Object Library
again that the custom area is very valuable you are going
| | 04:34 | to use that stuff a lot, dates, address books, US states
things like that quick easy way to be able to drag those
| | 04:40 | out in the page and get yourself started.
| | 04:42 | So if you are going to continue go ahead and save this file.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating drop-down menus| 00:00 | We will take a look at having Dropdown
menus now to a LiveCycle Designer form.
| | 00:04 | Dropdown menus are great way to take a lot of
information and kind of put them into a nice compact form.
| | 00:10 | Popup menus, Dropdown menu that's what
a lot of people will call these things.
| | 00:14 | I have got Grunform_fields open right now.
| | 00:17 | If you open up Grunform_fields drop-down
you can be exactly where we are.
| | 00:21 | And what I would like to do is I would like to
add a nice dropdown list out here but I want
| | 00:24 | to do a little housekeeping first and
I think it looks a little bit better.
| | 00:28 | You notice there's a line in the page I would
like to actually copy the line right there
| | 00:32 | and put it right below the address
block we have got on the page.
| | 00:35 | So we come up to that line and click
on it should be able to select it.
| | 00:38 | If you do an Edit Copy, Edit Paste the shortcuts
worked pretty much the same as edit program,
| | 00:43 | I can go up to edit you will see copy, Ctrl+C and paste.
| | 00:46 | You can copy that and paste it.
| | 00:48 | You can also right-click.
| | 00:49 | There are lot of ways to do this and just drag it
straight down and it should be snapped in your grid,
| | 00:53 | get it close down here , which
is going to separate our content.
| | 00:57 | That looks pretty good.
| | 00:58 | Go and click to deselect somewhere.
| | 00:59 | Now we are going to add a dropdown menu that allows you
to ask people , which conference they want to attend.
| | 01:04 | Maybe you have got 3 or 5 conferences going at once.
| | 01:08 | Looking on the right you will see our Object Library.
| | 01:10 | Open up the standard category by clicking
on that title bar and you will be able
| | 01:14 | to see all the different things we can add out here.
| | 01:16 | We have a list box as well as if I scroll down
here and take a look you will be able to see
| | 01:21 | that we have got a dropdown list up there, it is up there.
| | 01:24 | So you can see we have got a dropdown list and a list box.
| | 01:26 | Difference between these two they are very similar,
| | 01:28 | they allow you to see multiple selections
or multiple things in a single form.
| | 01:33 | List box will show you a bunch of
things on the page such as we are going
| | 01:37 | to tell them how many conferences they can attend.
| | 01:39 | It will name every conference and they can see them
all on the page and select multiple of the conferences.
| | 01:46 | A dropdown list is simply a bunch of conferences in a
popup menu or dropdown menu where they can only select one.
| | 01:52 | So we are going to take the dropdown list, drag it
down the page, drag it right below this line here,
| | 01:57 | going to release it and we are going to
just put what we want to say in here.
| | 02:00 | So double click on dropdown list and
we will type in , which conference.
| | 02:09 | OK there we go, now if you notice mine is actually not
fitting like to make it a little bit more room out there,
| | 02:14 | so if you come to the dividing line between the
field and the text you will see it's right there.
| | 02:19 | If I click and drag to the right I can
actually change that little area right there.
| | 02:23 | We are changing the caption area.
| | 02:26 | Then I will go in and double click to
fix that up so I can see conference.
| | 02:30 | There we go.
| | 02:31 | Now if you want to make the field
itself wider you can come to the right.
| | 02:34 | There's a little button here.
| | 02:35 | You can click and drag and just make
the dropdown menu a little bit wider.
| | 02:39 | Now with the dropdown menu selected we need
to open up couple of palettes here to be able
| | 02:43 | to work on this to change the properties.
| | 02:46 | Come up to window, come to layout and you will notice
on the right it opens the layout in the object palettes.
| | 02:52 | Now if you follow along with these videos
you will find that I keep opening these up.
| | 02:57 | Typically you can keep these out here depending on what
you are doing and just leave them on the right hand side.
| | 03:03 | Come to the object palette and you will
see that you have got three tabs once again
| | 03:07 | if you have been following along in the previous videos.
| | 03:09 | We will see that we have the type of field right here ,
which is the dropdown list so you can see right there.
| | 03:15 | You have the caption.
| | 03:16 | Caption appears to the left.
| | 03:17 | You can either change it out here or you can
change it over here in the object palette.
| | 03:21 | Right now it's a sunken box , which gives
a kind of a three dimensional appearance.
| | 03:25 | Click on the arrow to the right.
| | 03:26 | You can make it so that it has no appearance.
| | 03:28 | You can't even see the box.
| | 03:30 | It's underlined or it's a solid box.
| | 03:32 | So you have got some choice.
| | 03:33 | I typically do a solid box just to save memory.
| | 03:37 | You can do that and we want to add our list
items right down here where there's a plus sign.
| | 03:42 | If you click on the plus you can add your first item and
what we will do is we will just list some cities here.
| | 03:47 | So I will type in Seattle.
| | 03:48 | What I usually wind up doing is I will press
Enter or Return to accept it and it just continues
| | 03:53 | down in the next one and I will type in Los Angeles.
| | 03:59 | Press Enter or Return to accept it and we will
type in Dublin and that should be pretty good.
| | 04:05 | So once I click somewhere else it should add those.
| | 04:08 | Now you will notice that you can see that if I did a
misspelling or something happened out here if I click back
| | 04:13 | on here click slowly and I can go
back up and just change the name.
| | 04:17 | There we go.
| | 04:19 | I click somewhere else to deselect.
| | 04:21 | That will stop it.
| | 04:22 | If you want to add more you got the little plus
here it always adds it after the one you are on.
| | 04:27 | If you want to delete one you can
simply press the Delete key here,
| | 04:30 | Delete button rather and that will get rid of one of these.
| | 04:33 | And if you don't like the ordering
in here you can always change that.
| | 04:36 | If you select one of these and you click the up arrow
or down arrow it will change the order out here.
| | 04:41 | You can also sort these by ascending
alphabetically if you would like.
| | 04:45 | I am going to keep it as it is.
| | 04:46 | I will keep Seattle, Dublin, Los Angeles.
| | 04:48 | That should be pretty good.
| | 04:49 | If you want your end-user to custom text entry meaning
if you want them to be able to enter anything they want,
| | 04:55 | you are going to turn this on so I am
going to make sure that, that's not on.
| | 04:59 | You are going to see right here it's going to say commit on.
| | 05:02 | Select typically means when they
select one it's going to commit it.
| | 05:06 | That basically means that if this is a static form there's
nothing going on with data on the back end or anything
| | 05:12 | like that it's just going to sit
and wait for you to submit the data.
| | 05:15 | So select means it's ready to send
this off , whichever one is selected.
| | 05:19 | And exit when you exit the field or exit
the form it's going to send this data off.
| | 05:24 | Commit on select can be very useful if you have a
dynamic form and you are choosing something here
| | 05:30 | and if you choose let's say Dublin depending
on what you choose could show more fields.
| | 05:35 | That literally means that you have commit on selection
and then it sends that data somewhere else in the form.
| | 05:40 | That's usually for a dynamic form.
| | 05:42 | Presently we can tell it to be
visible, hidden, printable, screen only.
| | 05:46 | We have got a lot of choices right there.
| | 05:48 | There aren't many reasons why I might make it print only but
for screen you might have a fun little thing you are trying
| | 05:54 | to ask people and if you print it out you don't want to
print that out as well so we can say it's screen only.
| | 06:01 | Locale is, once again the locale, the
language you've got to go in right now.
| | 06:04 | If you click on value up top you will be able to
see that we told it to be possibly user entered.
| | 06:10 | It is optional so if you click on that you
can make it so that it's either recommended
| | 06:14 | or required that they do type in something.
| | 06:17 | You can make it so that it's a calculated field , which
we are not going to do with the popup menu or dropdown.
| | 06:21 | You can also make it protected or read only.
| | 06:23 | Protected is basically locked and
read-only you can only read it.
| | 06:28 | The default if you click on the right there you can change ,
which one is the default so you choose , which one you want.
| | 06:33 | That's the one that's going to appear first so you can
have it to be just about anyone you would like there.
| | 06:38 | And if you click on binding this is usually the first place
I go but I am just working my way across left to right.
| | 06:44 | You have to change name and all this.
| | 06:46 | You want to make sure that so that
it makes sense when you get the data
| | 06:49 | on the other end you change the
name to something you understand.
| | 06:53 | So I am going to type in conference.
| | 06:55 | You could type in , which conference something like that.
| | 06:58 | Just make it simple.
| | 06:59 | So this is a nice simple dropdown
menu or popup menu that we can do.
| | 07:03 | If you click on layout out here you will
see that once again we have an XY position.
| | 07:07 | We got a lot of properties we can change.
| | 07:09 | You have he width.
| | 07:10 | We change it out there by dragging the side
here but you can change it manually right here.
| | 07:15 | Look at the text out there.
| | 07:16 | You are going to see , which conference
is kind of pushed in a little bit.
| | 07:19 | If you double click on the left margin here
let's say we type in 0.1 and press Enter.
| | 07:24 | You will notice what it does.
| | 07:26 | You can actually push the text in or a lot of times
what I use this for is if the text gets too close
| | 07:31 | to the right hand side I make sure there's a margin on
the right side so it won't interfere with the field.
| | 07:36 | It won't get too close to it and I will set that margin
on left back roughly where it was so at 0.4 that's
| | 07:44 | about what it was and the caption once again the
positioning we can change wherever you wanted to be.
| | 07:49 | I would actually like the caption to be on
top so if you go to position and choose Top
| | 07:53 | that will put the caption up top
and put the field down below.
| | 07:56 | The reserve is the width of the caption itself and
in this case we don't need to worry about that.
| | 08:02 | So to test this out we have got ourselves a
dropdown menu out here, click on Preview PDF up top,
| | 08:07 | you should be able to see all the fields out there and
if you click on your dropdown menu you should be able
| | 08:11 | to choose the dropdown menu items and there we go.
| | 08:14 | So click back on Design View to keep working.
| | 08:16 | One last thing I would like to add quickly is to show you
that now that you can create your own dropdown menu I want
| | 08:24 | to show you some of the ones that are pre-built
in here that you will probably use over time.
| | 08:28 | Come over to the right you are going to see
your Object Library click on that tab again.
| | 08:31 | You will see the standard category
, which we have been looking at.
| | 08:35 | Scroll down and you should see the custom.
| | 08:37 | Make sure that, that one is open.
| | 08:38 | You can click on it to make sure that it's toggled open.
| | 08:41 | You will see in there we have countries and US states.
| | 08:46 | If you need to put states out here you can actually
simply drag this on the page and they are all pre-built-in
| | 08:52 | for instance if you come up here where it's
a state this is simply a type-in field.
| | 08:56 | If you wanted it to be a dropdown menu
click on US states, drag it out to the page,
| | 09:01 | release and it automatically has
all the states built-in for you.
| | 09:05 | These are things that you can use
to make your life a lot easier.
| | 09:10 | Go and delete that.
| | 09:11 | Just press Delete.
| | 09:12 | Once you learn how to work with dropdown menus
like I said before taking information and fitting
| | 09:17 | into a compact form is a great way to
get a lot of information on the page.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating radio buttons| 00:00 | We will take a look at how to add radio buttons now.
| | 00:02 | Radio buttons are the ability to ask like a
yes/no question so where you can only choose one.
| | 00:08 | They are using those circular little buttons.
| | 00:10 | Now, I have got Grunform_fields open right now.
| | 00:13 | If you are just joining us, you
can open up Grunform_fields_radio
| | 00:16 | and you should have everything out there.
| | 00:18 | If you look on the right, you are going to see
| | 00:20 | that in the Object Library palette
over there, you have got My Favorites.
| | 00:22 | I have opened that up by clicking
on the arrow to open that up.
| | 00:25 | And you can see all your objects out here.
| | 00:27 | Now, it might be a little bit smaller because
I changed the view right here in the corner,
| | 00:31 | you can see there's a little view
option with the smaller icons.
| | 00:35 | There's a radio button right here
that I would like to add to the page.
| | 00:38 | Now, when you work with radio buttons, the way they work
is each radio button has its own name for the most part.
| | 00:44 | But as you add them, you are going to add
them to what's called the radio group.
| | 00:48 | The group tells it that they all can only
select one meaning if you have two on the page,
| | 00:54 | if I click on one, the other one deselects.
| | 00:57 | Now, as you add these things, if you add them
all in a row meaning if I drag them all out here,
| | 01:02 | you can drag them on the page, they are
going to all become part of the same group.
| | 01:06 | If you pause and add other types of fields, things
like that and then you drag more radio buttons,
| | 01:11 | sometimes they are not part of the same
group and you will see this in a second here.
| | 01:14 | So, what I want you to do is we are going to click and
drag a radio button out to the page and we drag it right
| | 01:19 | down here where it's conferences and what I would
like to do is we are going to put a little bit
| | 01:23 | of text above and just a few minutes here.
| | 01:25 | But for right now, you have got one radio button out there.
| | 01:28 | What I tend to do is I tend to
drag all I need out right now.
| | 01:31 | You can also copy-paste those, but I will drag them out.
| | 01:34 | Click and drag another radio button.
| | 01:35 | I am going to drag it pretty close to this one.
| | 01:37 | Let it kind of snap in, you are field snapping, release and
you will notice there's a highlight around both of these,
| | 01:44 | that means they are both part of the same radio group.
| | 01:47 | I am going to do one more.
| | 01:48 | So click and drag the radio button now, get it
close to that one, let it snap over and release
| | 01:52 | and you can still see the highlight
around all three of them.
| | 01:55 | Now, to change the values out here,
we are just going to come up to
| | 01:58 | where the first radio button is,
you can click double-click in there.
| | 02:00 | And we are going to actually ask people how many
days of the conference would you like to attempt.
| | 02:05 | We are going to have three options;
day 1, day 2 or both days.
| | 02:09 | So, type in day 1, come to the
second radio button, double-click.
| | 02:13 | You should be able to get to the text and then day 2
and third radio button, double-click and we will type
| | 02:19 | in both days, uppercase, lowercase,
whatever you'd like to do.
| | 02:23 | Now, we are going to change a few
things about these buttons.
| | 02:27 | So what I would like to do is I would
like to select all three of them here.
| | 02:30 | If you come to the edge, you can see the radio button list.
| | 02:33 | Go ahead and click on that.
| | 02:34 | You are going to see right on the edge there.
| | 02:36 | You will it select all three.
| | 02:38 | If you want to this time change the size of all
these, what we can do is we can simply grab the right,
| | 02:42 | click and drag to the left and what it's going to
trying to do is it's going to try and squish these down,
| | 02:46 | make them a little bit less wide I guess you could say.
| | 02:49 | Now, we could do this a little bit
more programmatically if you want to.
| | 02:53 | So I will open it up a bit.
| | 02:54 | You can see both days are getting
a little bit crunched in there.
| | 02:57 | With those selected, come up to
window and open up the Layout palette.
| | 03:01 | That will open up the Object and the Layout palette.
| | 03:05 | Come to the Object palette and you will see that we
have got what's called an exclusion group right now.
| | 03:10 | These are a series of radio buttons
that are part of the same group.
| | 03:13 | If you look down, you are going to see appearance.
| | 03:15 | There's no border right now.
| | 03:17 | If you want to put a border around all of
these, you could put like a solid border,
| | 03:20 | something like that, but really
it think it's kind of stupid.
| | 03:23 | So, you can do whatever you want.
| | 03:25 | You look down here, it says size 10.0, you can make the
size of these buttons a little big bigger if you would like.
| | 03:30 | You will see this circle get bigger
and that's actually a little too big.
| | 03:34 | I am going to do it like 11.0.
| | 03:37 | The button style, if you want to change
that, you can do a check circle cross time
| | 03:41 | and there are all sorts of things we could do.
| | 03:42 | If you do a square, I should turn
it into a square that gets in there.
| | 03:46 | And if you look right here, these are
the different items in the radio group.
| | 03:49 | These are basically just your captions.
| | 03:51 | You can see day 1, day 2, both days.
| | 03:54 | Now, you can change these here if you like by
double-clicking or do it out here, it does not matter.
| | 03:59 | Down here where it says present,
visible, you can make them invisible,
| | 04:03 | you can make them show only when
it prints or only on screen.
| | 04:06 | There's a lot of things you can do here.
| | 04:08 | If you go to the value tab, you
will see that these are optional.
| | 04:11 | You can actually make it so that they are
required if you want to or recommended.
| | 04:15 | So Recommended means if you click on 1, it
will say you might want to fill this out.
| | 04:20 | Calculated, we won't do with radio
buttons, it's read-only basically.
| | 04:24 | Protected are locked and Read-Only are read
only for radio buttons so we cannot touch them.
| | 04:29 | The default value if you want to, you can choose one
of these as the default 1, 2 or 3 and , which one is 1,
| | 04:35 | 2 and 3, we'll figure that out in
a second here, I'll show you this.
| | 04:38 | If you go to the Binding tab, you will see
down here, it says Specify Item Values.
| | 04:44 | Day 1 is value 1, day 2 is value
2 and both days are value 3.
| | 04:48 | When you submit this data, when somebody submits
this data, what's going to happen is you are going
| | 04:53 | to see the radio button list name, usually it shows you that
| | 04:56 | and then it shows you , which value
was selected at that moment.
| | 04:59 | So if you want to be able to tell, you don't
know what number 1, number 2 and number 3 are,
| | 05:03 | you are going to come to the value here and if you
double-click on it, you can actually change that.
| | 05:07 | So I could type in like day 1, come to 2, type
in day 2 and then come to 3 and type in both.
| | 05:14 | If you send this to a database, this
may mean nothing to a database, 1, 2,
| | 05:18 | 3 may make more sense if you want to do that.
| | 05:21 | But this allows you to see exactly
, which one they selected.
| | 05:24 | The radio button lets, you can
change your name if you want to.
| | 05:26 | We are going to do that.
| | 05:27 | I am going to type in , which days, so that can
tell exactly , which days we are going to be.
| | 05:33 | This is important information to binding
down here because when you send the data,
| | 05:37 | you need to be able to tell what you are
looking at, that's why we are doing this.
| | 05:41 | We've got that done.
| | 05:42 | Last thing we are going to do, click on Layout here.
| | 05:44 | You will be able to see that we have got our position X
and Y on the page where it's located X and Y position.
| | 05:50 | You have also got the width here.
| | 05:51 | If you wanted to change the width manually, you could
do it out there by dragging and changing the width.
| | 05:56 | Or if you come to width here, you can change it all.
| | 05:58 | Now, you've got to be careful what
you've got selected right now.
| | 06:00 | Take a look.
| | 06:01 | I have only got this one selected.
| | 06:04 | If you come to the edge here and click to
select the whole group, you will be able to see
| | 06:08 | that you have different options over here and it's
not going to let you change the width and all these.
| | 06:12 | So what I would like to do is click on day 1 right there.
| | 06:15 | It will select only that field and you
will see the width and height right there.
| | 06:19 | You can change that if you want to.
| | 06:21 | I want to make day 1 and day 2
consistent and make them smaller.
| | 06:24 | So, double-click on the value and
we will type in something like 0.6".
| | 06:29 | Do the same thing with day 2, select
day 2, double-click and type in 0.6".
| | 06:34 | That will make them little smaller.
| | 06:35 | And for both days, we will just manually resize this.
| | 06:39 | You click on it to select it, come to the right.
| | 06:41 | You can click and drag to the right a little bit.
| | 06:43 | Make a little bit wider if you want to.
| | 06:45 | Now, if you look at the radio button
itself for day 1, day 2, both days,
| | 06:50 | you are going to see that the text is a
little bit close to the radio button itself.
| | 06:54 | What I would like to do is I would like to
change what's called the margin to do that.
| | 06:57 | I am going to zoom in a little bit so you can see this.
| | 06:59 | You will see the plus and minus up top.
| | 07:00 | So I will click on the plus just a little bit.
| | 07:02 | It should zoom in a bit.
| | 07:04 | Eventually, we will fit it back in the page.
| | 07:06 | Now, you can if you want to come out here and come between
the radio button and the text and just simply click
| | 07:12 | and drag to the right to make that area a little wider.
| | 07:15 | The other thing we can do is we can
change the margins or the reserve.
| | 07:19 | Click on day 1 to select it.
| | 07:20 | I am in the margins right here and I
select the left margin by double-clicking
| | 07:25 | and typing 0.1 let's say and press Enter or Return.
| | 07:28 | And if you take a look out here, you are
going to be able to see that the margins are
| | 07:32 | for the bullet itself or the radio button I should say.
| | 07:35 | So, if you look at each one of these,
you've got a little space pushed in.
| | 07:38 | What I would like to do is push it back.
| | 07:41 | So we are going to take the left margin
for each one of these and set it to 0.
| | 07:45 | We could do them all at once if you wanted to.
| | 07:47 | If you click on day 2 and then Shift-click on both
days, you will see that you have the left margin.
| | 07:52 | We are going to give it that margin
to the left of the radio button.
| | 07:55 | So, double-click on the left margin, type
in 0 and it should look a little bit better.
| | 08:00 | Now, if you look out here, you are going to see day 1 has
got a little bit of a gap right here, day 2, both days.
| | 08:05 | That's the reserve, we are going to change that.
| | 08:07 | So, come into reserve.
| | 08:08 | You can see it's mixed right now.
| | 08:09 | Put your cursor in there and type in 0.5 for 0.5
in, and take a look at what's happening here.
| | 08:15 | It's trying to change reserve for
each one to be 0.5 inch wide.
| | 08:19 | Now, if you look what's it's doing out
here, it's not doing such a hard job.
| | 08:23 | So what we are going to do is we are going
to go to Edit, choose Undo caption size
| | 08:27 | and that should get a back to where it was before.
| | 08:30 | What I want to do is I want to take each one of these
little radio buttons that I am just going to kind
| | 08:33 | of slide each one over, get them sort of next to each
other so you can click on both days, slide it over.
| | 08:39 | It's a little bit easier sometimes
to do this stuff manually.
| | 08:42 | So there we go.
| | 08:43 | It should have all the radio buttons.
| | 08:44 | All we need is a little bit of
text up top to tell it what to do.
| | 08:47 | So, if you go up to the View menu and choose Fit
Width, you will be able to see the whole page again.
| | 08:51 | We are going to take a little text and throw it to the top.
| | 08:54 | So click on Object Library, come up to
the top, you should see My Favorites.
| | 08:59 | Open that up if it's not open by clicking.
| | 09:00 | You will see text, click and drag that up, put
it right above the radio buttons and what I want
| | 09:06 | to do is we are going to type in , which day
and then put the (s) would you like to attend?
| | 09:12 | Now, if you have the text out here
and you are moving it around,
| | 09:22 | if you click and drag in the middle
of it, get it set where you want it.
| | 09:27 | If it's kind of snapping and just doing moving too big of
jump, we can turn off Snap to Grid to get that to work.
| | 09:33 | So, if you come up to View, you
will Snap to Grid, turn that off.
| | 09:37 | All we are going to do is with it selected, you can either
use your up and down arrow keys or you can click and drag.
| | 09:41 | I tend to use my arrow keys, and I
will just move it up a little bit.
| | 09:45 | Here we go, not too bad.
| | 09:47 | Turn on Snap to Grid again.
| | 09:49 | So go under View, Snap to Grid.
| | 09:50 | It won't snap that text field to the grid but everything
else we put out here will be snapped to the grid.
| | 09:56 | So, let's test this out.
| | 09:57 | Click on Preview PDF.
| | 09:58 | It should show you what it's going
to look like to the end-user.
| | 10:01 | Bring the cursor out, start clicking on each one of these
to see day 1, day 2, both days because they are all part
| | 10:08 | of the same group and they have different values,
you should only be able to select one of these.
| | 10:13 | If we wanted to make it select as many as you wanted,
we would probably make something like a checkbox.
| | 10:17 | But radio buttons, their main goal in life
is to make it so we can only select one.
| | 10:21 | So click back on design view, you
should be able to come back here.
| | 10:24 | Radio buttons are great for being able to make it
so that people can simply select a single value,
| | 10:29 | the yes/no questions or something like
this, would you like to attend certain days.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating checkboxes| 00:00 | Along with the other types of fields you might want to
create for a Form we are going to take a look at checkboxes.
| | 00:05 | We have got grunform_fields open right now.
| | 00:07 | If you are just joining us you
can open grunform_fields_checkbox
| | 00:11 | and it should have everything out there.
| | 00:12 | And we are going to put some checkboxes below the
Radio Buttons down here, get them all out there
| | 00:17 | and then we will do things like
aligning and kind of work our way in.
| | 00:19 | If you look on the right you are going to
see the Object Library once again we can see
| | 00:22 | that there's a lot of things over here.
| | 00:24 | My Favorite should be open right now if you
click on that you should see your checkboxes.
| | 00:28 | To use checkboxes we are going to
simply drag one of them out on the page.
| | 00:32 | So we will click and drag checkbox out here.
| | 00:34 | You can also double-click that will place it out there.
| | 00:36 | And I will put it a little bit lower than the other
radio buttons we already have in the page there.
| | 00:40 | When you put checkboxes out here it's
going to put them out one of the time.
| | 00:44 | If we want to put a bunch out here one time
we could just simply drag a whole bunch
| | 00:48 | onto the page and kind of get them working.
| | 00:50 | We can also copy paste these fields.
| | 00:52 | If you click on Checkbox what we are going
to do is we are just kind of simply copy one.
| | 00:57 | This checkbox is now selected so if you click and start
dragging it hold on a Ctrl key as you are dragging,
| | 01:03 | get it close of here to the right, release the
mouse button you are going to notice a plus there.
| | 01:08 | Release the mouse button then release the Ctrl key and
you can make a copy that's called Dragging of a Copy.
| | 01:14 | Copy Paste works great on these, dragging these
off to make copies is another way to do this.
| | 01:19 | So let's make one more over here so start dragging
first, hold down Ctrl you can see a plus and just put it
| | 01:26 | over here somewhere, release the mouse first, then the key.
| | 01:31 | If you don't get that to work you can
always just simply do it Edit Copy,
| | 01:34 | Edit Paste up in the menus you can
also drag another checkbox out.
| | 01:38 | Now we are going to take all of these and we are
going to duplicate them pretty easily for ourselves.
| | 01:42 | So if you select all of these you can just click somewhere
where there's nothing, hold down and drag across,
| | 01:49 | make sure you go around all three
checkboxes with this little selection box,
| | 01:53 | release your mouse you should see them all out there,
start to drag down we are going to put three more below,
| | 01:59 | start to drag down from anyone of them, hold down
the Ctrl key that should copy them, get it down here,
| | 02:05 | release the mouse, release your Ctrl key and you
can duplicate as many fields as you like doing this.
| | 02:12 | Now what we need to do is make sure that we know what
these are named and what they are working on here.
| | 02:15 | So if you come to the first one, you go ahead and
click on the first checkbox there we are going
| | 02:18 | to change the values of each one of these, little captions.
| | 02:21 | So your checkbox is to the left and your caption
or your text is to the right so double-click
| | 02:26 | on the words Checkbox there and we are going to type in some
different things so these little checkboxes are going to be
| | 02:31 | for things that people might want to purchase at the event.
| | 02:33 | So we will put a little text up top to tell him that but
right now it's going to type in a few things so type in CD,
| | 02:39 | come to the other checkbox over here, double-click we are
going to type in DVD, double-click on checkbox we will type
| | 02:45 | in T-Shirt work our way down here
double-click checkbox, type in Poster,
| | 02:53 | double-click on the second checkbox
here Cheat we will type in that.
| | 02:58 | We will go to the last checkbox double-click
and then we will type in video, there we go.
| | 03:04 | So we have got a bunch of little
checkboxes out here that people can test.
| | 03:07 | If you want to try this out click on Preview
PDF up top in the tab it's going to make a PDF
| | 03:11 | for you it will show you what it
will look like on the other hand.
| | 03:14 | Just come out here and start clicking, you should be able
| | 03:16 | to see exactly what it's doing you
can select as many as you would like.
| | 03:19 | Click back in Design View you got to remember
to do that otherwise you cannot edit.
| | 03:22 | You should be able to see all your fields out there.
| | 03:25 | Now what we are going to do is we are going to change
things up a little bit make these a little bit smaller,
| | 03:29 | closer together and change some visible properties of them.
| | 03:32 | Click on the CD one first and it selects
the actual caption and the field itself.
| | 03:37 | Make sure that the Object and Layout
palettes are open if you got
| | 03:40 | under Window you should be able
to see Layout it should open both.
| | 03:44 | Take a look down here and click on the Object palette
you will be able to see that I am always going to start
| | 03:48 | in the left here where it says Field you will be able
to see the type of field right here as a checkbox,
| | 03:53 | the caption can be changed here as well as out in the page.
| | 03:56 | The appearance right now is so I can square if
you want to change that you can make it solid,
| | 04:01 | square you can make it a circle if you want
too, you have a lot of different choices.
| | 04:04 | And if you want to customize it you can click Custom
| | 04:06 | and that let's you change the different
appearances all the way around.
| | 04:10 | You have states On/Off or On/Off
and Neutral this is interesting.
| | 04:14 | On/Off/Neutral is kind of a way for you to
set up a question or something like that
| | 04:19 | where they can say not applicable or something like that.
| | 04:21 | Usually it's On/Off, 10 point buffers to the
size of the box that is out there right now.
| | 04:28 | And for you to see this I might zoom in just a little bit,
once you click in the Plus sign up top and I will scroll
| | 04:34 | down a little bit so you can see it's a little bit easier.
| | 04:35 | So we get CD selected.
| | 04:37 | If you want you can change your Check Style
as well, you got check, circle, square, cross,
| | 04:42 | diamond there's also sort of things you can do out there.
| | 04:43 | If you move to the right you are going to see the value.
| | 04:46 | The value typically is going to be User
Enter, so we don't want to do that.
| | 04:49 | We want to keep that as is, so you
don't have a lot of choices here.
| | 04:52 | If you want to make it so that it is automatically
on, like it's checked you can change the default to On
| | 04:57 | that will automatically put something in there.
| | 04:58 | Now I don't tend to do this unless it's something
important, take a look there right at Binding.
| | 05:03 | This is where we are going to change the name of this.
| | 05:05 | So I am going to change this to CD.
| | 05:08 | Now unfortunately, a lot of times when you have a lot
of different fields each one has to have its own name
| | 05:13 | so this is something we need to make sure we
setup for each one of these independently.
| | 05:16 | The other thing I do want to point
out with CD still selected you look
| | 05:19 | over here you are going to see On and Off value.
| | 05:22 | Now when somebody selects this what's going to
be sent is the name of the checkbox you are going
| | 05:27 | to see right here it's going to be called CD and I usually
press Enter or Return to accept that and the value,
| | 05:32 | the On value when somebody selects it,
it's going to send 1 with the form data.
| | 05:37 | If it's Off it's going to send 0.
| | 05:39 | So you will be able to tell easily
whether or not it was Off or On.
| | 05:41 | If you wanted the changes maybe you
are visually looking at this stuff,
| | 05:45 | you can type in On if you wanted
to do that and Off for this value.
| | 05:49 | As you receive the data it would then tell you
CD On or CD Off, I don't usually mess with that,
| | 05:55 | I usually leave it at numbers because lot of databases
things like that are going to use that data as is.
| | 06:01 | If you click on the Layout, the Layout Tab there you
are going to see that we have the width and height
| | 06:05 | of the entire thing here, come to the Width, double-click
on that we might make it a little bit shorter so type
| | 06:10 | in 0.8 press Return and you can see what it's doing here.
| | 06:14 | I would like to do the same thing to
Poster, DVD, Cheat Sheet T-Shirt and Video.
| | 06:20 | So we are going to select all of those at once.
| | 06:22 | You could go to each one independently
and change all the properties we just saw,
| | 06:25 | I would like to make this a little bit easier so if you
click on DVD hold on the Shift key it doesn't matter ,
| | 06:31 | which order you click I am going to click on Poster you
are going to see a box up here click on Cheat Sheet,
| | 06:37 | T-Shirt and Video with the Shift key held down and we
can change the width so double-click on the width type
| | 06:42 | in 0.8 press Return, and that should do it.
| | 06:47 | Now you are going to notice something here you
will notice that Cheat Sheet got a little crushed,
| | 06:51 | click to deselect you are going to see a
plus right there that's actually a good thing
| | 06:55 | to see I should say now that's it's happening
but you are going to see when you hover
| | 06:59 | over that it's telling you the text is overflowed.
| | 07:01 | It doesn't support automatic expansion
that means that we need to make sure
| | 07:05 | that this caption is the right width to fit all the text.
| | 07:09 | So click on the Field on there you can
simply come to the right, click and drag,
| | 07:13 | make it a little bit wider we are
just make sure that it fits.
| | 07:16 | Next thing I would like to do is we got all these out here,
I want to make sure that they all have the same appearance
| | 07:21 | so we have all got the same solid box as well
as the box that I put in there as the Center.
| | 07:27 | So once again click on DVD, Shift click on Poster, Cheat
Sheet, T-shirt and Video come to the Object palette
| | 07:36 | and you will be able to see that in the Field Tab here we
got an appearance I want to make sure that these are same
| | 07:42 | as the other one as same as CD click Solid Square here we go
and if you come to check style I made mine I believe Square
| | 07:50 | so I will choose Square make sure that's correct.
| | 07:52 | So I will click on CD-disc to double-check that.
| | 07:55 | No, I made a diamond so I will Shift click on
all of these, something I have to prior remember
| | 08:01 | that so now it's Diamond, to choose Diamond and there we go.
| | 08:04 | Alright-click to deselect we got our checkboxes
out here, last thing I would like to do is I would
| | 08:11 | like to actually change the appearance and the alignment
of this because they are a little bit far apart right now.
| | 08:16 | So I want you to click on DVD and click on Cheat Sheet,
we are just going to simply either drag to the left
| | 08:23 | or you can use your left-arrow key to move them over.
| | 08:26 | Do the same thing in T-shirt and Video
click on T-shirt, Shift click on Video.
| | 08:30 | I use my arrow keys to move these over a little bit.
| | 08:34 | You know it really doesn't matter too
much if they overlap each other a bit,
| | 08:38 | you would never want to overlap fields that's why you run
into problems but overlapping the actual text isn't bad.
| | 08:45 | Click to deselect and it looks pretty good, and we will just
put a little bit of text out here to give people and option
| | 08:49 | or an idea of what's going on so
you have got a textbox already here.
| | 08:54 | Once you click on that we are just
going to simply copy that.
| | 08:57 | So start dragging it down hold down Ctrl, drag it
down here release the mouse, release the Ctrl key
| | 09:04 | and you got yourself a copy of that textbox.
| | 09:06 | If you wanted to put a clean one out here a new one, you
could click on Object Library to open up the Object Library
| | 09:12 | to see it and this is where your textbox is located
you could simply click and drag that out on the page.
| | 09:18 | Double-click to select that text or
triple-click to get the whole thing.
| | 09:21 | And we are just going to change this up a
little bit, which products might you buy.
| | 09:29 | Now if you notice as you type in text I really am grateful
for this but there was a spell-check built-in here.
| | 09:35 | If you come up to Might and you right-click on it, it will
give you a dictionary and allow you to kind of help yourself
| | 09:40 | out here so I will click Might and
there and there we go, not too bad.
| | 09:44 | Now what I would like to do is I want to make sure that the
text here is all aligned up and everything is ready to go
| | 09:49 | so select , which products might you buy and
select CD with the Shift key, Shift click on CD.
| | 09:56 | And if you take a look up top you are going
to see under Layout we have alignments.
| | 10:01 | So you can align objects on the left, right,
top, bottom, vertical, horizontal or to the grid.
| | 10:07 | Choose left and it should make sure that they are aligned
up, that was actually pretty good, it was not too bad.
| | 10:14 | So click to deselect, let's test
this out click on Preview PDF,
| | 10:18 | you may have to scroll down a bit you
are zoomed in easier way to do this.
| | 10:21 | Why don't you come into the View menu?
| | 10:23 | Choose actual size that should do a pretty good
job and just scroll down and there's a checkbox.
| | 10:29 | Now you can go ahead and click you can take a look and
everything should be fine, selecting more than one.
| | 10:34 | Click back on Design View don't forget to do
that because otherwise things get a little crazy,
| | 10:38 | click on the View menu choose Fit Width that will get us
back where we were fitting the width and scroll back up.
| | 10:44 | So working with checkboxes is something I do a lot simply
because if you need people to be able to select a multitude
| | 10:50 | of objects or things out in the page you are going to use
this and they are already set up so you only select one
| | 10:57 | at a time otherwise you would be using radio buttons.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Arranging content| 00:00 | As we start to work through our form, as we start to work
through our design, there are times where you realize
| | 00:06 | that ah maybe I should have put a box underneath or a
box around or some kind of graphic element on the page.
| | 00:11 | We are going to take a look at how to put a couple
of graphic elements out here but our main focus
| | 00:14 | for this is to learn how to arrange objects.
| | 00:17 | Arranging objects means you can bring things to the front
or the back so you can put things behind or in front of.
| | 00:23 | I have got grunform_fields still open here.
| | 00:25 | If you want to join us right now, you are just jumping in,
| | 00:28 | you can open up grunform_fields_arrange
and it should have everything out here.
| | 00:31 | So what we are going to do is we are going
to kind of separate content out a little bit.
| | 00:34 | I would like to put a nice little box around
this center section, conference, radio buttons,
| | 00:39 | checkboxes and put it behind all that stuff because we
are going to find out that it's going to go right on top.
| | 00:44 | As you add things to your LiveCycle Design
out here, as you add things to the form,
| | 00:48 | every new thing goes on top of the old thing.
| | 00:51 | So, there's like a little stacking order on the page.
| | 00:54 | If you come to the right to the Object
Library, you will see that we have a rectangle.
| | 00:57 | Click and drag the rectangle out on the page.
| | 00:59 | I am going to drag it off the edge of the form here.
| | 01:02 | Now, we may have to do a little
shuffling but that's OK and then release.
| | 01:05 | We are going to make it a little bit bigger.
| | 01:07 | This is just for graphic elements, just for display
here, it would make it look a little better.
| | 01:11 | Come to the corner, click and drag.
| | 01:14 | Let's open it up.
| | 01:14 | I am going to go all over to the right over here.
| | 01:16 | You are going to fill snapping.
| | 01:17 | Come up just so it looks decent.
| | 01:20 | Release your mouse and it should
be around just about everything.
| | 01:22 | Now, I want to move this field in just a
little bit so click on the Seattle Field --
| | 01:27 | conference there and notice what happens here.
| | 01:29 | The box itself is on top of everything else.
| | 01:32 | It's actually covering everything else
even though you can see through it.
| | 01:35 | So what we are going to first do is we are going to
change this to a couple of properties just to really kind
| | 01:38 | of solidify it and then we are going to put it
behind so we can actually select the other fields.
| | 01:43 | With it selected, make sure you open up the Layout
palette , which will open up the Object palette as well,
| | 01:49 | and the reason why I keep doing that if you
have been following in the previous videos is
| | 01:52 | because if you just open object, it only
opens object and I tend to use both a lot.
| | 01:57 | So click Object in the Object palette and
you will see that we have got a rectangle.
| | 02:01 | Now, you can change what's called the line style.
| | 02:04 | You can change the corners on the box, maybe round them
| | 02:06 | or create some fancy corners, and
you can change the fill color.
| | 02:10 | I go to line style here, you can have a dashed line,
a dotted line, different things or keep it solid.
| | 02:16 | If you want to change the thickness or the stroke weight,
| | 02:19 | you can double-click on the number
here and change that as well.
| | 02:22 | So I am going to do like 0.1.
| | 02:24 | Well, OK, I always do that, it's
always too big, so I will do 0.1.
| | 02:28 | You've got to be careful, this is in inches.
| | 02:30 | So I will go to 0.1.
| | 02:31 | You don't have to type in "in," it remembers it.
| | 02:34 | And if you come to the right, you
can click on the stroke color
| | 02:36 | or the line color and change that as well, I like gray.
| | 02:38 | Now, you are going to see corners here.
| | 02:40 | If you try a fancy rounded corner or something like
that, that's going to look great and everything.
| | 02:44 | But if you save these files just a straight up static PDF,
that stuff will not transfer, plus it add a little bit
| | 02:52 | of file size so I try and keep it to just straight corners.
| | 02:55 | They do change the fill a lot though.
| | 02:57 | Click on fill to the right of none and you
will see we can do a solid or a linear color.
| | 03:02 | I just want to show you linear because this
is good and bad, design wise and file size.
| | 03:07 | I'll click linear to right and what this does, you are going
to see it looks like things kind of disappear out there
| | 03:12 | but it's actually filling it with white color right now.
| | 03:14 | If I click on fill color start, pick like a
black, come to fill color and right over here
| | 03:20 | and choose it's already white, maybe like
a white gray, you can see what it's doing.
| | 03:24 | It's actually creating a gradient.
| | 03:25 | This is like a linear blend from side to side.
| | 03:28 | I try as much as I can to avoid using this.
| | 03:31 | The grip of designing with linear is
pretty great but I tend to go to solid.
| | 03:36 | Solid is just a straight up color, black, white,
something like that, but it keeps a lot simpler.
| | 03:41 | A file size actually is kept to a minimum.
| | 03:43 | So click Solid.
| | 03:44 | We will make this a gray so I will make it like a light
gray and if you look at that, I think that's too dark.
| | 03:50 | So if I click on this fill color start
again, go to more colors and it should open
| | 03:56 | up this dialog box just one more step here.
| | 03:58 | You click define custom colors.
| | 03:59 | It lets you go in, open up the right and you can
usually take the gray or whatever color you want,
| | 04:04 | make it a little bit lighter by dragging
the slider to the right there up.
| | 04:07 | So I'll just do like a nice light gray,
click OK and that's how you apply it.
| | 04:13 | Now, to fix this, we need to take this box
and put it behind all of the other content
| | 04:19 | or we could select these fills and
bring them to the front of this box.
| | 04:23 | With the box selected, if you come up under
Layout, you can also right-click on the box.
| | 04:27 | You will see that we can both align as
well as bring to front, send it back,
| | 04:32 | send backward all these different features right here.
| | 04:35 | Now, we only have Send Backward and Send It Back
available because this is the top most object,
| | 04:40 | this is the thing that's on the top of everything else.
| | 04:42 | The difference between Send Backward and
Send It Back, if you choose Send Backward,
| | 04:46 | it sends it one object backward at a time.
| | 04:48 | As a matter of fact, give it a try.
| | 04:50 | If you Send Backward, it only puts
it behind the thing you last created.
| | 04:54 | Come back to Layout.
| | 04:56 | You will notice that we now have
Bring to Front, Bring Forward.
| | 04:59 | Send It Back, if you look at the picture
here, it's actually great picture,
| | 05:01 | it puts it behind everything, it
sends it to the back of the page.
| | 05:05 | So choose Send It Back and it should be to
put it behind all of the fills out here.
| | 05:09 | So, that looks pretty good, not too bad.
| | 05:11 | Now, you can click on , which conference here, that
should select it and you can move it over a little bit.
| | 05:16 | I use my arrow keys usually to do that.
| | 05:17 | I will use my right arrow to move it over.
| | 05:19 | And if you look at it, you can't see white in there.
| | 05:22 | So it looks here, to kind of to see
through, I would like to change that.
| | 05:25 | This happens a lot if you put boxes behind the objects.
| | 05:27 | So with it selected, come over to
the Object palette on the right.
| | 05:30 | You will see Appearance.
| | 05:32 | Click on the Popup menu and you will see Custom.
| | 05:35 | Choose Custom and what we have is the ability
to change things like the background fill.
| | 05:39 | So if you choose this fill here, we are going
to put a solid fill of white, so under Style,
| | 05:43 | choose Solid and you will see the start
color right here, just change that to white.
| | 05:48 | You cannot preview it but if you
click OK, you should see that happen.
| | 05:52 | Here we go, it looks a little better.
| | 05:54 | Now, just to give you a heads-up with that, if
you want to change things like the appearance,
| | 05:58 | you will notice that there was borders and all
sorts of things in that appearance popup menu,
| | 06:02 | if you come up to window in the menus, you will notice
that there's an actual border palette that you can open.
| | 06:07 | That's very similar to going to your appearance, custom.
| | 06:10 | That's another way to do that.
| | 06:11 | So, if you have objects out here and they are
arranged in a different way, meaning some are on top,
| | 06:16 | some are on the bottom or if you draw something later
on, you can easily take objects and put some on top,
| | 06:22 | some on bottom and get it to look
exactly the way you need it to look.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating a Reset button| 00:00 | Every form as far as I am concerned, deserves a Reset button.
| | 00:04 | For your end users, they need to be able to clear
the data that they have typed into the form fields
| | 00:09 | and that's what a Reset button does for us.
| | 00:11 | I've got grunform_fields open right now and if you're
just joining us, you can open up grunform_fields_reset
| | 00:17 | and it will give you everything we have got so far.
| | 00:19 | If you look on the right, you should
be able to see our Object Library.
| | 00:23 | We have My Favorites. I have got this open right now and yours may
look a little different than mine that's because I clicked on the
| | 00:28 | button here to the right, the pop-menu,
| | 00:30 | and I chose View Small Icons that allows you to do that.
| | 00:34 | If you click on Standard down here, you are going to see that
we have a lot more options. In the Standard category, we have a
| | 00:40 | generic button,
| | 00:41 | an email Submit button,
| | 00:42 | a HTTP Submit button as well as a Reset button.
| | 00:46 | Our job is to get the reset button on the page,
| | 00:49 | so scroll down in the page go down towards the bottom. I tend to
put it at the bottom of the form, but I know we are going to put
| | 00:54 | more content in the middle here.
| | 00:56 | more content in the middle here. So take the reset button, click
and drag it out. We are just going to drop it out here on the page,
| | 01:01 | release the mouse, you should put it out there
| | 01:03 | and you should see a reset form.
| | 01:05 | Now the reset form button by default really doesn't need
anymore work, you could just leave it as it is. If you want to
| | 01:11 | change the text on the button,
| | 01:13 | click on the plus sign up here to zoom in a bit if you need to do that.
I'm going to zoom in a bit and I'll scroll down using the scroll wheel.
| | 01:19 | If you double click on the button, you can go and change that text,
so typically people don't say reset form, they just say Reset.
| | 01:26 | There we go, so just type in Reset.
| | 01:28 | If you click off the button and then click back
on it, you can select it again the button itself.
| | 01:33 | If we want to change the font that
sort of thing of the button itself,
| | 01:36 | you could double click to go to the text once again and if you look up
top, you're going to see some of them are more typical text formatting
| | 01:42 | options we have.
| | 01:43 | I tend not to get crazy when I do a lot of this stuff. I tend
to use whatever is default, for the most part or Arial or
| | 01:48 | Times or something like that.
| | 01:50 | So with the button we need to change a few things.
| | 01:53 | If you come to the Window menu,
| | 01:55 | you'll see that we have the Layout
palette, go ahead and open that up.
| | 01:57 | If you have been following along with some of these videos,
I keep opening this simply because it's a great place to start.
| | 02:03 | You could leave it open next time you work in here.
| | 02:05 | If you go to the Object palette,
| | 02:07 | you will see that we have the type called Reset.
| | 02:10 | Now there is not too much we can do out here as a reset button, simply
because it's job is already set in stone, you've already got it done.
| | 02:17 | The only thing we can really do out here is look at appearance. You can
change, it's not a raised border. You might be able to make it just solid.
| | 02:23 | And what I tend to do is I tend to make the color of fill not gray,
because that gray button drives me crazy. You can leave it, it's fine.
| | 02:30 | You click on Custom.
| | 02:31 | This will open up the Custom Appearance dialog box.
| | 02:34 | This is same thing as going to the Border palette. There's a palette
under the Window menu called Border that you can open and keep
| | 02:40 | open forever
| | 02:41 | and it shows you a pretty much the same thing.
| | 02:43 | Now in the edges here, I am going to go which is the solid
| | 02:46 | and I will keep the size as pretty thin.
| | 02:49 | You might want to change the color of the Reset button,
so I will choose a little bit lighter gray on the edge,
| | 02:53 | and this looks a little better.
| | 02:55 | Now we can't see the preview of this.
You have to click OK to get this done.
| | 02:58 | Now if you look at corners, you've got to be careful with this
because a lot of times I'm looking at rounded or fancy corners,
| | 03:04 | I am like ah, that's really cool, you can do that.
| | 03:06 | But if you save it as just a
straight up static PDF, which this is,
| | 03:11 | the rounded corners won't really translate. So
there needs to be some kind of XML dynamic form,
| | 03:15 | plus it adds file size. I usually leave it as straight corners.
| | 03:19 | Look out here what's the style.
| | 03:20 | You might want to change the color. I am going to leave it
as solid. We can do a blend it's called, there were pattern.
| | 03:25 | Blends literally blend from one color to another.
| | 03:28 | Adds more file size we don't really need it, it's not necessary.
| | 03:31 | Keep it as solid.
| | 03:33 | Come to the right and click on the paint bucket here for the
fill color and if you want to try something different, you can.
| | 03:37 | Sometimes I go to white depending on my mood.
Sometimes I will choose a light-light gray.
| | 03:42 | I typically do like gray because I want to set these apart, so if I
click on fill color, I don't like that gray right there, it's not really
| | 03:47 | that light, so I click More Colors.
That will open up this next dialog box.
| | 03:52 | Click Define Custom Colors
| | 03:54 | then I can simply come over here and just drag this little slider
and change the brightness a little bit to get a real light gray.
| | 04:00 | I'll click OK
| | 04:01 | and once it looks pretty good to me in the dialog box,
I'll click OK and it should show up there in the Reset.
| | 04:06 | Click somewhere to deselect. You should see it happen.
| | 04:09 | To test it out come up to View,
| | 04:11 | make sure you have Fit Width chosen, so you
could see the whole page in a width again.
| | 04:15 | Test that out, you are not going to test in
Design view. Click on the Preview PDF button
| | 04:19 | and it should take you and it'll show you the PDF.
| | 04:21 | Come out here and just fill out a few things. You might
want to zoom out a little bit. I am zoomed in a bit.
| | 04:25 | Click the minus sign to zoom out.
| | 04:28 | Just come up and fill a few things out.
| | 04:30 | Check a couple of checkboxes.
| | 04:32 | Scroll down and hit the Reset
button. That should reset it for us.
| | 04:37 | So click on Design view to go back to Design view.
| | 04:40 | Click on View, make sure you have Fit
Width selected that should fit it back in.
| | 04:44 | Scroll down and you can see a Reset button.
| | 04:46 | Last thing I'd like to do is I'd like to get that Reset button in
the center of the page meaning I want to get it centered horizontally,
| | 04:52 | so if you click on the Reset button,
| | 04:54 | come up to the Layout Menu, you'll
see that we have centered in page
| | 04:57 | horizontally and vertically.
| | 04:59 | I love these pictures.
| | 05:00 | Choose Horizontally. You should center it horizontally
| | 05:03 | and it should be good to go.
| | 05:04 | So Reset button is really important.
| | 05:07 | Now that you understand how it works, you can put one on your page
and make it so that anybody can reset the content of their form
| | 05:12 | pretty easily.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating an Email Submit button| 00:00 | Forms almost always require some kind of Submit
button so that the end user can fill out the data,
| | 00:05 | click Submit and send it back to
you somehow as the initiator.
| | 00:10 | Now the Submit button could be very important
it can also be not important at all depending
| | 00:14 | on how you have the form set up to you receive this data.
| | 00:17 | If you want to email as to somebody have them fill
it out, print it, fax it back or Snail Mail it back
| | 00:23 | to you then the Submit button is not
really necessary, it's not useful to you.
| | 00:27 | If you want somebody to email this
data back to you and maybe you want
| | 00:30 | to use the built-in Acrobat method called
Distribution then you are going to put some kind
| | 00:35 | of Submit button out here, this is what I usually do.
| | 00:38 | I have got Grunform_fields open right now and if you are
just joining us you can open up Grunform_fields and Submit
| | 00:43 | and you should have everything out there,
let's scroll down on the form here.
| | 00:47 | You should be able to see we have
a Reset button at the very bottom.
| | 00:49 | Now I would like to add a Submit button
down there and then what we are going
| | 00:52 | to do is we are going to center them both out there.
| | 00:54 | If you look on the right you should
be able to see the Object Library.
| | 00:58 | We have a My Favorites area , which shows all
the different things you have got out there.
| | 01:01 | What I would like you do is make sure that
Standard is open you can see the arrow.
| | 01:06 | If it's not click on it to open it and I have changed
the size of my icons by clicking on the icon here
| | 01:11 | and choosing View small icons to fit more in.
| | 01:14 | If you notice down here you are going to see that we have
a button, an Email Submit button and an HTTP Submit button.
| | 01:21 | Now if you create a document from a Form Template
usually what happens is it puts a Print button as well
| | 01:28 | as a Submit button out there that's an Email Submit.
| | 01:31 | If you create one from scratch it usually
doesn't do that and that's how we started this.
| | 01:35 | So scratch means you start with nothing.
| | 01:37 | So when you tell it what to put out here an Email
Submit button it allows you to create an email message
| | 01:42 | that you send off and it sends the data via email.
| | 01:46 | HTTP Submit allows you to submit data through a web server
or through a website and send it as either HTML or XML
| | 01:53 | or a couple different file formats you can
send as and that's a more automated way
| | 01:58 | of receiving or sending or dispersing information.
| | 02:01 | We are going to use an Email Submit button so come
out to Email Submit, click and drag this on the page,
| | 02:06 | just drag it right to the left or it doesn't matter
really to the right of Reset, don't release it.
| | 02:11 | You will see that anytime you drag usually a button
on the page or something like that that's meant
| | 02:16 | to have interactivity there's going
to be a Yellow Yield sign.
| | 02:19 | So if I hover over that Yellow Yield sign it usually
tells you this Submit button maybe incomplete.
| | 02:24 | You have to specify an email address and it
tells you where to do it in the Object palette.
| | 02:29 | So if you don't have the Object palette open come under
window and choose Object that should open it on the right
| | 02:35 | and if you look over there when you click on
an Object this is where you are going to go
| | 02:38 | to see its properties usually it can
tell you what type of button this is.
| | 02:42 | It's an Email Submit button.
| | 02:44 | Now if you change my midstream here and you are like I
don't need it submitted via email maybe I want to submit it
| | 02:49 | to my web server as an HTTP Submit you can choose the
type and just change the type of button it is right now.
| | 02:55 | You can have a Print button , which is kind of cool.
| | 02:58 | We are going to leave it at email right down here
the caption is what it is showing up on the button
| | 03:02 | so you either change this text here
or if you double-click on the button
| | 03:06 | out there you can change your text out
there I am just going to say Submit.
| | 03:10 | Some people will actually have it say Go or
something like that I will just have it say Submit.
| | 03:15 | You can change the appearance of it
right now it's got Erased Border.
| | 03:18 | What I would typically like to do is a Solid Border.
| | 03:21 | If you want to you can also customize the button.
| | 03:23 | If you choose custom, it's going to open up this
custom appearance dialog box then we can kind
| | 03:28 | of change how things look.
| | 03:30 | First of all you change the borders themselves.
| | 03:32 | I tend to keep it simple, go with usually a Solid Border
you can change the size of the border and do Stroke Weight,
| | 03:38 | be very careful how big you make that you
know how smaller it is now, it's an inches.
| | 03:42 | You can change the color as well
and I might pick like a light gray.
| | 03:45 | There are corners, rounded corners, fancy corners
things like that I tend to steer clear those
| | 03:49 | because if you have this Save As just a
Static PDF file typically those won't render,
| | 03:55 | you have to have it as a Dynamic XML file for
this to work plus it adds a lot of file size,
| | 03:59 | not a lot but it adds a little bit of
file size so I tend to steer clear.
| | 04:02 | Background Fill, usually solid, what we can do is we can
change the color if we want to by clicking on first color,
| | 04:08 | you can try something different if you
like, I might go to more colors and try
| | 04:11 | and a little bit lighter version I can then click
on Define Custom Colors and it allows you to go in
| | 04:16 | and change the value here so you have got Hue Saturation
and your values so you can change the actual lightness
| | 04:22 | or darkness of it and make it a
little bit lighter and click OK.
| | 04:25 | You can't preview it you got to click
OK and just accept it, here we go,
| | 04:29 | not too bad it looks something like this Reset Button.
| | 04:31 | We got to dumble that once.
| | 04:32 | So you have got your parents done, just see highlighting
if you want to you can kind of fake a highlight here.
| | 04:37 | When somebody clicks on this thing it's
going to invert the colors for Submit.
| | 04:41 | So it will look like it's being pressed.
| | 04:43 | If you choose Push you can actually
change the caption on rollover or down.
| | 04:48 | Now don't get too excited.
| | 04:49 | This means that if somebody rolls their cursor
over the button that text right there can change.
| | 04:54 | Usually this doesn't work on just a Static PDF files once
again it's got to be dynamic XML file for that to work.
| | 05:00 | So well a lot of times what I wind up doing is I just choose
either none, invert, inverses the colors to make it look
| | 05:06 | like it's being pressed or outline
tries to put an outline around it.
| | 05:09 | I usually just keep it inverted.
| | 05:12 | Here is what we got to be, you
got to be in the email address.
| | 05:14 | So you got to type in who you want to send this to.
| | 05:16 | So I am going to type in mine, you type in this is who is
going to receive the data so if it's co-worker you want
| | 05:22 | to play a nice trick on them, send
them a whole bunch of data.
| | 05:25 | If you want to put multiple emails you can put
semicolons in there I found that usually works.
| | 05:30 | If you want to put an email subject you can
type that into so this is for our conference Reg
| | 05:36 | so I will do REG for Registration, here we go.
| | 05:39 | There also is what's called the Sign
Submission you can actually have a digital type
| | 05:42 | of signatures set , which we don't need to do.
| | 05:44 | This is visible you do want to show this because if somebody
is going to use it they need to be able to interact with it.
| | 05:51 | You don't want to make it so it's only on screen or printing
unless you want to do that it's fine so I will leave it
| | 05:55 | as Visible, Default locale , which is fine.
| | 05:58 | And our button is pretty much ready to go.
| | 06:01 | So for us to test this out- first
of all, this is really bugging me.
| | 06:05 | I want to take these two buttons again
and center them on the screen out here.
| | 06:08 | So what I would like you to do is select both, hold down
the Shift key click on Reset lets you select both of them.
| | 06:12 | We are going to group them together,
come up to Layout and choose group
| | 06:16 | and then we are going to center them on the page.
| | 06:18 | If you don't group them together before you do this
it's going to center them on top of each other.
| | 06:22 | So it becomes the Layout up in the menus and you will see
center in page horizontally and you should center both.
| | 06:28 | Here we go, click to deselect and let's test this out.
| | 06:31 | Click on the Preview button it should
take you out to the preview the PDF.
| | 06:35 | Let's go and fill in just a little
bit, we don't fill too much.
| | 06:39 | And , which conference we want that sort
of thing, you can fill out what you want.
| | 06:42 | Come on down you are going to see your Submit and
Reset, hover over Submit you should see it's going
| | 06:47 | to tell you Submit there go ahead and click.
| | 06:49 | Typically what winds up happening here is in certain
versions of Acrobat or certain versions of Reader usually 7
| | 06:55 | and later, 8 and later it asks you what you
want to do, do you have a desktop Email up?
| | 06:59 | If you have got like Outlook or Entourage or Udora or
something like that or even Apple Mail it will allow you
| | 07:05 | to go out and fill this out and send it via email
so it's going to attach the contents to the email.
| | 07:10 | If you have internet email such as Gmail you can choose
that and it will take you out to Gmail you then have
| | 07:16 | to kind of create your email and get it going.
| | 07:18 | So I am going to choose Desktop E-mail out
, click OK, what it is going to try and do
| | 07:22 | and now this is you know we are testing
it right here in LiveCycle Designer.
| | 07:25 | If you send this to somebody if they are in full version of
Acrobat they don't have to be in LiveCycle or if they are
| | 07:29 | in Reader they are going to get this data back.
| | 07:32 | So they are going to get this email you are going to see
that it's going to send an attached file to some XML file,
| | 07:37 | this can be pulled into other versions of Acrobat and
I am going to show you in the later video how to change
| | 07:41 | that when we do something like a Web Submit.
| | 07:43 | You will see right here that it's file
that contained it was entering into a Form.
| | 07:47 | It's not the Form itself.
| | 07:49 | Adobe Acrobat Professional 7 or later can process this data
by importing it to a blank form or create a spreadsheet.
| | 07:55 | So you can actually see Acrobat help to do that.
| | 07:57 | So if I wanted to I could send this
out to Bryan and the data is gone.
| | 08:01 | That way when he gets it, he will be able to
pull those all in, everybody sends him an email
| | 08:05 | or clicks on Submit , which is basically the same thing.
| | 08:08 | You will get an email from with a little data file connected
and you can basically pull those all into one file.
| | 08:13 | Now that's one way to do an E-mail Submit
just literally email this PDF to somebody
| | 08:18 | when you are done and then they can click Submit.
| | 08:20 | And easier way to do it I think is to use the
distribution method that's built into LiveCycle Designer.
| | 08:26 | We will do that when we get down to working with
distributing LiveCycle forms in a later chapter
| | 08:31 | but for now your Submit button is working.
| | 08:33 | It's just not sending it exactly the way you want it
so click back in Design View we have got it out there,
| | 08:39 | your Submit button is a really
important part of your document.
| | 08:42 | If you want people not just to print this out and fax it
back to you but if you want to be able to receive the data.
| | 08:47 | There are a lot of other types of Submit
buttons that we can create and when we talk
| | 08:51 | about Editing LiveCycle forms while distributing I
will go into little bit more detail on how to work
| | 08:56 | with different types of Submit buttons but for now
you should be able to put a nice email Submit button
| | 09:00 | on your form to get that data back for your email.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
7. Working with LiveCycle TablesAdding a table| 00:01 | When working on a form there will be times when
you need to add data in the form of a table.
| | 00:06 | We are going to now take a look at how to insert a table
| | 00:08 | and just a few different properties
about tables we can work with.
| | 00:11 | I have got grunfrom_table_start open right now.
| | 00:14 | Tables in LiveCycle Designer can be really important
especially if you want to set up rows and columns of data
| | 00:19 | that you want to either collect or you
just want to simply display on the page.
| | 00:23 | Tables can start their life in a couple of different ways.
| | 00:26 | You can use a menu item and if you look up
top you will be able to see it says Table
| | 00:30 | up there, Insert Table, you can do it this way.
| | 00:32 | You can also from your Object Library on the right
hand side over here you can drag a table out.
| | 00:38 | So if you look over here, you should be able to see
my icons are little bit smaller that's because I went
| | 00:41 | to the Properties menu here and chose View Small Icons.
| | 00:45 | If you scroll down a little bit, you will be
able to see that in there we have a table.
| | 00:48 | So you can do this either way.
| | 00:49 | I tend to drag tables out because
it makes it a little easier on me.
| | 00:52 | Click on table, drag it out on the page, drop it out
there somewhere, it's going to open up this dialog box
| | 00:58 | so same thing like I said as going up to the menu up there.
| | 01:00 | It's going to allow you to create a pretty
simple table, this is a static table for data.
| | 01:05 | The table can either contain form fields or simple text.
| | 01:10 | You can see we have got columns and rows.
| | 01:12 | Make sure that you have got 3 columns and we will do 3
body rows, you can include a header row in the table,
| | 01:18 | that's a repeating row that goes
at the very top of the table,
| | 01:21 | you can also include a footer , which
goes at the bottom of the table.
| | 01:25 | Now if you are going to create, if you get a little bit
more complex and you want to be able to create a table
| | 01:29 | that either contains data from a database or you want
to have it what's called flow so it adds rows depending
| | 01:36 | on user interaction, you can create a table using assistant.
| | 01:39 | This will step you through a wizard and it
allows you to do things like change the colors,
| | 01:44 | change the database connections, change
different things about the table itself,
| | 01:47 | just set it up to be used as a more dynamic table.
| | 01:50 | We are going to create a simple table right now, click
OK, take a look out here, lot of times LiveCycle jumps
| | 01:57 | up and down, you will be able to see that.
| | 01:58 | So I will scroll down in table, we
should be sitting right down here.
| | 02:02 | Now a table like I said has a lot of
functionalities a lot of things we can do.
| | 02:05 | If you have come to where it says Header right here,
click on that header and you can select the cell.
| | 02:11 | Each one of these is an independent cell.
| | 02:13 | So if you want to select let's say multiple cells to
do things like change the formatting, change the size,
| | 02:18 | color etc., click on header, hold down the Shift key,
come all the way across to the third header and click.
| | 02:25 | That allows you to select multiple cells.
| | 02:27 | You could also simply hold the Shift key down
and click cells here and it selects a range
| | 02:32 | of cells so, Shift click on header on the right.
| | 02:36 | With cells you can change the formatting
properties just like you could for text frames.
| | 02:40 | If you look up top in the tool bars you
will see you have got your font up there.
| | 02:44 | Let's make the size maybe just a little bit
bigger, a little bit smaller, I will try 11 point.
| | 02:48 | You can see that it's center aligned right now.
| | 02:50 | If you want to left align, you can right align,
there's all sorts of things you can do there.
| | 02:54 | Let's make the text bold by clicking B, you can also
underline it there's a couple of things we can do there.
| | 02:59 | So you can change the formatting.
| | 03:00 | You can also access formatting.
| | 03:02 | If you go up to window, you will see that we have the font
| | 03:04 | in the paragraph palettes you can
open as well so we can do that too.
| | 03:08 | So I will click off to deselect, it deselects the table.
| | 03:11 | Now if you want to select a table,
there's a couple of ways to do this.
| | 03:15 | To select cells, you simply click
on the cell that selects it.
| | 03:18 | If you would like to get your cursor in a
cell, come to a cell and double click on it,
| | 03:23 | treat it like a little text box
and your cursor goes in there.
| | 03:26 | So just type in something, I will type in text.
| | 03:29 | You can then format that text.
| | 03:31 | If you click and drag across the selected, you can use
different font, size all sorts of different things.
| | 03:36 | Click off to deselect, that should deselect everything.
| | 03:39 | If you want to select the tables,
there are a couple of ways to do this.
| | 03:42 | Usually if I come to the top here, you are going to see
4 arrows show up when you get to the edge; if you click,
| | 03:48 | that should select the whole table for you.
| | 03:50 | If you want to select a row or column, you
probably saw my cursor jump a little in there.
| | 03:54 | If you come to the top right above one of the top of
the columns and you click, that will select a column.
| | 04:00 | If you want to select a row, come all the way to left.
| | 04:02 | It's very similar to other applications
that work with tables.
| | 04:05 | If you click, you can select.
| | 04:07 | If you want to select multiple rows or multiple
columns, you can click and drag through
| | 04:12 | and it will select the multiple columns and multiple rows.
| | 04:16 | Now I want to show you another way to be able
to select objects or select things in a table
| | 04:20 | because tables can get a little heady at times,
there are things you got to work on here.
| | 04:25 | If you come to the Window menu, you will see
under here we have what's called the Hierarchy.
| | 04:30 | Choose Hierarchy, this is going to open up
a palette on the left side of the screen,
| | 04:34 | we have a way of looking all the content out here
in such a way that it's organized on the left
| | 04:38 | over here, you can see everything out here.
| | 04:40 | You will be able to see your table right here.
| | 04:42 | You will be able to see all the rows including
the header row, row 1, row 2 and all the cells.
| | 04:48 | Now the reason why I am taking a Hierarchy palette is
| | 04:50 | because you can use the Hierarchy
palette to select things in the table.
| | 04:54 | So for instance, you want to select the whole table,
| | 04:56 | click on Table 1 in a Hierarchy
palette and that selects the table.
| | 05:00 | If you come out to design view, click on the tab
out here, you can then move it, you can stretch it.
| | 05:05 | If you come to the right here, you will
see I have all these buttons out here,
| | 05:07 | you can click and drag and resize if you want to.
| | 05:10 | So this is the way for you to select objects.
| | 05:12 | You want to select cells, you can find the cell in
the row you want, click and it will select it for you.
| | 05:17 | Now we got the table built, tables are really important
inside of LiveCycle Designer for a lot of reasons
| | 05:22 | and one of them is to just put data or suppose you are
tying to get this registration out and you have got a lot
| | 05:28 | of different types of let's say classes or things you are
trying to sell, you want people to be able to pick a class,
| | 05:33 | pick a price, pick a quantity and then subtotal or total
everything up for you, tables can be a great way to do that.
| | 05:39 | So now you should be able to get a table on the page.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Editing a table| 00:01 | We will take a look at how to edit a table now and
all the different things you can do with your tables.
| | 00:07 | I have still got grunform_table_start
open right now if you are following along.
| | 00:10 | If you are just opening up you can open up
grunform_table_edit and it should be right
| | 00:13 | where we are going scroll down in the
page, you will see the table out here.
| | 00:16 | Now tables in LiveCycle Designer can have all
sorts of options and a lot of things you can do.
| | 00:21 | First of all we can resize tables so if
you come up to the table itself we want
| | 00:25 | to select a table there are several ways to do this.
| | 00:28 | If you come to the very top this is how I usually select
them you will see a cross here or a four arrow icon.
| | 00:34 | If you click that selects the table.
| | 00:35 | Now if you want to resize the table you can simply
come to the right the top or the bottom click
| | 00:39 | and drag and you can resize the whole table.
| | 00:42 | You will notice what it's doing to your columns.
| | 00:44 | It's keeping them the same width.
| | 00:46 | Now if you decide to change a column width I will say I
want the first column here to be wider than the other two.
| | 00:52 | If you come to the middle here you will see dividing
line click and drag to the right to make it wider.
| | 00:57 | What's going to happen is it's going to take
the whole table and make it wider in general.
| | 01:00 | So these are going to get bumped over
and this one is going to get wider.
| | 01:03 | Now if you have a table set to the exact width
you wanted but you just want to change the width
| | 01:08 | of these different columns, hold down the Shift key,
come to one of the dividing lines between the columns,
| | 01:14 | click and drag to the left or click and drag
to the right and it simply splits that area
| | 01:19 | so it doesn't change the width or the height of
the table, works the same way with the height.
| | 01:23 | So you have the ability to do a lot of different edits here.
| | 01:25 | Now what we are going to do is we are
going to take the second two here I want
| | 01:29 | to make sure the second two columns are the same
width so we are going to select both columns.
| | 01:35 | If you come to the top of the column
you are going to see an arrow.
| | 01:37 | If you come right off the top edge, click hold down
and drag to the right and you can select both columns.
| | 01:43 | Now if you like shortcuts you can either right-click
or if you come up to the Table menu you will be able
| | 01:48 | to see distribute rows eventually
distribute columns eventually.
| | 01:51 | We are going to distribute the columns
evenly so go ahead and do that.
| | 01:54 | That will affect usually the widths of the
columns but not the width of the table typically.
| | 01:59 | These two are the now the same exact width.
| | 02:02 | This one is a little bit wider , which is great.
| | 02:03 | Now the next thing we can do when working with tables is
the ability to do things like add colors to the table.
| | 02:10 | So we are going to select the whole
table again it's just one way to do it.
| | 02:13 | If you come to the top you are going to see cross here
these four arrows click to select it and if you look
| | 02:18 | over at the Object palette, if you
don't have this open come under window
| | 02:22 | and open up object you will see
the Object palette over here.
| | 02:25 | The Object palette is going to give
you a lot of formatting options.
| | 02:28 | You will notice here that we got body
rows, header rows, columns, footer rows,
| | 02:31 | can't edit it right here but we
can do that in a different place.
| | 02:34 | You will see row shading, row shading allows us if you
turn this on and off you can actually get it to work.
| | 02:40 | So turn it on there and what it does is it
applies alternating shading to your table.
| | 02:45 | If you want to change that you can say the first
row looks like this color the second row looks
| | 02:50 | like this color and it just repeats that pattern.
| | 02:52 | So it's not overly complex but
you got a few things you can do.
| | 02:55 | So if you come to the first row
click on the color bucket there
| | 02:59 | to change the color right now it's picking
a white , which is fine I am OK with that.
| | 03:03 | If you come to the second one click
on that and let's try a darker gray.
| | 03:06 | You are going to notice that it's
not affecting the header row.
| | 03:10 | The header row is all by itself so the first row
is technically this row right here that's row 1.
| | 03:15 | This is considered Header Row, if you move your
cursor to the left you will see it says Header Row.
| | 03:19 | So you can change it up however you want
to we can tell it to be the first row.
| | 03:23 | You can even do things like this you can say the
first two rows are let's say white I will type
| | 03:27 | in 2 I will press Enter/Return it will do that.
| | 03:30 | And that allows you to do a little bit wider
alternating pattern if you want to do that.
| | 03:35 | Now keep it at one so you have one and one and
what I would like to do is I would like to make
| | 03:38 | that dark gray there a little bit lighter.
| | 03:40 | So next one row is if you come to the color here
click on that click more colors that will open
| | 03:46 | up a dialog you can then come out
here and click Define Custom Color.
| | 03:50 | It allows you to take your brightness over here
you can change it and make it a little bit lighter.
| | 03:52 | It's on a bit of a color in there, not too much click
OK and you can try any color you want and there you go.
| | 03:59 | So that's being able to actually change the row shading.
| | 04:02 | Now I want to change the shading on the Header Row
so I want to make the header took totally different.
| | 04:06 | So what we are going to do is we
are going to select those cells.
| | 04:09 | So if you come up to the left up
here you are going to be able
| | 04:11 | to see arrow show up, click to select all cells in the row.
| | 04:14 | If you look at the Object palette
on the right over there you will see
| | 04:17 | that there's not much going on,
not much you can do at the moment.
| | 04:20 | For us to change colors of cells individually or rows
individually to overwrite that repeating pattern,
| | 04:26 | if you come up to window you will see the
Border palette, here we go, open that up,
| | 04:32 | now you may see that I have the Layout palette out there
that's OK for now we don't need that at the moment.
| | 04:36 | But if you look at border there you can actually
change the border edges if you want to do that so
| | 04:41 | that they are all different colors
you can round the corners ,
| | 04:44 | which I wouldn't really suggest doing they
don't show up in an Acrobat static form anyway.
| | 04:48 | We are going to come right down here to Background Fill.
| | 04:51 | Right now it's a solid color we are going to change
that to something a little bit different we will do
| | 04:54 | like a darker gray so if you click Fill Color
try a little bit darker gray, it's too bad.
| | 05:00 | It's basically overwriting or telling
the header row to be a different color.
| | 05:04 | So you can change the borders you can change the colors.
| | 05:07 | Now what I would also like to do is I would like to
get rid of one of the rows out here and I would also
| | 05:11 | like to add a column, we will need another column out here.
| | 05:13 | So we are going to delete a row so if you come to the left
of the bottom row you will see all cells in a row go ahead
| | 05:19 | and click to select that you will see it selects all
the cells out there and you can either right-click
| | 05:24 | or if you come up to the Table menu
you will see Delete and it allows
| | 05:28 | to delete a row a column what's called a section
it's looking in or advanced or the whole table.
| | 05:33 | Choose row and that should delete the row.
| | 05:35 | Now if we want to add a column and I want you
to do is we are going to select the last column
| | 05:39 | because we are going to tell to put a column after this one.
| | 05:42 | You can either right-click on one of the cells or if you
come up to table you will that we have insert columns
| | 05:48 | to the left columns to the right rows above
rows below you can add what's called a section,
| | 05:52 | section is either multiple rows or multiple columns.
| | 05:55 | We are going to add a column to the right so choose
column to the right and that should put it out there.
| | 05:59 | It usually repeats the formatting that was in this column.
| | 06:02 | Then we are going to put a little bit of text in
here so if you come to that last cell right there
| | 06:06 | if you just click on it you will only select the cell.
| | 06:08 | If you want to type inside double
click then we could type what we want.
| | 06:12 | So we will type in total and you can see that it's
actually picking up the formatting from before.
| | 06:18 | The only thing is it's not centering text
so if you come up to the toolbar up top,
| | 06:22 | click the center of the text out
there and that should be good.
| | 06:25 | We are just going to go out, we are
going to change all the headers out here
| | 06:27 | so that they match what we want them to say.
| | 06:30 | So come to the first cell, click on it, double click
on the Header word there and we are going to change
| | 06:34 | that to extra sessions, come to the second cell you don't
have to click first you can simply double click on header
| | 06:41 | to go right in, we will type in Cost,
come to the third one double click
| | 06:47 | on the header cell there and we
will type in number of people.
| | 06:52 | OK now if you wanted to we could change the
width of all these columns like we said before.
| | 06:56 | But I leave him as it is, it doesn't look too bad.
| | 06:58 | Now there are few things that I did not show you in tables,
if you want to merge cells out here you can do that.
| | 07:05 | We can select multiple cells and we can just
say merge them that makes them one big cell.
| | 07:09 | Now the one thing I want to point out here is if
you are used to other programs the way they work
| | 07:13 | with tables I am used to InDesign so if I put my cursor
in a cell and I click drag it will select multiple cells.
| | 07:20 | In here you will actually move a cell you do
not want to do that so the way we are going
| | 07:26 | to select multiple cells one way is to
click on one cell, hold on Shift key,
| | 07:30 | click on the second one that will select both.
| | 07:32 | If you either right-click on one of the cells
or come up the table you will see Merge Cells.
| | 07:38 | So choose Merge Cells that allows
you to merge him to one big cell.
| | 07:41 | Right now it really doesn't make sense because I want
to have the session and the cost over here so we look
| | 07:47 | at it we decide well I need to split that.
| | 07:49 | You either right-click on it or come back up
to table you will see split cell horizontally
| | 07:53 | and that will split it again.
| | 07:55 | There are all the ways to do that but that's
one of the easiest ways I think to do it.
| | 07:58 | So you have got the ability to edit a
table a lot of things we can do just know
| | 08:03 | that a table can contain text right out of the gate.
| | 08:06 | All these cells are only text cells ,
which means they are not Form Fields.
| | 08:11 | As a matter fact click on Preview
up top that will preview the PDF.
| | 08:15 | Once you are in here scroll down,
should be able to see your table,
| | 08:18 | you are able to see that I have got a little
problem right there within my rows but that's OK.
| | 08:22 | If you come in here and you try and click on one
of these cells you will notice that you cannot
| | 08:27 | because there's nothing going on these are not text fields.
| | 08:30 | If you come to this text down here and you
try typing in you won't be able to do it.
| | 08:34 | We actually have to tell the cells to
become fields if we want to do that.
| | 08:40 | So click back on Design View, what I would like
to do is I would like to make sure that that cost
| | 08:43 | out there has everything it needs so I am
going to click on that cell, take a look.
| | 08:47 | I can see that it in fact does have all the edges.
| | 08:49 | I am going to change the border over
there and so let's add it together
| | 08:52 | and make sure they are all solid that should fix it for me.
| | 08:54 | And as I click on rest of these you
should be able to see that that's there.
| | 08:57 | Now that you have got a table on the page you should
be able to edit it, do a lot of different things to it.
| | 09:02 | There's a lot that we can do with tables.
| | 09:04 | Most of the times in the beginning though they are going
to contain text you can and if I haven't mentioned this
| | 09:09 | but you can actually put pictures inside of a table cell.
| | 09:12 | If you drag from your Object Library you
can insert a picture out here if you would
| | 09:15 | like so this should get you started
with working and editing tables.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Adding form fields to a table| 00:03 | Tables are a great way to contain data.
| | 00:06 | Typically tables contain text and they contain pictures if
you like but tables can also be used to have form fields
| | 00:14 | out there, an array of form fields and
it could be any type of form field.
| | 00:17 | We will take a look at how to take a table and convert it
into form fields so that you can easily put one on the page
| | 00:23 | and then just start working putting all the
fields you need to get your table ready to go.
| | 00:28 | I have got grunform_tables start open right
now and if you are just joining us you can open
| | 00:31 | up grunform_tables_forms, which
has the table already created.
| | 00:35 | Scroll down in the page and you
should be able to see things.
| | 00:38 | Now I have got the Object palette
open right now so you go under Window
| | 00:42 | and choose object you should be able to see that.
| | 00:44 | I also do have the layout and border if
you would like to open those up as well.
| | 00:48 | Tables by default contain text for instance come
below Extra Sessions, click on this cell right here,
| | 00:54 | take a look over the Object palette by clicking on its
tab and you will be able to see what type of cell this is.
| | 00:59 | This is just a text cell so in other words if you
double click on it we are going to type something in.
| | 01:04 | Now the end user won't be able to do that.
| | 01:06 | This is for you to put in data it's not a field yet.
| | 01:09 | So I am going to delete that.
| | 01:12 | For us to make this a field I am going to click
to deselect, click back on the cell from over
| | 01:17 | to the type right here you can actually change the
type of cell it is to almost anything that's built in.
| | 01:23 | You want it to be a text field you can do that if you want
it to be numbers choose numeric field, decimal very similar,
| | 01:29 | day time drop down all sorts of things we can do here.
| | 01:32 | Choose text field and it is now a text field that
means that the user can enter values into this field.
| | 01:39 | Click on Preview PDF, scroll down you should now be
able to click in there and type in just about anything
| | 01:46 | because it is now interactive it's now a field.
| | 01:49 | Now this opens a door to a lot of things.
| | 01:52 | What I would like to do is I don't want
to make people type in extra sessions.
| | 01:55 | I don't want them to type in the name of the
class because maybe they don't know want they are.
| | 01:59 | So we are going to have a pop up menu or a dropdown
menu show up when they click on this field.
| | 02:05 | Click on Design View, make sure that cell is still selected,
| | 02:09 | come over to the Object palette we have all the
different types of things we can do to text field now.
| | 02:14 | Choose the popup menu and you will see you
can change it at anytime to whatever you need.
| | 02:19 | Choose dropdown list, it should show us the
dropdown list now you can see it out there.
| | 02:24 | You can put a caption , which shows text
next to it we don't want to do that.
| | 02:29 | You can change the appearance if you like.
| | 02:30 | I typically don't do this because the appearance if
you choose a box it will put a box inside of this cell
| | 02:38 | so it will look like a box in a box , which I tend not
to do so appearance is none , which is good for now.
| | 02:43 | If you look at list items we need to add our list items.
| | 02:45 | These sort of things are going to appear in the popup menu.
| | 02:47 | So click the plus, and down here
you are going to see cursor.
| | 02:50 | We are just going to type in some of the sessions.
| | 02:52 | So it will be simple here I will type in Flash session, if
you press Enter or Return it immediately accepts that one.
| | 02:59 | Type in Acrobat, Enter or Return and
type in InDesign and there we go.
| | 03:05 | I typically Enter or Return just to accept
it you don't have to fill out another one.
| | 03:09 | If you click somewhere in here you will notice that you
will notice that you get all the buttons active now.
| | 03:13 | You will see a plus and a minus you need to
add another list item you can add it now.
| | 03:17 | If you need to subtract one you can click
on it out here and click the minus sign.
| | 03:21 | If you want to move these in order move them up or
down I want Acrobat to go below InDesign click Move
| | 03:26 | Down it will move it below this one here InDesign.
| | 03:29 | If you want to sort them in ascending
or descending order you can do that too.
| | 03:33 | If you want someone to custom entry text you can do
that as well by selecting allow custom text entry.
| | 03:39 | The Commit On is not something we
need to worry about at the moment.
| | 03:41 | If you are doing scripting or things
like that that might become important.
| | 03:45 | Click on the Value tab up top.
| | 03:47 | You are going to see that it is user entered optional
, which means that they can interact with it.
| | 03:53 | We are not going to make it recommended
or required, these are extra.
| | 03:56 | So click off that, you can see right
here we have something called Default.
| | 03:59 | Default can be very important.
| | 04:01 | This is if you want something to show in there
by default you are going to pick the Default.
| | 04:06 | Click on the Popup menu it shows you all the things you
have already entered and suppose I want Flash to show up,
| | 04:11 | click Flash and that just shows up first.
| | 04:14 | Now if your text is centered in there , which it probably
will be because of all the other formatting we have done
| | 04:19 | in the past and because that cell is set up that way you
want to probably align that to the left it's up to you
| | 04:25 | but with the cell selected come up to the toolbars
up top choose Align Left that should take it
| | 04:29 | to the left you don't have to align it to left.
| | 04:32 | And if you notice the text is jammed right
against the edge of the box right there.
| | 04:36 | We are going to fix that so make
sure that the Layout palette is open.
| | 04:40 | If it's not open you can go into
the Window menu and open layout.
| | 04:43 | You will see that we have a width, height we have got a lot
| | 04:45 | of different things we can do but
I want to focus on the margins.
| | 04:49 | The margins are how much space is there
between the edge of the box and the content.
| | 04:54 | So come to the left margin you can double click
on that content right there on that value.
| | 04:58 | Then we will type in something like 0.1 press
Enter or Return and you will see what it does.
| | 05:04 | It puts a little margin on left side
just to push that content in just enough.
| | 05:08 | Click on preview PDF it allows us to take a look at
it, scroll down take a look at your table you can click
| | 05:14 | on the Popup menu now and it should
show you all your values in there.
| | 05:17 | It's not going to affect the menu
itself, it will still show up as it is.
| | 05:21 | Click on InDesign and you can change the value.
| | 05:24 | Now just to show you a couple of other things we can do
with the table let's click back on Design View if you click
| | 05:28 | on this cell below Cost, click on that cell.
| | 05:30 | What we are going to do is we are going to change
that cell as well we are going to make that a field.
| | 05:34 | Click on object on the right you can see the palette.
| | 05:37 | Instead of a text area, textbox click
on text and we are going to change this.
| | 05:42 | If you want people to type in numbers
you typically don't do a text field.
| | 05:46 | Text field lets them type in anything.
| | 05:49 | You want to do a numeric or decimal field.
| | 05:50 | I typically do numeric because we don't
have to type in and dot something.
| | 05:54 | So choose numeric field that makes it so that
they have to type in some kind of number.
| | 05:59 | If you click on cell you will see it's numeric field
right now we don't want to change the appearance
| | 06:04 | because I wanted to just sit in the cell.
| | 06:06 | The cell has already got a board around it we can
limit the length to the visible area if we want.
| | 06:11 | And if you want to if you look you are going to
see a dialog here or popup that says it's going
| | 06:15 | to expand or fit it will be ignored turn it off.
| | 06:18 | For cells a lot of times it tries to do that.
| | 06:22 | If you come down here to Patterns what I want to
do is I want to make it so that if somebody types
| | 06:25 | in a cost it's actually going to turn up the
dialog sign in comments and things like that.
| | 06:29 | So click on the arrow for patterns we are going
| | 06:32 | to have a display pattern several
different types of pattern you can do here.
| | 06:35 | Choose Display, it should open up a dialog box here
this is a little bit different from previous versions.
| | 06:40 | It's a little bit easier I think.
| | 06:42 | Take a look you have got a Display Pattern.
| | 06:44 | If you look down here it's going to tell you what that is.
| | 06:45 | It's used to specify how the data will appear.
| | 06:48 | So somebody types in a value like a
number you can force it to have a comma,
| | 06:52 | a dollar sign, a decimal point, things like that.
| | 06:55 | That's what we will do, choose the value you want,
it automatically generates the pattern right here
| | 06:59 | and if you know how to customize that you can do that
you can check help to see how to do custom patterns.
| | 07:04 | The sample itself is not going to show up at the moment.
| | 07:07 | If you want to make it so that empty values or no values
can show up you can do that you can allow for a 0.
| | 07:12 | If you simply turn this on it will
allow it to have a 0 in there.
| | 07:16 | I am not going to do that.
| | 07:17 | It will allow empty though we can make it so it's
null , which means there can be nothing in there.
| | 07:21 | We are going to apply that click Apply.
| | 07:23 | It should apply the pattern.
| | 07:24 | There are other different types of patterns out here
| | 07:26 | and if you click Edit you can see right
here this is how the data must be entered.
| | 07:31 | It will tell people you have to enter it a certain way.
| | 07:34 | I typically choose to display because it will force it to
become that, click OK and we are going to test this out.
| | 07:41 | Click on Preview PDF, scroll down, click on the Cost, try
typing in letters it should not let you do that if you type
| | 07:48 | in a number and then click somewhere
else it will force it to look like that.
| | 07:53 | So you can see what's going on.
| | 07:54 | I typically centered that text in
there so we will do that real quick.
| | 07:57 | So click back on Design View.
| | 07:59 | Make sure the cell is selected.
| | 08:00 | Come up to the toolbars up top and choose
Center that should Center Align it for you.
| | 08:05 | If you want something to appear in there by default click
on the Value tab and you can actually have a default value.
| | 08:11 | So sometimes we will actually type in how the cost looks
so you can type in like $12.99 or something like that.
| | 08:17 | You want to be careful with this because if you actually
type in that cost people might ignore it or keep it
| | 08:21 | in there rather so you could do like
that 000 or something like a number,
| | 08:26 | number, number like this press Enter or Return.
| | 08:29 | You can take a look if it doesn't follow
the pattern it will tell you it's invalid
| | 08:33 | so you want to be careful when you do that.
| | 08:35 | I will delete that.
| | 08:36 | I typically don't put it in there.
| | 08:37 | It's just a little bit more hassle.
| | 08:39 | So the other thing I wanted to show you when
changing cells to different types of fields is this.
| | 08:45 | You have to name your fields.
| | 08:46 | If you hover over this field right now
you are going to see a tool tip it's going
| | 08:49 | to tell you this is an untitled numeric field.
| | 08:53 | Clicking on the Binding tab over here in the
Object palette you want to give this a name.
| | 08:58 | So what we can do is we can just simply call this cost or
cost1 or whatever you want to do for name I will press Enter
| | 09:03 | or Return to accept that and that
should change the name of the field.
| | 09:07 | Hover over that and you will see it.
| | 09:08 | If you come back over here to this Popup
menu you will see it's actually called Cell1.
| | 09:12 | If you click on that popup menu
you could change that if you wanted
| | 09:15 | to something different like Session1 or something like that.
| | 09:18 | I will leave it alone for the moment.
| | 09:20 | The other thing too is that when you work with tables
you are going to want to take a look at your hierarchy.
| | 09:24 | Come under Window and choose Hierarchy it
will pop the hierarchy open to the left.
| | 09:29 | The reason why we take a look at this is because you
can visually see what's going on with your table.
| | 09:34 | If you look out here you will be able to see that
we have a table if you click on the word Table1
| | 09:38 | or this icon it actually selects the table.
| | 09:40 | This is Icon Select Objects.
| | 09:42 | You are going to be able to see that we have
a Row1 click Row1 that selects that row.
| | 09:46 | In that row you can see we got Cell1 and Cost.
| | 09:50 | And it shows you an icon of what type of field that is.
| | 09:53 | If you click it will select it and show you all
the properties for it over in the Object palette.
| | 09:58 | It's a great way to be able to see just birds-eye
view what's going with the table allows you to select,
| | 10:02 | allows you to change when you get
over here, lot of things we can do.
| | 10:06 | Also if you want to if you come to let's say Cell1
and suppose you want to change the name of that,
| | 10:11 | if you right-click on that you can rename it.
| | 10:15 | You can also do a lot of different things in here.
| | 10:17 | You can see Insert we can edit the tables all sorts of
things we can do directly from the Hierarchy palette.
| | 10:22 | But if we choose Rename Object we can rename this we
will call this Session press Enter or Return to accept it
| | 10:29 | and it automatically changed the name of that field
to Session if you look over binding over there.
| | 10:33 | So there are several ways to be able to do this, to be
able to take fields, convert them from text to text fields
| | 10:38 | or any kind of field you want there's
easy ways to edit them.
| | 10:41 | I am going to click on this blue arrow right
here this blue area this will close the hierarchy
| | 10:45 | and we have got our table out there set.
| | 10:48 | If you want to continue you can go through
number of people total and get those set up.
| | 10:52 | So when you work with tables, tables
not only contain just text data
| | 10:56 | or pictures you can also have them
become different types of fields.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Copying within a table| 00:01 | We will take a look at how to copy
and paste cells in a table now.
| | 00:05 | This is really going to help out, really will make you a
little more productive, when you have a big table with a lot
| | 00:10 | of either different fields in it or simple text.
| | 00:13 | I have still got grunform_tables_start open.
| | 00:16 | If you are just joining us you
can open up grunform_tables_copy
| | 00:19 | and you should have the same thing, scrolled down out here.
| | 00:22 | I have got the Object palette open if
you come under window you should be able
| | 00:25 | to open Object, it is a big palette we are working with.
| | 00:26 | Now this is going to be pretty quick
but it is a great way to save time.
| | 00:32 | Out here in the table we actually have two different
fields set up, I have got a dropdown menu right here,
| | 00:36 | I have also got a text field or a numeric
field I should say right here for cost.
| | 00:40 | If you have a big table and you create or turn one of
these sex cells into a field you can copy-paste one
| | 00:48 | of the fields into another cell, this can save time.
| | 00:51 | So click on the first cell where it says "flash",
do an Edit, Copy or you can do Ctrl+C to copy that.
| | 00:58 | Click on the cell below that is just a straight up text
box right now and let's perform an Edit, Paste, Ctrl+V.
| | 01:05 | You all see that you can copy/paste
to different fields between the cells.
| | 01:09 | This is a big timesaver.
| | 01:11 | One thing I would like to point out is if you
copy/paste different cells or different fields
| | 01:16 | between cells they are going to be named exactly
the same thing, they maybe in different rows,
| | 01:20 | different columns but they will have the same name.
| | 01:22 | If you click on the flash field right here
take a look over at the Object palette
| | 01:26 | and click on Binding you will see it is
called session with a 0 at the right.
| | 01:30 | If you click on Flash here to select that cell, you
will see that it also has session name 0 right there.
| | 01:36 | Now there's a differentiating factor here, if you come to
the left you are going to see this blue button on the left,
| | 01:41 | if you click on that it should open up your hierarchy.
| | 01:44 | The hierarchy is something that is
really important when you do tables.
| | 01:48 | You will be able to see in here that it's
shown you how the table structure works
| | 01:52 | and you can see you have got your rows.
| | 01:54 | If you click Row1 here it selects that first row
and in the row you got all of your cells right here.
| | 01:58 | Now if you don't see this if you see a bunch of pluses
out here you can click on the pluses to open this
| | 02:03 | and it tends to open up all the different rows.
| | 02:05 | You are going to see right here we got a field, let
me scroll down a little bit, field called Session
| | 02:10 | and if you click on that you can see it is
the first field upper left and you also see
| | 02:14 | in Row2 you have got another one called Session.
| | 02:16 | Now you can keep them as the same name, they are still
going to be able to perform different things because one is
| | 02:22 | in Row1 and one is in Row2 and for calculations this
can be easier later on with more complex calculations
| | 02:28 | but lot of times people get in a habit of renaming
these like session 0, session 1, things like that.
| | 02:33 | So it is up to you how you want to work.
| | 02:35 | Now if you want to, go ahead and close the
hierarchy palette here, click on the blue arrow.
| | 02:40 | If you want to you can copy-paste more than one field.
| | 02:44 | So if you click on Flash, Shift-click on
cost you can even go all the way across
| | 02:49 | and select all of these with the Shift key.
| | 02:51 | If you choose edit-copy or Ctrl+C, what we are going to
do is paste over the top of these two right here so click
| | 02:58 | on the first one, Shift-click on
the second and just do a paste.
| | 03:01 | It actually pasted the same field we had a minute ago,
| | 03:04 | the drop-down as well as a numeric
field here , which is for the cost.
| | 03:08 | So to test that out click on preview PDF, scroll down,
you should be able to see that you can click on each one
| | 03:17 | of these independently, choose them
separately and if you come to cost here
| | 03:20 | and click you can type in a value or the numbers.
| | 03:23 | So each one of these is now an independent value or field.
| | 03:26 | So there we go, nice easy way to
be able to copy and paste fields.
| | 03:30 | Click back on Design View you should be able to now work
a lot faster when you work with tables because as you set
| | 03:36 | up these text fields, and if you don't
know how to do that you can always go back
| | 03:39 | to the previous video where we talked about that.
| | 03:42 | You can copy-paste these fields, get
it done a lot faster for your workflow.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Working with form hierarchy| 00:01 | We will take a look at how to work with the hierarchy of
the document now in terms of tables and working with tables.
| | 00:08 | And I have still got grunform_table start open.
| | 00:09 | If you are just joining us you can open
| | 00:11 | up grunform_tables_hierarchy , which
will get you exactly were we are.
| | 00:15 | If you want to you can scroll down a bit or your palettes
or the right might look a little different that's OK.
| | 00:19 | When you work with tables in bicycle designer you are
going to do a lot of selecting you are going to do a lot
| | 00:24 | of editing things like that and to learn more about that you
can visit the previous videos where we talked about that.
| | 00:30 | But you are also going to get into the hierarchy and
I have mentioned this in previous videos but I want
| | 00:33 | to focus a little bit on it right now that this table out
here and you can tell us the table because as you hover
| | 00:39 | over you can usually see cell 1 cell 2 things like that.
| | 00:42 | Now when I look at tables it's really kind of hard to
tell it is a table because these can actually be renamed.
| | 00:48 | You can name these things anything you want.
| | 00:49 | I could call these sessions.
| | 00:51 | To tell us an actual table if you look on the left you
are going to see this blue arrow or a blue low gripper
| | 00:56 | if you click on that it will open up the hierarchy palette.
| | 00:59 | If you don't see that if you can't get to
it you can also come under the Window menu
| | 01:02 | and choose hierarchy that opens it as well.
| | 01:05 | If you look in a hierarchy the hierarchy displays
how the page is structured, how the things are built.
| | 01:11 | Usually as you add things out here
they just go one after the other
| | 01:14 | and you will see all the different types
of fields and things we have out here.
| | 01:17 | If you group things you can see groups we
have got different things out there like that.
| | 01:22 | If you start to get further in here and you want
to create let's say dynamic forms that's sort
| | 01:26 | of content you can create what's called sub-forms , which
are separate content, it's almost like a group in some ways
| | 01:32 | but you can make it so it opens or expands automatically.
| | 01:35 | Right now as you look at this you
can see most of the content out here.
| | 01:39 | You can see that we have got bunch
of different things going on.
| | 01:42 | At very top up here you should be able
to see that all of these are open.
| | 01:45 | If they are not if you see something like
this like untitled sub form like in the plus
| | 01:49 | that should open it you will notice that we have a
rectangle right here and if you click on rectangle 1
| | 01:54 | that actually selects it on the page and tells you
what it is, so there it is right there you can see it.
| | 01:58 | If you see the group click on the
group it selects the group at the top.
| | 02:02 | Open up the group by clicking a plus
here and you will see everything that's
| | 02:04 | in the group you can select these images
and text individually these pieces.
| | 02:09 | Now the great thing about the hierarchy
is you can rename things.
| | 02:12 | The reason why I am going to show you this is because
sometimes it's going to make it easier to find
| | 02:17 | out where things are, keep track of things and if you
open someone else's form if they have things out here
| | 02:24 | where you would expect the word Group and it says let's
say header you are going to know why what's going on here.
| | 02:29 | So you are going to see that this group if you click on
the Group icon or the name is the header of the page.
| | 02:34 | So what I would like to do is instead of having Group
to be called Group well I am going to call it header
| | 02:39 | so I know that this is the header information.
| | 02:41 | You can rename anything in here.
| | 02:42 | If you right-click on group you will see
rename object as well as delete object.
| | 02:47 | Choose rename object, it allows you to rename.
| | 02:50 | We will just call this header.
| | 02:51 | Press Enter or Return to accept it, it's still a group
| | 02:54 | and you can tell it's a group because
of that little icon right there.
| | 02:57 | You can still ungroup it you can
still do anything we need to do to it
| | 03:01 | but we just simply renamed it so
we know where it is and what it is.
| | 03:05 | All the different fields out here you are able to see the
different things we have if you scroll down you are able
| | 03:09 | to see that there's another group in here with
our Reset button and our Email Submit button.
| | 03:13 | I will like to rename that group we will
call that buttons so if you right-click
| | 03:16 | on it choose rename object we will
just call this Buttons Enter or Return.
| | 03:21 | A lot of people also call this footer
and this could be the footer area.
| | 03:24 | They are group and if you look here you are going
to see Table1 as well as all the rows inside.
| | 03:29 | Now some people will rename tables or rows or cells
just because you might have multiple tables on a page
| | 03:35 | and it's easier to attract , which one is , which, so
for instance if we come to Table1 you click on that,
| | 03:40 | you are going to see the name or
the icon it selects the table.
| | 03:43 | If you notice on the right side if you
have your object palette open right now,
| | 03:47 | you can open it by coming under window and choosing object.
| | 03:51 | If you click on the binding tab
you will see a name right there.
| | 03:53 | The name can either be important or not important
depending on what you are doing with the form.
| | 03:58 | If you have calculations if you are trying to get really
complex with things the name can become very important.
| | 04:03 | Otherwise the naming can just be what you want it to be.
| | 04:06 | We can change the name right here on the binding tab
or if you come over to Table1 right-click on it just
| | 04:11 | like anything else in here you
will be able to see rename object.
| | 04:15 | Choose rename object it allows you to rename this.
| | 04:17 | We are going to call this Sessions for our sessions tables.
| | 04:21 | I usually keep it really simple I try not to put spaces
things like that press Enter or Return to accept it
| | 04:26 | and you will notice the table is now called sessions.
| | 04:28 | Like I said you can rename anything it's just a
way for you to keep track of where things are.
| | 04:33 | The other thing about the hierarchy is if you just are
creating a static form , which we have been working
| | 04:38 | on in this form is static , which means it's not dynamic
it's not going to grow depending on user interface
| | 04:43 | or you know data from a database
you can reorder things in here.
| | 04:48 | If you click on Sessions Table the left
there you can see a minus sign you can kind
| | 04:52 | of go out and close things up a little bit.
| | 04:54 | So it would actually start to wrap things
and make it a little bit easier to see.
| | 04:57 | If you want to reorder things in here just to make it
so it's a little bit more in order I guess you could say
| | 05:02 | like the buttons are actually below the
table if you look at it on the page.
| | 05:06 | We can simply grab objects by clicking on them and
dragging them up and down to reorder objects so click
| | 05:12 | on the buttons drag it down below the sessions table
and release and you will be able to see that it's simply
| | 05:16 | in hierarchy putting up below the
table not changing it on the page.
| | 05:20 | Now if we had what's called a fillable layout something
it was a little bit more fluid it was dynamic maybe
| | 05:27 | if somebody you know wanted to pull in data or they
answer a question in certain way you could add like 6 rows
| | 05:32 | to the table you might want to make sure that these were
in the correct order to be able to access information
| | 05:37 | but for right now it's just trying
to clean things up for us.
| | 05:40 | So working with hierarchy in its simplest form
you can rename objects, you can reorder objects
| | 05:46 | and it just makes it a little bit easier
to tell what's going on, on the page.
| | 05:49 | So you should be able to identify things a little bit easier
by clicking, by renaming and reordering if you need to.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
8. Editing LiveCycle FormsWorking with fragments| 00:01 | After creating a form, there will be times where
you either want to reuse content or make it easier
| | 00:07 | on yourself the next time you create a form.
| | 00:08 | We will take a look at how to create
or work with fragments in this video.
| | 00:13 | So I have got grunfrom_fragments open right now.
| | 00:17 | Pretty simple form, not a lot of stuff going on out here.
| | 00:19 | We have got some calculation stuff,
submit reset, that sort of thing.
| | 00:22 | I am scrolling up and down.
| | 00:23 | Suppose that you would like to be able to take a piece of
this and reuse it in a bunch of different forms you create.
| | 00:30 | Now we could just save this or save the copy
of this and then delete what we don't want
| | 00:34 | but you have the ability now to
create what are called fragments.
| | 00:37 | A fragment is a piece of a form like it
could be a single field, it could be a table,
| | 00:42 | could be a group of fields it could be a whole
bunch of things that you can reuse again and again.
| | 00:47 | A fragment is saved externally in
what's called a fragment library.
| | 00:51 | Fragments can be used on multiple pages but there's a little
kicker to this the fragment is not just like copy/paste,
| | 00:59 | a fragment when you put it on a page, you cannot edit
it on that page, you have to edit the original fragment
| | 01:04 | and if the original fragment is edited, every
form that it's used on will automatically update.
| | 01:11 | This is excellent for things like header
information or footer information,
| | 01:14 | or let's say this conference information right
here that you are going to use all the time.
| | 01:18 | So the way this fragment work is you have
to select content and create a fragment.
| | 01:23 | If you look on the right over here, you should be
able to see the fragment library tab, click on that.
| | 01:27 | If you don't see it, you can click on
Window and open up fragment library.
| | 01:31 | Fragment library by default, there's not much in there
and we have got to kind of create our own so you create it
| | 01:37 | for a form you have already been working on typically.
| | 01:39 | So what we will do is we will select all this
content right here so coming where there's nothing,
| | 01:44 | you click and drag from all the way across.
| | 01:47 | I am going to try and avoid that red line, this
little red line there, surround this content,
| | 01:51 | you need to go all the way around it, it should
select it and if we want to make a fragment
| | 01:55 | out of this what we can do is we can simply drag
it over here so click on any one of the objects,
| | 02:00 | drag it over to fragments, get
it on to the palette over here,
| | 02:03 | release your mouse and it will create a fragment for you.
| | 02:06 | This isn't the only way to do it.
| | 02:07 | You can actually make a new fragment a
different way but I think this is the easiest.
| | 02:11 | You will see what do you want to name this thing so we
can call this Conference Info or Conference Sales Info
| | 02:17 | and you can give the description so we can say
like days, products that's what I typically do,
| | 02:25 | you are trying it describe it to yourself and
, which so you are trying to say what's in it.
| | 02:29 | You can also see a little preview, we
will see that just in a little bit.
| | 02:31 | It's going to create what's called
a fragment in a fragment library.
| | 02:35 | The fragment library is located
usually in your user's folder
| | 02:38 | in your documents folder sitting in a fragments library.
| | 02:41 | This is great because you can actually share this with
other people; if you Email this to someone, they can use it.
| | 02:45 | You can have multiple fragment libraries.
| | 02:48 | You can even open a library that you have already
created and add something to it so we could add this
| | 02:53 | to some other fragment library , which we don't need to do.
| | 02:56 | You can name it whatever you want, I typically
keep it as simple as possible so I am going
| | 03:00 | to call it ConferenceInfo, just an old web developing habit.
| | 03:04 | And see right here, it's going to say replace
selection with reference to new form fragment.
| | 03:08 | What that means is what you selected on the page
is now going to become linked to the fragment ,
| | 03:13 | which means you cannot edit that on page, you
have to go to this file right here to edit it
| | 03:18 | and it will automatically update on the page.
| | 03:20 | Now if you save a file, if you look right here
and if you save a file as an Adobe XML form ,
| | 03:24 | which is a little different file format,
you can actually reference this fragment
| | 03:27 | from other Adobe designer form files.
| | 03:29 | This is a static form so we cannot do that.
| | 03:32 | That's just a faster way to be able to work these.
| | 03:34 | Click OK. You should get it out there.
| | 03:37 | You will see that it becomes purple with this
little teeny fragment icon in the corner.
| | 03:42 | Hover over that thing, you will be able to
see that we have got this little icon here.
| | 03:45 | Now it's telling you that you cannot
edit it out here, it's completely locked;
| | 03:49 | if you try and click on objects, you will not be able to.
| | 03:51 | If you come to the right, look at the fragment library,
you will be able to see your ConferenceInfo fragment.
| | 03:56 | Now the great thing about these is if you ever need to
use it again on a different form or anything like that,
| | 04:01 | you can simply drag it on the page if you want, drop
it out there and you have got yourself a fragment.
| | 04:06 | It's ready to go all set, it works.
| | 04:09 | Now I don't want two copies out here so what we will do is
| | 04:11 | with that selected I will just
press Delete to get rid of it.
| | 04:14 | The thing about fragments like I said is
when you get it out here and you select it,
| | 04:18 | if you really need to edit this thing, you
need to go back to the source to edit it.
| | 04:23 | If you right-click on this fragment, you will able
to see in here we have got the Fragments Menu,
| | 04:28 | you can see edit fragment, fragment
info or convert to embedded object.
| | 04:32 | You will also see that Create Fragment is grayed out.
| | 04:35 | Create Fragment is just another way for you to
select content on a form and immediately put it
| | 04:40 | in your fragment library instead of dragging it over there.
| | 04:42 | Now if you want to edit the fragment
this is the only way to access this.
| | 04:46 | Click Edit Fragment that will open
up the fragment in a separate window.
| | 04:50 | What you can now do is all these are selectable, you can go
out and select these so suppose I want to move this field
| | 04:55 | down a little bit, again click on it and
use my arrow keys to move it down a bit.
| | 04:59 | What we can then do is we can just simply save the file
and if you close up the fragment, I will just switch back.
| | 05:04 | If you go into Window, you will see that you
have got your grunfrom_fragment still open.
| | 05:08 | You should be able to see it update automatically.
| | 05:09 | So it updates on every page you use this on, this can
really save you a lot of time with footers and headers
| | 05:15 | or things that are consistent across forms.
| | 05:17 | Now the other thing about fragments if you
come over here to your Fragments Library,
| | 05:21 | if you click on this object right
here there are some things we can do.
| | 05:24 | If you right-click on it, you will be able
to see that we once again have edit fragment,
| | 05:28 | you also have Fragment Info and Delete Fragment.
| | 05:31 | Choose Fragment Info and it shows you pretty much what we
saw when we set it up, what the name is and description.
| | 05:37 | You are not really going to be able to
go out here and change where it's located
| | 05:40 | or the file that's in because that would be a little rough.
| | 05:43 | Go ahead and close it, we could
change that info if we needed to.
| | 05:46 | Now the other thing we can do that I tend to like is
if Fragment Library here, if you come to the menu,
| | 05:51 | there's a little menu right up here and you click on this,
you can do things like show a preview pane if you want to.
| | 05:57 | So I choose show preview pane and what it tries
to do down here, there's a little line down there,
| | 06:01 | you can actually click and try and grab that up.
| | 06:03 | As you click on fragments, it shows you what the
fragment looks like so you can kind of pinpoint ,
| | 06:08 | which one you want to use even if you try
and name them or describe them according
| | 06:12 | to what you think you might use them for.
| | 06:14 | And the other thing we can do is if you click on
the arrow right here there's a little pop-up menu,
| | 06:18 | we can once again there's 5000 ways to do everything.
| | 06:20 | You can close the library, which
is the fragment library itself,
| | 06:23 | you can edit it, you can see the info or you can delete.
| | 06:26 | I want to focus on deleting for a second here.
| | 06:28 | Deleting can be quite dangerous actually and
in certain cases, if you delete a fragment,
| | 06:33 | what it does is it deletes it on the page that
you are on that's typically been my experience.
| | 06:38 | So what I do is instead of just
going and deleting fragments,
| | 06:42 | it usually tries to warn you of
things but I will do this first.
| | 06:46 | Click on the form, click on the fragment, right-click
on the fragment and you will see the Fragments Menu,
| | 06:52 | you want to convert this to an embedded object
before you delete the object in the library.
| | 06:57 | Choose Convert to Embedded Object.
| | 07:00 | Are you sure you want to do this?
| | 07:01 | We will click yes.
| | 07:02 | It then literally is just a bunch of things out here
that you can edit just like you created it out here,
| | 07:08 | all you are simply doing is breaking
the link to the fragment.
| | 07:10 | If you come back over to the fragment, if you right
click on it, you should be able to see Delete Fragment.
| | 07:15 | By deleting the fragment, it's going to ask you, you
are going to open up another window, are you sure.
| | 07:20 | It's open in a separate window,
we typically have to close that.
| | 07:23 | It will delete it and it will allow us
to literally start and create new ones.
| | 07:27 | So like I said it's already open in another window, I would
have to close that to delete it but you need to be careful
| | 07:32 | when you work with fragments that way because
there's a lot of things that can happen with those.
| | 07:36 | So fragments are an excellent way for you to be able to not
only reuse content but they are a way for you to link to it
| | 07:43 | in external source to link to the footer,
to link to the header across multiple forms.
| | 07:48 | This will definitely make it easier for
you to be able to work with your forms,
| | 07:51 | to keep things consistent and to make it easier to edit.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Working with objects| 00:01 | We will take a look how to create your own
custom objects in your Library palette.
| | 00:05 | I have got grunform_objects open right now.
| | 00:08 | There are times where you take a form from
LiveCycle Designer and you want to reuse content.
| | 00:13 | Now reuse content could just be a simple as
a copy paste from a form into another form
| | 00:18 | or you can save that content in your object library.
| | 00:21 | With this file open and at the very top of the page taking a
look out here suppose that we have got this header out here
| | 00:27 | and I want to able to take this group by clicking out in the
gray area out here and clicking you can select the group.
| | 00:33 | I want to go and take that and
save it so I can use it again.
| | 00:36 | If you look at your object library over here you
will be able to scroll up should be able to see
| | 00:39 | that you have got this several different categories out
here My Favorite, Standard etc. If you click on the rest
| | 00:44 | of these standard, custom and barcodes make
sure those are closed to close them up.
| | 00:48 | Look at My Favorites, you should notice that yours
maybe a little bit bigger than mine the icons.
| | 00:53 | I actually went out and clicked on the icon out here and
told it to show these as little bit smaller and I clicked
| | 00:58 | on the wrong icon there, I have to click on the
smaller icon there I should be able to go to view
| | 01:01 | and go to small icons so you can see more.
| | 01:04 | Now what we can do is we can actually save objects into
a favorites area here as a matter of fact you can save
| | 01:09 | into any one of these for the most part
but it is as simple as dragging it in.
| | 01:13 | It will then be in there for ever not just with this form.
| | 01:16 | So if you had this header group up here click in the area
out here to select the group, click and drag it across come
| | 01:22 | into your object library anywhere in here release you
will see a plus and it adds it to the object library.
| | 01:28 | It opens the Add Library Object dialog box and
what you can do is you can give this a name,
| | 01:32 | you can give it a description and
tell it , which group to go into.
| | 01:35 | So we will call this Grun Header.
| | 01:38 | Try to keep it as simple as I can, give it a description.
| | 01:40 | It might be conference.
| | 01:43 | Click on tab group.
| | 01:44 | The popup, you can put it anywhere you would like.
| | 01:45 | I usually stick these in My Favorites,
click OK and it will add it out there.
| | 01:49 | You will see it says Grun Header.
| | 01:51 | It typically shows you what kind
of field it was that sort of thing.
| | 01:55 | You will see that this was actually a group.
| | 01:57 | The next time you want to be able to use
this it could be any form you are working at.
| | 02:01 | It does not to be the one we are in right now.
| | 02:03 | You can simply take your Object Library, I have to double
click or drag it out and it places on the page for you.
| | 02:08 | It is still editable.
| | 02:10 | This is what's different here.
| | 02:11 | You can still go in and click on the individual pieces, you
can ungroup, you can delete you can do whatever you want.
| | 02:16 | OK so I am going to delete that now I have clicked in the
middle of the group to select it and just pressed Delete.
| | 02:20 | You can also undo it if you like.
| | 02:23 | So we can add almost anything you
want to your object library.
| | 02:25 | I tend to do this because you tend to recreate things
over and over again so if you want to grab a header,
| | 02:32 | a footer you want to grab half a page, a whole page design
if I ever get a table if you scroll down here that I setup
| | 02:39 | with fields and popup menus and
all sorts of things so I don't have
| | 02:42 | to keep reinventing the wheel I will usually select
that table, do it from the top here you can click on it,
| | 02:48 | drag that out from the very top,
drag it over to your My Favorites
| | 02:52 | and I add these things all the times in my library.
| | 02:54 | That way anything you want to reuse we can simply put over
here description, you can put it in whatever tab group you
| | 03:00 | like I will click OK and if you look it is a table it's
called table right there that's why I call it a table,
| | 03:06 | so as you drag that out you got to be
careful not to try and rename them according
| | 03:10 | to like just plain rectangle or something like that.
| | 03:13 | As you drag it out it will have the same
exact content and everything going on
| | 03:17 | and it's just a copy paste basically so
you can drag it to any form you want.
| | 03:21 | Now if you do put something in your Object
Library and you are not happy with it but you come
| | 03:24 | out to let's say table right here, if you right-click
on this thing you will be able to see that you can
| | 03:29 | if you want to move it to another library.
| | 03:32 | You can also remove it if you want to just
basically delete or you can choose Object Info
| | 03:37 | and what that does is it lets you rename it.
| | 03:39 | So I might call this session table and it
will give a little bit more explanation.
| | 03:44 | This table seems like a generic table click
OK and there we go makes it a little easier.
| | 03:48 | It's not going to change anything out here it's just
telling me that I have renamed this thing I can reuse.
| | 03:53 | Setting up your own objects out here can be a real big time
saver and you should be able to do that pretty easily now
| | 03:58 | by dragging content directly into
the object library palette.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating and editing a master page| 00:01 | One of the great things about working with LiveCycle
Designer is you get so many choices out here
| | 00:05 | as far as design content and how to work.
| | 00:08 | I have got grunfrom_masters.pdf open right now and what
we can do is we can actually use master pages as well
| | 00:15 | as multiple pages within a single form design.
| | 00:18 | Now master pages can take the shape of any page size you
want you can actually mix it up in a single document.
| | 00:24 | A master page is a way for you to take content that is
going to be consistent on every page things like a header
| | 00:30 | up top you got this logo in your
conference registration and this line.
| | 00:34 | You can have this show automatically on
a page without having to place it there.
| | 00:38 | If you put it on the master page master page is kind of
like a little template that's the stuff that already shows
| | 00:43 | on the page every time you make a new page in your
form and then you just add your content on top of that.
| | 00:48 | The master page also controls that content so if we had
this content in our master page I wouldn't select it
| | 00:54 | out here I would go to the master page to edit it
and it would automatically update on every page
| | 00:58 | that uses that master page or that content.
| | 01:01 | So for us to be able to see master
pages a couple ways to do this,
| | 01:05 | if you come up to the bars up here
you are going to see the tabs.
| | 01:08 | If you right-click up here in the
gray area or on one of the tabs
| | 01:10 | that doesn't matter you will be able
to see that we get a context menu.
| | 01:14 | Now depending on what you click on
you can see different context menus.
| | 01:18 | If you come to the gray area and you right-click out there
you will be able to see that we can open up different tabs.
| | 01:23 | Choose master pages and that should
open up the master pages tab.
| | 01:27 | By default when you work on a document you
do have a master page available for you.
| | 01:32 | Click on the master pages tab and
that takes you to your master page.
| | 01:35 | Anything we put out here like I said is fair game
to show up at every one of the pages in our design
| | 01:41 | so for instance click on Design View to go back.
| | 01:43 | Suppose you wanted to take this group right here and I
wanted to make it sort of that was something we could reuse.
| | 01:49 | We can copy paste this or most likely cut paste this on to
our master page so if you come up to edit we will choose cut
| | 01:56 | from the page, come to the master page you
can either right-click out here or go to edit,
| | 02:01 | paste and you will then see paste it out there not the
same location but we will drag it down here just get it
| | 02:06 | down to its snaps on the sub form
this little box right here.
| | 02:10 | And there's our master page all set.
| | 02:12 | If you click back on Design View take a look
out there you should be able to see that content
| | 02:15 | and if you try and click on it you cannot.
| | 02:18 | So a master page like I said is stuff that shows
up content that shows up on the page automatically
| | 02:22 | and then you start putting your
own content on the page itself.
| | 02:25 | Now master pages can be used it's simply just a way
to get your headers out there, your footers out there.
| | 02:30 | If you are going to have a single page static
form you don't really need to do master pages.
| | 02:34 | So you don't really need to set one up.
| | 02:36 | If you are going to have a multi-page document
you can set up a master page and it will allow you
| | 02:40 | to have this content show up automatically.
| | 02:42 | For instance, suppose we are going to have a form
out here and I want it to be a multi-page form come
| | 02:46 | up to the toolbars, click on the minus couple
of times here so we can zoom out and I would
| | 02:50 | like to add another page to the document.
| | 02:52 | So if you come up to the Insert menu
there's a million ways to do this.
| | 02:54 | You will see new page, choose new page,
add a line of second page to document.
| | 02:59 | If you take a look it's automatically using
the master content from a master page.
| | 03:04 | So if you decide you need to make a multipage pdf form or
an xtp or any kind of xml form you can use master pages.
| | 03:11 | The great thing about master pages too is like I said if
you change content on them they will update these pages.
| | 03:16 | Click back on the master pages tab, take a look
we are going to do a nice little edit here.
| | 03:20 | Suppose I want the logo to be a little bit bigger.
| | 03:22 | Click on the logo, come to the
corner, click and drag a little bit,
| | 03:26 | it should resize proportionally
making it a little bit bigger.
| | 03:28 | We made our change click back in Design View and it
should automatically update on the pages for you.
| | 03:33 | Now another reason why we might use master pages
is because if you have a dynamic form that may grow
| | 03:38 | for instance scrolling up you should see this
table out here you might have a table that is set
| | 03:43 | to dynamically expand depending
on the data added or choices made.
| | 03:47 | If that is the case and the table gets too big for the page
we can have it automatically create another page for us.
| | 03:53 | With the master page set up it will automatically
place this content out here and start working.
| | 03:58 | So we don't have to worry about the second page
that shows up not having that header on it.
| | 04:02 | With master pages you can also
set up a different master page.
| | 04:05 | If you click on the Master Page's
tab right now we have only got one.
| | 04:09 | If we want to put a second master page out here there are
fast ways to do this by right-clicking but if you come
| | 04:13 | under the Insert menu you will see now that we are on
the master page tab we can insert a new master page.
| | 04:19 | Choose new master page and the way it works in here if
you are used to working with master pages and something
| | 04:24 | like InDesign or some programs like that all the
master pages get put one after the other in here.
| | 04:29 | So you can see right now that if I scroll up I have got my
first master page right here usually called Page1 or Master1
| | 04:36 | and my second master page is right below
that, right down here with nothing on it.
| | 04:39 | If you click back in Design View you will be
able to see that nothing has changed out there.
| | 04:43 | We still have the first master page applied to these two but
if want to you can change your master pages up a little bit.
| | 04:49 | Click on the Master Page's tab if you come out here we are
going to open up the Object palette by coming under Window,
| | 04:55 | come to object, object is one that
should always be out here.
| | 04:58 | If you click somewhere to deselect and take a look
you will be able to see that on the master page
| | 05:02 | over here the master page tab you click on that you
can actually name your master pages different things.
| | 05:07 | Right now they are called page1 and page2.
| | 05:10 | To see the different names here if you scroll down in the
master pages section using a scroll bar click out here
| | 05:15 | where there's nothing you should be able
to see that this one is called Page2.
| | 05:18 | You also have the ability in some cases to change
the paper size, the orientation that's now here.
| | 05:23 | Suppose you want to have one page be
portrait and the other page be landscape,
| | 05:27 | what we can do here is we can actually change
from portrait to landscape on a master page
| | 05:32 | and if you want a different page size or
paper type you can choose that from here.
| | 05:35 | There's a custom size you can choose in here and you
can type-in the values right there if you choose custom.
| | 05:40 | So we can change that up as well.
| | 05:42 | If you come back to Design View take a
look it's still using our masters out here.
| | 05:46 | Now suppose that the second page I want
to follow up their Page2 Master Page.
| | 05:50 | In order to change the master pages
being used out here what we need
| | 05:53 | to do is we are going to select what's called the Sub Form.
| | 05:56 | You can see this dotted line right here, if you click on
that that's basically the contents of the form itself.
| | 06:02 | Over here in the Object palette you will
notice that we have a Sub Form tab right here ,
| | 06:06 | which allows us to create a dynamic form to create
what's called a Flowable or a Flowed Layout.
| | 06:11 | This makes it so that things can expand like a table.
| | 06:14 | If you click on the Pagination tab what you can do
is we can change the master page associated here.
| | 06:19 | So if you click right here where it says Place we
can do some different things with its Sub Form,
| | 06:24 | click on the popup menu we are going to say on this
page we are going to choose the Page2 Master Page.
| | 06:30 | There are a lot of things you can get into here you will see
top of next page, top of page, this is a way to make it sort
| | 06:36 | of automatically expands you can
get master pages to show up.
| | 06:39 | Just choose page2 take a look out here notice
that the page is not actually fitting it looks
| | 06:44 | like we have got two masks or two pages out here now.
| | 06:46 | Usually what happens is if you try and fit a page that
is existing onto a Master Page that is either portrait
| | 06:52 | or landscape the sub form or the
box that's created won't fit.
| | 06:56 | Click on the sub form you will see this little
box right here this is basically the content area.
| | 07:00 | We are just going to make this a little bit smaller.
| | 07:02 | If you click and drag down, yeah drag down a little bit
release and when it fits, if I keep dragging down here
| | 07:08 | when it fits it's going to get rid of the second page there.
| | 07:10 | So we can take the sub form and if you want
to fill up the whole area you can click
| | 07:14 | and drag to kind of fit on the margins there.
| | 07:16 | Just drag it out.
| | 07:17 | And all of your form content is
going to go within this area.
| | 07:20 | So this is a way we can work with master pages
you can add content, you can add more pages,
| | 07:25 | you can also create or edit your master pages.
| | 07:28 | Now if you want to you can delete
pages, delete master pages,
| | 07:31 | click to deselect somewhere you should
be able to click on the page to deselect.
| |
|
|
